config_guide.book

Patient Monitoring

CONFIGURATION GUIDE

IntelliVue MP2/5/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/MP5T/X2

IntelliVue Patient Monitor

MP2/5/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90

MP5T/X2

For monitor release F.0 with software revision F.0x.xx

Philips Medizin Systeme Boeblingen GmbH

Hewlett-Packard Str. 2

71034 Boeblingen

Germany

Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.

Part Number M8000-9306L

Reorder Number: 4512 610 23391

Printed in Germany 07/07

1Table Of Contents

1 Understanding Configuration 1

Who is this Guide for? 1

Which Monitor Models is this Guide for? 1

What is Configuration Mode? 2

Who Can Change the Monitor Configuration? 2

Understanding Profiles and Settings 3

Entering and Leaving Configuration Mode 6

About the IntelliVue Support Tool 6

2 Configuring Profiles and Settings Blocks 9

Getting Started 9

Modifying an Existing Profile 10

Changing an Existing Settings Block 11

Creating New Profiles 11

Deleting a Settings Block or Profile 12

Renaming a Settings Block or Profile 13

Changing the Monitor’s Default Profile 13

Unlocking a Settings Block or Profile 13

Configuring a Second / Third Main Display 14

3 Configuring Screens 17

Understanding Screen Settings 17

Modifying an Existing Screen 18

Creating New Screens 18

Changing the Content of Screen Elements 18

Changing the Size and Position of Screen Elements 20

Configuring SmartKeys 21

Configuring Special Screen Settings 22

4 Configuration Settings Appendix 25

About Configuration Settings 25

Profile Settings 28

Measurement Settings 29

Monitor Settings 83

Unique Monitor Settings 116

Global Settings 144

Hardware Settings 166

Monitor Database Configuration 171

H Option-Specific Settings 174

Release-Specific Information 175

5 Screen & Profile Overview 177

About the Screen Configurations 177

Sample Screen Image (.bmp) 179

MP60/MP70/MP80/MP90 Configuration Overview 180

MP40/MP50 Configuration Overview 184

MP20/MP30 Configuration Overview 188

MP20 Junior & MP20L Configuration Overview 192

MP5 Configuration Overview 194

MP5T Configuration Overview 196

MP2/X2 Configuration Overview 197

Screen Overview 198

MP60/MP70/MP80/MP90 Screen Overview 199

MP40/MP50 Screen Overview 208

MP20/MP30 Screen Overview 213

MP20 Junior (M20) & MP20L (M21) Screen Overview 218

MP5 Screen Overview 219

MP5T Screen Overview 224

MP2/X2 Screen Overview 225

1Understanding Configuration

Who is this Guide for?

This book is for anyone making permanent changes to the configuration of an IntelliVue Patient

Monitor. You must understand English, be familiar with the monitor and its Instructions for Use,

know how to make changes to measurements and settings in monitoring mode, and understand the

clinical implications of any changes you make.

WARNING Before starting monitoring, check that the configuration meets your requirements, especially patient

category, alarm limits and paced setting.

WARNING Changing the configuration may alter the way the monitor performs when monitoring patients. Do

not change anything unless you are aware of the possible consequences, especially if you are monitoring

a patient whilst in configuration mode.

Which Monitor Models is this Guide for?

The descriptions and configuration settings in this configuration guide are valid for IntelliVue Patient

Monitors MP2, MP5, MP20/30, MP40/50, MP60/70, MP80/90, and the IntelliVue X2 Multi-

Measurement Module (when used as a standalone monitor), release F.0 with software F.0x.xx. This

guide can not be used for other monitor models or IntelliVue monitors with other software releases.

Not all information contained in this guide applies to all monitor models. If a certain section applies

only to certain models, this is indicated next to the section heading.

For example, if a certain section does not apply to the MP2 and X2, or - in other words - only applies

to monitor models MP5, MP20/30, MP40/50, MP60/70, and MP80/90, it would be indicated like

this:

MP5-90

only

1 Understanding Configuration What is Configuration Mode?

What is Configuration Mode?

The monitor ships with preset configurations that are suitable for common monitoring situations. To

develop and store your own configurations you must switch to the monitors configuration mode.

Configuration mode is a password-protected operating mode that lets expert users make permanent

changes to the monitor configuration. It is an extension of monitoring mode; it contains all of the settings

available in monitoring mode plus some settings that are accessible only in configuration mode.

For example, when you access the Setup SpO

menu in

monitoring mode, you will only be able to see and

change these settings.

In configuration mode, these additional settings become

visible.

In monitoring mode, you can change settings, but cannot permanently store the changes to the monitor

configuration.In configuration mode, you can change and permanently store settings to the monitor

configuration.

Who Can Change the Monitor Configuration?

Only people authorized to do so by their institution should make changes in configuration mode. They

require the configuration mode password.

Setup SpO

High Limit : 100

Low Limit : 90

Desat Limit : 80

Alarms : On

SpO2 : On

Pulse (Sp0

)

Label : SpO

Set Perf Ref.

QRS Volume : 1

Tone Modulation : Yes

Tone Mod. Type : Enhanced

Perfusion : On

Average : 10 sec

High Alarm Delay : 10 sec

Low Alarm Delay : 10 sec

Desat Delay : 20 sec

NBP Alarm Suppr. : On

Extd. Auto OnOff : Disabled

Color : Cyan

Understanding Profiles and Settings 1 Understanding Configuration

Understanding Profiles and Settings

The IntelliVue patient monitor is highly configurable. To manage its various settings, settings are grouped

into six main categories:

•Profiles

•Screens

•Monitor settings

• Measurement settings

• Global settings

• Hardware settings

All settings except hardware settings can be changed in configuration mode. Hardware settings can be

changed in service mode only (with some exceptions).

Profiles

Profiles are named combinations of the following “building blocks”:

• Patient category

•Paced status

•(Display) Screen

• Measurement Settings block

• Monitor Settings block.

A monitor can have up to 20 different Profiles.

When you load a Profile, the configured combination

of building blocks becomes active.

This provides a powerful method to easily adapt the

monitor to specific clinical scenarios or users, or

switch back and forth between different configurations depending on specific phases within a case.

Consider this example: You are in the ER. Your monitor is configured for an adult patient. Your next

patient is a 5-year old child. By switching to a predefined pediatric ER Profile, you can have appropriate

measurement settings (such as alarm limits), patient category and so forth very easily, instead of having to

alter measurements and limits individually. In this example, your monitor’s Profiles can be based on the

age and condition of your patient, but there are of course other use models.

Profiles

Profile : Profile Adult

Patient Category : Adult

Paced : Yes

Display : 6 Waves A

Measmnt. Settings : Measmt. Adult

Monitor Settings : Monitor A

1 Understanding Configuration Understanding Profiles and Settings

This graphic illustrates the concept of Profiles and their building blocks in the IntelliVue Patient Monitor.

Notice that settings blocks and screens are only linked to a Profile. This indicates that storing a changed

Profile saves the combination of building blocks, but not individual monitor settings, measurement

settings, or Screens. Changes that you have made to measurement or monitor settings, or screens can only

be stored in the appropriate type of settings block or Screen. For details, see "Changing an Existing

Settings Block" on page 11.

Patient Category

For each profile, a patient category is defined. This patient category becomes active when you load the

Profile. It determines

– the algorithm the monitor uses to process and calculate some measurements (for example

arrhythmia),

– the safety limits that apply for some measurements (for example NBP), and

– the alarm limit ranges for all measurements.

Note that a change of the patient category does not change any alarm limits to fit this category.

Paced

For each profile, the paced status is defined. The defined paced status becomes active when you load the

Profile. The paced setting determines whether the monitor shows pacemaker pulses or not. When Paced

is set to No, pace pulses are filtered and therefore do not show in the ECG wave. For paced patient Paced

must be set to Yes.

Understanding Profiles and Settings 1 Understanding Configuration

Display Screens

A Screen defines the overall selection, size and position of measurement waves, numerics and SmartKeys

on the monitor display. A monitor can have a maximum of 20 preconfigured Screens, optimized for

common monitoring scenarios. Examples of different Screens include the Big Numerics, the 12-

lead ECG, and the Horizon Screen. For a complete list of Screens supplied with your monitor model,

see the section "Screen Overview" on page 198.

For each Profile, a Screen is defined. This Screen becomes the active Screen when you load the Profile. If

you are using two or three main displays, for each main display a different Screen can be configured.

Measurement Settings

Measurement settings are settings specific to each measurement, for example alarm limits, measurement

color, or measurement unit. For a complete list of measurement settings, see the section "Measurement

Settings" on page 29.

A monitor can have a maximum of 10 blocks of measurement settings. Each block includes the complete

list of measurement settings available. You can configure individual measurement settings differently for

each settings block. By configuring different settings blocks, you can provide customized combinations of

measurement settings for different profiles.

A typical example are the measurement settings blocks provided in the factory default configurations

(documented in this guide). The measurement settings blocks Measmt. Adult, and Measmt.

Pedi, for example, differ mainly by the alarm limits which are configured differently for different patient

ages. When you switch to a different Profile, for example from Profile Adult to Profile Pedi,

the measurement settings block defined for that Profile becomes active.

Monitor Settings

Monitor settings define general aspects of how the monitor works, and include settings that affect more

than one measurement, such as alarm volume, report settings, or display brightness. For a complete list of

monitor settings, see the section "Monitor Settings" on page 83.

A monitor can have a maximum of 10 blocks of monitor settings. Each block includes the complete list of

monitor settings available. You can configure individual monitor settings differently for each settings

block. By configuring different settings blocks, you can provide customized combinations of monitor

settings for different profiles.

For example, you could generate a monitor settings block, in which the monitor’s display brightness is

lowered and the alarm volume is softened, and call it “Night”. When you then assign this block to a new

Profile and name it accordingly, for example “Profile Night”, you can easily switch between day and night

settings.

Global Settings

Global settings are typically set once at monitor installation by service personnel and include settings such

as Altitude, Line Frequency, or Label Set. Global settings are not part of a Profile. They can

be changed in configuration mode only and are automatically stored in the monitor’s configuration with

each change. For a complete list of Global Settings, see the section "Global Settings" on page 144.

Hardware Settings

Most hardware settings can only be changed in service mode. They are typically set once at monitor

installation by service personnel, and include settings, such as Keyboard layout, the configuration of the

monitor interfaces, or video settings, such as Display Type, Display Size, and Display

1 Understanding Configuration Entering and Leaving Configuration Mode

Resolution. Like global settings, hardware settings are independent of Profiles, and any changes you

make to the hardware settings configuration are automatically stored, there is no need to save them in an

extra step. For a complete list of Hardware Settings, see the section "Hardware Settings" on page 166, or

refer to the Service Guide of your monitor model, provided on the Documentation DVD supplied with

your monitor.

Entering and Leaving Configuration Mode

Switching between monitoring and configuration mode does not affect the active settings. You can even

continue to monitor patients while in configuration mode. The password for configuration mode is given

in the monitor’s service documentation.

To enter configuration mode:

1 In the Main Setup menu, select Operating Modes.

2 Select Config and enter the password.

The monitor displays Config at the right hand side of the status line and in the center of the Screen

while you are in configuration mode.

Before you leave configuration mode, always be sure to store any changes you made. You must store

changes made to each Settings Block and to each Profile, individually. As it may be difficult to remember

whether the settings you changed belong to a Monitor Settings block or a Measurement Settings block, we

recommend that you store each block before you leave configuration mode.

WARNING If you are handing over the monitor to the end-users directly after configuration, make sure that it is in

Monitoring mode.

To leave configuration mode either:

♦ In the Main Setup menu, select Operating Modes and then select the operating mode you

require or

♦ Switch the monitor off, then switch it on again.

– If you switch the monitor off and then on again after less than one minute, it returns in monitoring

mode with the same settings (“hotstart”).

– If you leave the monitor switched off for more than one minute, the Profiles and settings loaded

when you switch back on are determined by the Automat. Default setting. See “Global

Settings” on page 144.

About the IntelliVue Support Tool

The IntelliVue Support Tool is a PC-based software application that is designed to help configuring

IntelliVue monitors and to manage IntelliVue Monitor configurations.

Using the Support Tool, you can, for example read in (clone) a configuration from an IntelliVue monitor

to a PC, modify this configuration offline on the PC, and then store (clone) the changed version back to

the monitor. With the Support Tool you can clone configurations to more than one monitor at a time.

You can also use the Support Tool to make backups of your configurations, or generate configuration

reports. The configuration files generated by the Support Tool are stored in a format that can be e-mailed.

About the IntelliVue Support Tool 1 Understanding Configuration

What Can I Configure with the Support Tool?

You can configure everything you can configure on the monitor, except that you cannot change individual

monitor and measurement settings.

In addition to the configuration on the monitor, the Support Tool allows, for example:

• Changing the order of items in the lists of Screens, measurement or monitor settings blocks.

• Unlocking Profiles, Screens and settings blocks.

• Making realtime waves, or screen trends overlap on the Screen.

• Importing Screens into a configuration, and copy Screens between configurations.

• Importing SmartKey configurations into a configuration.

• Copying monitor settings, measurement settings, and global settings between config files.

• Importing, creating and modifying drug calculator configurations.

For a complete description of the Support Tool functionality, refer to the Support Tool Instructions for

Use, provided with the Support Tool.

How Can I Get a Support Tool License Key?

To use the Support Tool, you must have a license key. To get a license key, you must attend a

configuration training held by Philips. The support tool functionality your license key permits you to use,

depends on your function (e.g. Biomed/CE/Configuration Expert) and your level of training.

License keys are issued to individuals and they may not be shared. The support tool tracks the use of each

license key: you will be held responsible for any configuration changes made using your license key.

1 Understanding Configuration About the IntelliVue Support Tool

2Configuring Profiles and

Settings Blocks

Getting Started

To start configuring your monitor, access Profiles by selecting either:

•the Profiles screen element from the monitor’s Info Line, or

• the Profiles SmartKey , or

• Profiles from the Main Setup menu.

The configuration pop-up keys will appear to let you carry out configuration tasks.

Using the Configuration Pop-up Keys

In configuration mode, the pop-up keys allow you to:

Select the Confirm pop-up key to apply your changes.

activate a Profile or settings

block

save active settings into the selected

settings block, or settings blocks

into the selected Profile.

create a new Profile or

settings block based on the

current one

delete the selected

Profile or settings block

rename the selected

Profile or settings block

make the current Profile

the default Profile

2 Configuring Profiles and Settings Blocks Modifying an Existing Profile

Modifying an Existing Profile

You can change the settings within an existing Profile. The monitor remembers any changes made when

you switch between monitoring mode and configuration mode. All changes can be permanently stored in

configuration mode, as described in the following sections.

Be aware that if you don’t store changes they will be reset to the monitor’s stored configuration when you

• change from configuration or monitoring mode to service or demonstration mode,

• load Profiles or Settings Blocks, or

• switch off the monitor for more than one minute (if the Global Setting Automat. Default is set

to Yes).

Changing the Combination of Settings Blocks in an Existing Profile

To permanently save a different combination of settings blocks into an existing Profile:

1 Select the Profile you want to change and select the Load pop-up key to activate it.

2 Change the patient category and paced status if necessary.

3 Load the settings blocks you want to have into the activated Profile one after the other by selecting

them in the Profiles menu and then selecting the Load pop-up key. These settings become active

immediately in the monitor, but the asterisk beside the Profile name in the Profiles menu shows that

the newly loaded blocks are not yet stored as part of the Profile.

4 Select the Profile again.

5 Select the Store pop-up key.

This example shows the changing of a Profile. The existing Profile 1 was built from a combination of

Screen A + Monitor Settings Block A + Measurement Settings Block A.

The new Profile 2 is built from a combination of Screen B + Monitor Settings Block D + Measurement

Settings Block C. This is now the active Profile, because it is loaded into the monitor’s active memory.

CDE

load

Existing Profile 1 New Profile 2

Active settings

Settings blocks Examples

Display

screens

Monitor

settings

Measurement

settings

screens

layout

content

alarm volume

alarms latching

alarm off time

QRS volume

Network setting

ECG alarm limits

ABP alarms on/off

NBP repeat time

Resp trigger mode

Changing an Existing Settings Block 2 Configuring Profiles and Settings Blocks

Changing an Existing Settings Block

To change settings in an existing settings block:

1 Select the settings block you want to change and select the Load pop-up key to activate it.

2 Make the changes to the individual measurements or monitor settings.

3 Select the Store pop-up key to overwrite the existing settings. Changes to a settings block affect all

Profiles in which this block is used.

Creating New Profiles

Follow these steps to create a new Profile ICU B based on the Profile ICU A and add it to the list of

Profiles stored in the monitor. As creating a Profile requires you to activate different settings, you should

not do this while monitoring a patient. Each new name you assign to Profiles or Settings Blocks must be

unique, otherwise you have two items with the same name and you will not be able to distinguish them.

1 Choose a Profile similar to the one you want to create from the list of Profiles available in the monitor.

To preview the combination of settings blocks contained in any Profile, in the Profiles menu,

select that Profile from the list. The Profiles menu (which is grayed-out) changes to indicate the

contents of the selected Profile. To view the settings blocks of the active Profile, select Current.

2 Select Load to activate this Profile.

3 Create a new Profile that references the same settings as the active Profile:

a. In the Profiles menu, select Profile.

b. Select the pop-up key New.

c. Use the on-screen keyboard to type a meaningful name for the new Profile, in this case ICU B. If

you do not name the Profile, the monitor will assign a default name. You can rename the Profile

later.

d. Select Enter.

e. Select Load to activate the new Profile.

4 Create new settings blocks for the new Profile.

a. In the Profiles menu, select Monitor Settings.

Profiles

Profile : ICU A

Patient Category : Adult

Paced : No

Display : 6 Waves A

Measmnt. Settings : Measmt. A

Monitor Settings : Monitor A

Profiles

Profile : ICU B

Patient Category : Pedi

Paced : No

Display : 6 Waves B

Measmnt. Settings : Measmt. B

Monitor Settings : Monitor B

Existing Profile:

Profile to be created:

2 Configuring Profiles and Settings Blocks Deleting a Settings Block or Profile

b. Select the pop-up key New.

c. Use the on-screen keyboard to type the name of the new settings block, in this case Monitor B.

If you do not name the Settings Block, the monitor will assign a default name. You can rename the

Settings Block later.

d. Select Enter. You have now created a new settings block containing the same monitor settings as

the block Monitor A.

e. Repeat this procedure to create a new measurement settings block.

You have now prepared the structure of the Profile you are creating.

5 Select the required Patient Category for the new Profile. In the Profiles menu, select either

Adult, Pedi, or Neo, or select As Is

to retain the patient category active at the time this Profile is

activated. Note that if you configure Patient Category in the default Profile to As Is, the

monitor starts after a coldstart with Patient Category set to Neo. A coldstart will be caused,

for example after changing the monitor’s database configuration, see "Monitor Database

Configuration" on page 171.

6 Select the required Paced mode for the new Profile. In the Profiles menu, select Yes for paced

patients, No for non-paced patients, or

As Is to retain the paced status active at the time this Profile

is activated. Note that if you configure Paced in the default Profile to As Is, the monitor starts

after a coldstart with Paced set to Yes. A coldstart will be caused, for example after changing the

monitor’s database configuration, see "Monitor Database Configuration" on page 171.

7 Select a Screen for the new Profile.

a. In the Profiles menu, select Display

b. Select the Screen you require from the pop-up list of available Screens.

c. Select Load to confirm your choice.

8 Adjust monitor and measurement settings as required.

9 Store the changed settings to the settings blocks. In the Profiles menu, select

Measmnt. Settings, and then select Store and then Confirm to apply your changes.

Repeat this for Monitor Settings. There is no undo function.

10 Store the finished Profile. In the Profiles menu, select Profile and then select Store and

then Confirm to apply your changes. There is no undo function.

CAUT ION When changing settings, you are strongly advised to create new settings blocks, rather than storing changes

to the existing ones. Similarly, when changing a Profile, you are strongly advised to create a new Profile,

rather than storing changes to an existing one. Once you store changes to a settings block or Profile, there

is no way to undo these changes, unless you have saved a backup using the Support Tool. Settings blocks

may be used in more than one Profile. If you edit a settings block it will change in the other Profiles in

which it is used.

Deleting a Settings Block or Profile

You cannot delete a locked settings block, or one that is used in any Profile. You must remove it from the

Profile or delete the Profile first.

1 From the Profiles menu, select the block or Profile you want to delete.

Renaming a Settings Block or Profile 2 Configuring Profiles and Settings Blocks

2 Select the Delete pop-up key.

Renaming a Settings Block or Profile

If you rename a settings block that is used in other Profiles, the name changes in the other Profiles too.

1 From the Profiles menu, select the block or Profile you want to rename.

2 Select Rename.

3 Use the on-screen keyboard to type the new name, then select Enter to apply the change.

Changing the Monitor’s Default Profile

Every monitor has one default Profile. This is marked with a black diamond.The monitor loads the default

Profile:

• when returning to monitoring mode after leaving demonstration Mode (but not after leaving

configuration or service mode).

• after discharging a patient.

• after being switched off for more than 60 seconds (only if Automat. Default is set to Yes).

To change the default Profile:

1 In the Profiles menu, select the Profile you want to set as default.

2 From the pop-up keys select Set Default. The “default diamond” jumps to this Profile to indicate

that it is now this monitor’s default Profile. This setting takes effect immediately, you do not have to

switch the monitor off and on again.

Unlocking a Settings Block or Profile

Profiles and settings blocks can be locked to prevent them from being modified or deleted. This

ensures that a minimum configuration is always available. A locked Profile or settings block is

identified (in configuration mode only) by a lock symbol.

You cannot unlock Profiles or settings blocks in the monitor’s configuration mode. To lock or

unlock Profiles or settings blocks you need to use the IntelliVue Support Tool.

2 Configuring Profiles and Settings Blocks Configuring a Second / Third Main Display

Configuring a Second / Third Main Display

MP90

only

A second main display and a third main display (D80) can be connected to an MP90 monitor.

To distinguish between individual main displays, the displays are numbered on the Screen. The number is

shown next to the Screen Name field.

Display 1 is always the display connected to the first CPU of the MP90 monitor. Display 2 is the display

connected to second CPU, and Display 3 is the display connected to the D80.

Most screen elements, e.g. waves, numerics, screen trends, high resolution trends, or ST snippets can be

displayed on all displays. The Screens for the second and third display are chosen from the same selection

of Screens available for the first display.

Loading a Screen on a Second / Third Display

To load a Screen onto the second or third, main display,

• on the second/third display, enter the Change Screen menu and select a Screen from the list of

available Screens,

• on any display, enter the Profiles menu, select Display 2 (or Display 3) and select a Screen

from the list of available Screens.

Changing Elements on a Second / Third Display

To change elements on the second or third, main display:

1 Load the Screen that you want to modify onto the second/third display.

2 Make the required changes to the Screen.

Profiles

Profile : ICU B

Patient Category : Adult

Paced : Yes

Display 1 : 6 Waves B

Display 2 : 12 Lead ECG

Display 3 : Big Numerics

Measmnt. Settings : Measmt. B

Monitor Settings : Monitor B

Configuring a Second / Third Main Display 2 Configuring Profiles and Settings Blocks

3 Store the Screen. To do this, enter the monitor’s configuration mode, select Profiles -> Display

2 (or Display 3), then select the Store pop-up key.

Any change to a Screen will mark that Screen modified. In the Change Screen menu, the modified

Screen is shown linked to the original Screen and marked with an asterisk (*).

If you load the same Screen onto more than one display, then modify them differently, and then store one

of the Screens, the modified Screen on the other displays will still be available. The stored Screen will be

available on all displays.

2 Configuring Profiles and Settings Blocks Configuring a Second / Third Main Display

3Configuring Screens

During monitoring, you can change the content of most of the Screen elements, for example you can

exchange a Resp wave for a Pressure wave. These changes can be permanently stored as part of the

Screen settings in configuration mode.

You can also use the IntelliVue Support Tool to configure Screens offline on a personal computer and

then upload them as part of a configuration file to one or more patient monitors. To use the IntelliVue

Support Tool for Screen configuration, you must have a support tool and a support tool license key

that entitles you to use the Screen configuration functionality. See "About the IntelliVue Support

Tool" on page 6 and the Support Tool Instructions for Use.

Understanding Screen Settings

Screen settings are stored in the Screen. Changing a Screen setting modifies the Screen. This is

indicated by an asterisk (*) in front of the Screen name. In the Change Screen menu, modified Screens

are shown linked to their parent Screens.

Screen settings include:

• the basic layout of a Screen, i.e. the selection, size, and position of any Screen element visible on the

Screen. The Screen layout cannot be modified in the monitor’s configuration mode.

• the content of each Screen element, i.e. the information displayed in each Screen element.

• the selection and sequence of SmartKeys available on a Screen.

• special settings that determine the behavior of certain Screen elements, such as Screen trends,

realtime waves, embedded trend windows, or embedded Other Bed Overview windows.

3 Configuring Screens Modifying an Existing Screen

Modifying an Existing Screen

To change an existing Screen:

1 Load the Screen and make the changes to the Screen.

2 In configuration mode, select Profiles -> Display.

3 In the list of Screens, the modified Screen is shown linked to the original Screen and marked with an

asterisk (*). Select the Store pop-up key to overwrite the existing Screen. Changes to the Screen

affect all Profiles in which this Screen is used.

Creating New Screens

1 Load a Screen similar to the one you want to create from the list of Screens available in the monitor.

2 Create a new Screen based on the active Screen:

a. In the Profiles menu, select Display.

b. Select the pop-up key New.

c. Use the on-screen keyboard to type a meaningful name for the new Screen. If you do not name the

Screen, the monitor will assign a default name. You can rename it later.

d. Select Enter.

e. Select Load to activate the new Screen.

3 Change the content of the Screen as required.

4 Store the finished Screen:

a. In the Profiles menu, select Display.

b. Select the pop-up key Store and then Confirm to apply your changes. There is no undo

function.

Changing the Content of Screen Elements

Changing the Content of a Wave Element

To change the content of a wave element on a Screen,

1 Select the wave you want to change.

2 From the wave menu that appears, select Change Wave and then select the wave you want to be

displayed.

Changing the Content of a Numeric Element

To change the content of a numeric element on a Screen,

1 Select the numeric you want to change. You can only change numerics that are not directly associated

with (aligned to) a wave.

2 From the Setup menu that appears, select Change Numeric and then select the numeric you want

to be displayed.

Changing the Content of Screen Elements 3 Configuring Screens

Changing the Content of a Screen Trend Element

To change the content of a screen trend element on a Screen,

1 Select the screen trend you want to change.

2 From the trend menu that appears, select Change Trend and then select the screen trend you want

to be displayed.

Changing the Content of a High Resolution Trend Element

MP5-90

only

To change the content of a HiRes Trend element on a Screen,

1 Select the HiRes Trend you want to change.

2 From the menu that appears, select the HiRes trend you want to be displayed.

Depending on the H option (see "Understanding H and M Options" on page 27) and C option of your

monitor, the following parameters are available for selection:

Displaying Timers on the Main Screen

If you want to have a timer displayed on the Main Screen, you can substitute it for a numeric which is not

directly associated with a wave.

To display a timer on the Main Screen,

1 Select the numeric you want to substitute.

2 Select Change Numeric.

3 Select Any Timer. The monitor automatically uses the timer label with the highest priority that is

not displayed on the Screen yet. See "Configuring Timers" on page 136.

H10 / H40 H20 H30 Comments

btbHR X X X These 4 parameters are included in the OxyCRG option

(C08)

MP5: tcpO

not available. BtbHR, SpO

, and Resp

available with option H20 only

SpO

XXX

Resp XXX

tcpO

Pulse X X X MP20 -90 monitors only

Perf XXX

tcpCO

XXX

ABP XXX

PAP XX

CVP XXX

ICP XXX

CPP XXX

BIS XXX

CCO XXX

AWP XXX

Any Agent X

Delta SpO

inO

3 Configuring Screens Changing the Size and Position of Screen Elements

Be aware of the following restrictions:

• If limited space is available, some elements displayed in the Timers window may not be displayed. The

minimum information displayed is the elapsed or remaining time.

• The maximum number of timers that can be displayed on the Main Screen depends on your monitor

model:

– MP60-90: four timers

– MP40-50: three timers

– MP20-30: two timers

– MP5/MP5T: one timer

–MP2/X2: no timer

• Any timer label can only be used once per Screen.

Displaying a Clock on the Main Screen

If you want to have a clock displayed on the Main Screen, you can substitute it for a numeric which is not

directly associated with a wave.

To display a clock on the Main Screen,

1 Select the numeric you want to substitute.

2 Select Change Numeric.

3 Select Clock.

Be aware of the following restrictions:

• Only one clock can be displayed per Screen

• If limited space is available, the label “Clock” may not be displayed. The minimum information

displayed is the time.

Displaying a ProtocolWatch Status Indicator on the Main Screen

MP5-90

only

If you want to have a ProtocolWatch status indicator displayed on the Main Screen, you can substitute it

for a numeric which is not directly associated with a wave.

To display a ProtocolWatch status indicator on the Main Screen,

1 Select the numeric you want to substitute.

2 Select Change Numeric.

3 Select PW Status.

Only one ProtocolWatch status indicator can be displayed per Screen.

Changing the Size and Position of Screen Elements

You cannot change the size and position of Screen elements. This is a configuration service that is

provided, at a charge, by Philips, for monitors with option C20.

Configuring SmartKeys 3 Configuring Screens

Configuring SmartKeys

There are two ways to configure SmartKeys:

• Configuring a different list of SmartKeys for each Screen (not possible for MP2/X2)

• Configuring a global list of SmartKeys that applies for all Screens

Configuring a Different List of SmartKeys for Each Screen

MP5-90

only

The selection and order of SmartKeys that are specific to a Screen are stored as part of the Screen, i.e. as a

Screen setting. This can be configured on the monitor (in configuration mode) or by using the Support

Tool Screen Editor. The following describes how to configure SmartKeys on the monitor. For a detailed

description on how to use the Support Tool Screen Editor, see the Support Tool Instructions for Use.

To change the selection of SmartKeys displayed,

1 Select Main Screen, then select the left double arrow key to scroll back one page of SmartKeys.

2 Select the SmartKey SmartKeys to open a menu that lists all SmartKeys currently configured for

that Screen. From the pop-up key line, select Add to open a second menu that contains all available

SmartKeys.

3 From the second menu, select the desired SmartKey. This adds the new key to the bottom of the list of

configured SmartKeys (on the left). The maximum number of SmartKeys per Screen is 30 for the

MP60/70/80/90, and 24 for the MP40/50, MP20/30, and MP5.

To delete a SmartKey from the list of configured SmartKeys,

♦ select it in the list, then select the pop-up key Delete.

To move a SmartKey to a different position,

♦ Use the Sort Up and Sort Down pop-up keys. The number of SmartKeys visible at a time

depends on the monitor’s display resolution:

SVGA: 6

XGA: 7

SXGA: 9

WXGA: 9

WXGA+: 9

WSXGA: 9

Configuring a Global List of SmartKeys for All Screens

The global list of SmartKeys is stored as a unique monitor setting in the monitor configuration. See the

section "Configuring User Interface Settings - Keys" on page 140 for details on how to configure the

global SmartKey list.

Individual SmartKey configurations for each Screen override the global SmartKey configuration. The

global SmartKey list will therefore only be visible when you load a Screen that has no SmartKeys

configured to it.

If you want to use the global SmartKeys for all Screens on a monitor, you must delete all individual

SmartKeys from all Screens in the configuration.

3 Configuring Screens Configuring Special Screen Settings

Configuring Special Screen Settings

Configuring the Wave Channel Speed

To change this setting, select the measurement wave on the Screen to open the related Wave menu.

Change Speed This setting determines the wave speed of the related wave channel.

If set to Global, the speed of the wave channel follows the monitor setting Global Speed (or

RespiratorySpeed, or EEG Speed) as described under "Configuring User Interface Settings" on

page 108.

If set to any of the fixed speeds (6.25, 12.5, 25, 50 mm/sec), the speed of that wave channel follows

its own distinct setting and is not affected by any changes of the Global Speed. The wave channel

speed is independent of the wave (label) depicted in the channel. If you change the wave, the new wave

will retain the set channel speed.

Configuring Screen Trends

To change the following settings, select the screen trend on the Screen to open the related Trend menu.

Change TrendTime This setting determines in a screen trend. If set to Global, the trend time in

the screen trend channel follows the monitor setting Screen Trend Time as described under

"Configuring Screen Trend Settings" on page 90. If set to any of the fixed times (30min, 1h, 2h, 4h,

8h, 12h), the screen trend time follows its own distinct time setting and is not affected by any changes of

the global Screen Trend Time.

Change View The screen trend presentation can be configured to Tabular, Graphical, or

Horizon. The Tabular view can only be used with aperiodic measurements, such as NBP, C.O., C.I.,

PAWP. If you configure the view of an NBP trend, for example, to Tabular, and during monitoring the

user changes the trend to a periodic measurement, such as ABP, the view automatically switches to

Graphical.

ShowHorizon Trend The horizon view is made up of 4 elements:

1 a horizon, drawn in white, as a reference baseline to help you visualize changes in the patient’s

condition.

2 a graphical trend, displaying patient data for the set TrendTime.

3 a trend indicator arrow, indicating how the patient trend has developed in the last ten minutes.

4 a deviation bar, showing how the currently measured value deviates from the stored baseline.

If you set ShowHorizon Trend to Yes, all 4 elements of the horizon view are shown. If you set it to

No, the graphical trend information (2) is not displayed in the trend channel.

Configuring an Embedded Trend Window

To change the following settings, select the embedded Trend window on the Screen to open the related

pop-up key line. Note that the following settings are Screen settings and therefore do not affect the

behavior of the normal (not embedded) Vital Signs and Graph Trend windows.

Select Interval This setting defines the trend interval that will be used in the embedded trend

window when the corresponding Screen (with the embedded trend window) is opened.

Graph Trend / Vital Signs This setting defines the view (Graphical Trends or Vital Signs

table) of the embedded trend window when the corresponding Screen is opened. The view can be changed

at any time.

Configuring Special Screen Settings 3 Configuring Screens

Select Group This setting defines the trend group that is displayed in the embedded trend window

when the corresponding Screen is opened.

The following setting applies for embedded Graph Trend windows only. To change the setting, select the

embedded Graph Trend window on the Screen, then select one of the segments on the left side of the

window to open the segment menu.

No. of Segments This setting defines the number of trend segments displayed in the embedded

Graph Trends window when the Screen is opened.

Configuring an Embedded CSA Window

MP40-90

only

To change the following settings, select the embedded CSA window on the Screen to open the related

pop-up key line. Note that the following settings are Screen settings and therefore do not affect the

behavior of the normal (not embedded) CSA window.

On/Off SEF defines whether the SEF trend line is displayed in the embedded CSA window when the

corresponding Screen is loaded.

On/Off MDF defines whether the MDF trend line is displayed in the embedded CSA window when the

corresponding Screen is loaded.

On/Off PPF defines whether the PPF trend line is displayed in the embedded CSA window when the

corresponding Screen is loaded.

Buffer defines which of the three preconfigured buffers is used when the Screen with the embedded

CSA window is loaded.

On/Off Clipping Set Clipping to On to improve the 3-D presentation of the embedded CSA

and make it more “readable”. When set to On, peaks in the spectral lines are artificially clipped at a certain

height (see "CSA Window Configuration Implications" on page 96). If Clipping is Off, peaks can be

displayed over the full window height which may result in a more cluttered presentation.

Frequency Scale defines the bandwidth displayed in the embedded CSA.

Configuring an Embedded Other Bed Window

MP5-90

only

For Screens with an embedded Other Bed window, you can configure which bed is displayed in the Other

Bed window each time the Screen is loaded.

To configure the embedded Other Bed window,

1 select the Other Bed window on the Screen

Clipping

Hidden lines

3 Configuring Screens Configuring Special Screen Settings

2 select the pop-up key My Care Group. This opens the Care Group menu where you can choose

between the following settings:

– Bed <xx> (Bed ID)

If you select a specific Bed ID, the monitor displays the associated bed every time the Screen is

loaded. If this bed is unavailable, the message “No data from bed” is shown in the embedded

window.

– Any Bed

Select Any Bed if you want the monitor to display the first bed shown in the care group list. If this

bed is removed from the care group, the new first bed in the care group is automatically displayed.

The setting Any Bed might be unavailable if it has been disabled for this Screen using the Support

To o l .

– Blank (Factory Default)

This is the factory default setting used on the “Other Bed” Screen that is part of the Support Tool

Screen library. If an embedded Other Bed window is configured to Blank, the window is empty

when the Screen is loaded.

At any time during monitoring, the user can select the Other Bed window and temporarily change the

current setting.

4Configuration Settings

Appendix

About Configuration Settings

The IntelliVue Patient Monitor is pre-configured with factory default settings when it is shipped. This

section documents the factory default settings and lists the configuration implications that need to be

considered when changing settings from their default.

The configuration implications are only provided in this guide. You must read this document before

you modify monitor configurations.

The settings documented here are valid for IntelliVue Patient Monitors release F.0 with software

F.0x.xx.

Documenting Monitor Configurations

If you change settings from their default, this document will no longer reflect your configuration.

A Philips representative or trained biomedical engineer can generate a detailed report of the changed

monitor configuration using the IntelliVue Support Tool. Make sure you review the description of this

functionality in the Support Tool Instructions for Use before you interpret the content of this report.

Understanding Configuration Implications

When you permanently change any element of the configuration, you must consider the effect of the

new configuration on both patient and application behavior. For additional information on the

context of the configuration settings, see your monitors Instructions for Use. Always ensure that the

monitor users are aware of the configuration settings.

Using the Configuration Tables

The “breadcrumb trail” at the top of each table indicates which Settings Block the settings are grouped

under. For example, “Measurement Setting: Main Setup -> Measurements ->

ECG” means that the ECG settings in the table below the heading are part of the Measurement Settings

Block. This is also the path you should follow to access the settings in the table: in this example, to

configure ECG settings, in the Main Setup menu, select Measurements and then select ECG.

How to read the configuration tables

The following is a (modified) example of a configuration table, as you will find it in the sections of this

manual.

4 Configuration Settings Appendix About Configuration Settings

Item Name The leftmost column in each table lists the individual configuration items. The names and

order of these items correspond to those of the menu items in the related setup menu in the monitor.

Oper. Mode These two columns indicate in which operating mode the setting is available/visible. If both

columns are marked with an “x”, the setting is available in both modes. If only one column is marked, the

setting is available in the corresponding mode only. Abbreviations used for the operating modes in this

guide are: C for Configuration mode, M for Monitoring mode, S for Service mode.

Monitor Models (Options) This section lists the actual factory default settings for each configuration

item. Some factory default settings may differ between different monitor models or H (application area)

options. If this is the case, this section will be divided into subsections. In the above example, you see the

following subsections:

• MP20 - MP90 with options H10, H20, or H40 (i.e. all except H30),

• MP5 - MP90 with option H30

• MP20 with model option M20 or M21, MP5 with options H10, H20, or H40, and MP2/X2

•MP5T

• MP2/X2 (Profile Outdoor only)

Some settings are only entered once per table row with the table entry extended to cover all columns. In

our example, you can see this for the settings Alarms from and Alarms. These settings are the same

across all monitor models, options, and profiles and are therefore only entered once in the table, in the

leftmost column.

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP20 - MP90

(H10/20/40)

MP5 - MP90

(H30)

MP20 (M20/M21)

MP5 (H10/20/40)

MP2/X2

MP5T MP2/X2

C M Profile

Adult

Profile

Pedi

Profile

Neo

Profile

Adult

Profile

Pedi

Profile

Neo

Profile

Adult

Profile

Pedi

Profile

Neo

Profile

Adult

Profile

Pedi

Profile

Neo

Profile

Outdoor

Alarms from x x Sys.

Sys. High x x 160 120 90

180 160

Sys. Low x x 90 70 40

70 90

Alarms x x On

Repetition Time x x 15 min

3 min 10 min 15 min

Auto/Manual x x Auto Ma-

nual

Manual Auto

Done Tone x Off

On Off

NBP Time x not applicable, this setting is stored in the Monitor Settings Block: see "Configuring User Interface Settings" on

page 108.

About Configuration Settings 4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Profile Adult / Profile Pedi / Profile Neo / Profile Outdoor All IntelliVue monitor models are shipped

with different profiles to accommodate different monitoring environments and patient categories.

Therefore, the default values for some settings differ between different profiles. In the example table above,

you can see this for the settings Sys. High, Sys Low, and Auto/Manual for which the subsections

are divided into different columns representing the different profiles. The column headings correspond to

the names of the profiles in the monitor, for example Profile Adult, or Profile Outdoor.

To keep the tables as readable as possible, the following rules apply:

– If the same default value applies to more than one profile in the same subsection, the table entry will

be extended to cover all profiles that apply, and the value will be listed in the leftmost column only

(see Repetition Time or Auto/Manual).

– If the same default value applies to the same profile in different subsections, it is only listed in the

leftmost subsection. For example, the default for Sys. High in Profile Pedi in MP5

through MP90 monitors with option H30 (second subsection from the left) is the same as it is in

Profile Pedi in MP20 through MP90 monitors with options H10/20/40 (leftmost

subsection). It is therefore only listed in the leftmost subsection and the corresponding table entry in

the column Profile Pedi for MP20 through MP90 monitors with option H30 is left empty.

not applicable Whenever you see a statement in the settings tables starting with “not applicable” (as in

NBP Time), this can mean two things (the exact reason will always be given in the context):

• the setting appears as a menu item in the related Setup menu, but is actually stored in a different

context. For example, the NBP Time setting appears in the Setup NBP menu. However, it is not

stored as an NBP measurement setting, but as a monitor setting in the User Interface menu.

• the setting appears as a menu item in the related Setup menu, but cannot be stored in the monitor

configuration. For example, the setting C.O. in the Cardiac Output Setup menu (see "C.O.

Configuration Implications" on page 55) defines the On/Off status of the C.O. measurement, i.e.

whether the Cardiac Output measurement is switched On or Off. However, the C.O. measurement (as

most other measurements in the IntelliVue monitor) can only be switched On if a C.O. transducer is

connected to the monitor. Therefore this setting cannot be permanently stored in the monitors

configuration.

Understanding H and M Options

Application Area Options

H10

General/Intensive Care

H20

Neonatal

H30

Anesthesia

H40

Cardiac Care

MP20 Model Options

M20

MP20 Junior

M21

1.MP20 option M21 is available in the US only

MP20L

4 Configuration Settings Appendix Profile Settings

Profile Settings

Profile Settings: Main Setup -> Profiles

Factory default settings for Profiles depend on the monitor model, as well as the monitor’s H and A

option. For detailed information on all factory-provided default Profiles, see the section “Configuration

Overview”, starting on page 180.

The monitor does not need a Profile to start monitoring. If, in the case of an error, no configuration is

loaded, or if a loaded configuration is corrupt, the monitor will be operational and use the factory defaults

documented in the configuration tables of this guide. The Paced status will be set to Yes and the

Patient Category will be set to Neo. An appropriate configuration should then be loaded onto the

monitor using the IntelliVue Support Tool.

The default Profile is used after discharging a patient, leaving demonstration, or when the monitor is

switched off for more than 60 seconds (if the global setting Automat. Default is set to Yes).

Measurement Settings 4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Measurement Settings

This section lists all the settings grouped in the Measurement Settings Block. They define how the

monitor measures and displays patient data. Read any information on configuration implications at the

end of each section before you make any configuration changes.

Measurement Settings

Page Page

ECG 30 tcGas 59

ECG/Pulse Alarms 33 CO

(Capnometry) 61

System Pulse 35 awRR (from Capnometry) 62

Arrhythmia 36 Resp (Impedance Respiration) 63

ST Analysis 38 Spirometry 64

QT Analysis 41 RRspir (Respiration from Spirometry) 66

SpO

42 EEG 66

Delta SpO

45 EEG Montages 68

NBP 45 BIS 70

Invasive Pressure 47 Te mp e ra tu re 7 1

CPP 53 Predictive Temperature 72

PPV 54 Delta Temp 74

C.O. 55 VueLink 74

CCO 56 Gas Analyzer 75

SVR 57 CO

(from Gas Analyzer) 80

SvO

58 awRR (from Gas Analyzer) 81

Sp-vO

58 MAC 82

4 Configuration Settings Appendix Measurement Settings

Configuring ECG

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> Measurements -> ECG

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP5 - MP90 (H10/20/40)

MP5T

MP2/X2

MP5 - MP90 (H30) MP2/X2

C M Profile

Adult

Profile

Pedi

Profile

Neo

Profile

Adult

Profile

Pedi

Profile

Neo

Profile

Outdoor

High Limit x x not applicable, see "Configuring ECG/Pulse Alarms" on page 33.

Low Limit x x

ECG Alarms x x

AlarmSrc (ECG) x x

ECG x x On

Paced x x not applicable, the paced status is stored as in a Profile, see "Profile Settings" on page

QRS Volume x x not applicable, this setting is stored in the Monitor Settings Block, see "Configuring

User Interface Settings" on page 108

Primary Lead x x II

Secondary Lead x x V (V1)

Va Lead x x V2

Vb Lead x x V5

Analysis Mode x x Multi Lead

Lead Placement x x Standard

Mod.LeadPlacment x x Off

Filter x x Monitor

Filter Monitor

SyncPulse Sensit. x x Medium (MP2/X2, MP5 only)

SyncPulse Marker x x On (MP2/X2, MP5 only)

Auto Filter x not applicable, these settings are stored in the Monitor Settings Block, see "ECG

Application Configuration" on page 97

Fix PacerAmplit x

Default ECG Size x

Color x Green White

Asystole Threshold x x 4.0 sec 3.0 sec

4.0 sec

Δ ExtrTachy x not applicable, see "Configuring ECG/Pulse Alarms" on page 33

Tachy Clamp x

Δ ExtrBrady x

Brady Clamp x

ALL ECG IN. x On

Fallback x On

Alarms Off x not applicable, see "Configuring ECG/Pulse Alarms" on page 33

AlarmSource Sel. x

PulseAlarms Tele x

Measurement Settings 4 Configuration Settings Appendix

ECG Configuration Implications

ECG This setting lets you switch the ECG measurement On or Off. If ECG is switched Off, the

monitor will change to Pulse as alarm source, if a Pulse is available. One exception to this rule can arise

when you have a telemetry device paired with your monitor. If PulseAlarms Tele (see "Configuring

ECG/Pulse Alarms" on page 33) is configured to Disabled, the monitor does not fall back to the

System Pulse as alarm source.

Primary Lead / Secondary Lead / Analysis Mode The monitor uses the primary and

secondary lead to compute HR and to analyze and detect cardiac arrhythmias. They are also available for

recordings and for display on the Information Center. The Secondary Lead setting is used only if

Analysis Mode is configured to Multi Lead (instead of Single Lead) arrhythmia analysis. It

determines which additional lead will be used for arrhythmia analysis.

Va Lead / Vb Lead If you are using a 6-lead ECG cable, the two chest leads can be positioned at

any two of the V1 to V6 positions. The Va Lead / Vb Lead settings tell the monitor which positions

you have used so that the chest leads will be correctly labeled on the monitor and in printouts. If the

Global setting ECG Cable Color is set to IEC, these settings are labeled Ca Lead and Cb Lead.

Lead Placement Set this setting to EASI if you are using EASI lead placement. This tells the

monitor that you are using EASI lead placement. The label “EASI” will be shown beside the 1mV

calibration bar on the ECG wave on the display, and “EASI” is marked on any recorder strips and

printouts.

Mod.LeadPlacment When Mod.LeadPlacment is set to On, 12 Lead ECG Reports will be

labelled 12 Lead ECG Report (Mason-Likar), and captured 12-lead ECGs will be labelled Mason-Likar to

the right of the bandwidth annotation at the Information Center. When Mod. LeadPlacment is set

to Off, 12 Lead ECG Reports will be labelled 12 Lead ECG Report, and captured 12-lead ECGs will not

be annotated at the Information Center.

Filter The Filter setting defines how ECG waves are smoothed.

• Monitor: The Monitor filter results in an ECG bandwidth of 0.5 - 40 Hz for the Adult, and 0.5 -

55Hz for the Pedi and Neo patient category. Use under normal measurement conditions.

• Extended Monitoring: This setting is only available for the Pedi and Neo patient category. Using

this filter results in an ECG bandwidth of 0.5 – 150 Hz. Use for pediatric and neonatal patients when

diagnostic quality is required but low frequency interference or a wandering baseline may be expected.

The upper edge frequency is the same as the Diag setting and the lower edge frequency is the same as

the Monitor setting.

• Filter: Using this filter reduces interference to the signal and results in an ECG bandwidth of 0.5 –

20 Hz for all patient categories. It should be used if the signal is distorted by high frequency or low

frequency interference. High frequency interference usually results in large amplitude spikes making the

ECG signal look irregular. Low frequency interference usually leads to a wandering or rough baseline. In

the operating room, the Filter reduces artifacts and interference from electrosurgical units. Under

normal measurement conditions, selecting Filter may suppress the QRS complexes too much and

thus interfere with the clinical evaluation of the ECG displayed on the monitor. This does not affect the

ECG analysis performed by the monitor. If AutoFilter ("ECG Application Configuration" on page

97) is set to On, the filter setting will automatically be set to Filter if electromagnetic interference is

detected.

4 Configuration Settings Appendix Measurement Settings

• Diag (Diagnostic): The setting Diag selects the highest available ECG bandwidth which is 0.05 to

150 Hz for all patient categories. Use when diagnostic quality is required. The unfiltered ECG wave is

displayed so that changes such as R-wave notching or discrete elevation or depression of the ST

segments are visible.

SyncPulse Sensit / SyncPulse Marker These settings are only available in MP2/X2 and

MP5 monitors. In the MP5 it is only available if an MIB/RS232 interface is installed and the driver ECG

Sync Pulse is configured for one of the MIB ports (see the MP5 Service Guide for detailed setup

information). If these requirements are met, the monitor outputs a SyncPulse via the MIB/RS232

interface (MP5) or the ECG Sync Pulse Output Connector (MP2/X2) which can be used to synchronize

external medical devices (such as CT scanners) to the patient’s ECG. Both settings are available in

monitoring mode and configuration mode.

•Set SyncPulse Marker to On to display SyncPulse markers in the ECG wave on the monitor

Screen.

• SyncPulse Sensit lets you change the sensitivity of the Sync Pulse detection. If

SyncPulse Marker is switched On, and not every QRS complex in the ECG wave on the monitor

is marked with a Sync Pulse marker, you should increase the sensitivity (Medium or High) until you

see a marker for each QRS complex. If you see Sync Pulse markers in areas of the ECG wave other than

the QRS complexes, lower the sensitivity (Medium or Low).

Asystole Threshold This setting lets you adjust the time period between the point where the

monitor cannot detect a QRS complex and the indication of an asystole alarm. It also affects the way the

enhanced asystole detection behaves, see "General Global Settings Configuration Implications" on page

145.

Color The color setting defines the color for ECG, Arrhythmia, ST, and QT. The color setting for

Pulse is taken from the system pulse source.

All ECG IN. If ECG alarms are off or a pulse is selected as alarm source, the INOP ALL ECG

ALARMS OFF is shown permanently. If you do not want this INOP to appear, you must set All ECG

IN.to Off (short for “All ECG Alarms INOP”).

Fallback If Fallback is configured On and there is a LEAD OFF INOP in the primary lead (and in

the secondary lead, if you are using multi-lead monitoring) for longer than 10 seconds, and if another lead

is available, this available lead automatically becomes the primary lead. This is known as lead fallback.

When the Leads Off condition is corrected, the leads are automatically switched back.

Measurement Settings 4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Configuring ECG/Pulse Alarms

Measurement Settings:

Main Setup -> Measurements -> ECG -> AlarmSrc(ECG ), or

Main Setup -> Measurements -> Pulse -> AlarmSrc(ECG )

ECG/Pulse Alarms Configuration Implications

Alarms Source In most cases the heart rate and Pulse numerics are identical. In order to avoid

simultaneous alarms on heart rate and Pulse, the monitor uses either ECG or Pulse as its active alarm

source. The Alarm Source setting lets you choose ECG, Pulse or Auto as the source of heart-

related rate alarms.

• ECG: Select ECG if you want the heart rate from the ECG to be the alarm source.

Even with Alarm Source set to ECG, if you switch the ECG measurement off, the monitor will

automatically use Pulse as alarm source, provided a pulse source is switched on and available.

Pulse: If you select Pulse as the active alarm source, the monitor will prompt you to confirm your

choice. Be aware that if you select Pulse, all arrhythmia and ECG HR alarms are switched off.

• Auto: If the Alarm Source is set to Auto, the monitor will use the heart rate from the ECG

measurement as alarm source whenever the ECG measurement is switched on and at least one ECG

lead can be measured without an INOP condition.

The monitor will automatically switch to Pulse as the alarm source if:

– a valid ECG lead can no longer be measured

and

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP20 - MP90 (H10/20/40) MP5 - MP90 (H30) MP20 (M20/M21)

MP5 (H10/20/40)

MP5T

MP2/X2

C M Profile

Adult

Profile

Pedi

Profile

Neo

Profile

Adult

Profile

Pedi

Profile

Neo

Profile

Adult

Profile

Pedi

Profile

Neo

Profile

Outdoor

Alarms Source x x ECG

Auto Auto Auto

ECG Alarms x x On

Pulse Alarms x x Off

High Limit x x 120 160 200

120

Low Limit x x 50 75 100

Δ ExtrTachy x 20

Tachy Clamp x 200 220 240

200

Δ ExtrBrady x 20

Brady Clamp x 40 50

40 60 80 40

Alarms Off x Enabled

AlarmSource Sel. x Enabled

PulseAlarms Tele x Enabled

4 Configuration Settings Appendix Measurement Settings

– a Pulse source is switched on and available.

The monitor then uses the pulse rate from the measurement currently active as system pulse. While

Pulse is the alarm source, all arrhythmia and ECG HR alarms are switched off. If an ECG lead

becomes available again, the monitor automatically uses ECG as alarm source.

NOTE If the ECG measurement is switched off, the monitor will always change to Pulse as alarm source, if a

Pulse source is available. One exception to this rule can arise when you have a telemetry device paired with

your monitor. The monitor ECG is then deactivated but the monitor may be configured to allow only

ECG as the active alarm source. In this case the monitor will not switch to Pulse as alarm source and Pulse

will not be available as a selection in the

ECG/Pulse Alarms menu.

WARNING Selecting Pulse as the active alarm source for HR/Pulse switches off most arrhythmia alarms (see the

Instructions for Use), and the heart rate alarms. High and low pulse rate and extreme bradycardia and

extreme tachycardia alarms from Pulse are active.

This is indicated by the crossed-out alarm symbol beside the ECG heart rate numeric and the message

All ECG Alarms Off, if configured (see "Configuring ECG" on page 30).

ECG Alarms/Pulse Alarms This lets you switch Off ECG/Pulse Alarms. Be aware that if

you switch off ECG alarms, all Arrhythmia alarms are switched off.

High Limit/Low Limit ECG and Pulse share the same alarm limits. These alarm limits apply to

the currently selected alarm source, either ECG or Pulse. Note that if you change the High/Low alarm

limits in the Setup ECG menu, this will also change the High/Low alarm limits in the Setup Pulse menu

and vice versa.

Δ ExtrTachy, Δ ExtrBrady Extreme bradycardia and extreme tachycardia alarms are based on the

ECG/Pulse limit alarms. Use the

Δ ExtrTachy and Δ ExtrBrady setting to define the difference

between the heart rate limit and the extreme limit. For example, if the heart rate high limit is 120 bpm and

the difference is 20 bpm then the extreme tachycardia limit is 140.

ECG and Pulse share the same alarm limits. The

Δ ExtrTachy and Δ ExtrBrady settings apply to the

currently selected alarm source, either ECG or Pulse. If you change the

Δ ExtrTachy or Δ ExtrBrady

setting in the Setup ECG menu, this will also change the

Δ ExtrTachy or Δ ExtrBrady setting in the

Setup Pulse menu and vice versa.

Tachy Clamp, Brady Clamp The Brady and Tachy clamp allows you to configure a safety

threshold for the extreme bradycardia and tachycardia alarm limits. For example, if the low heart rate limit

is 50 bpm and the

Δ ExtrBrady setting is 20 bpm (50 bpm - 20 bpm = 30) with a Brady clamp set at

40, the resulting extreme bradycardia limit would be 40 bpm (instead of 30 bpm). If the clinician sets the

ECG alarm limit above or below the limit clamps for an individual patient, the limit clamps become the

extreme brady or extreme tachy alarm (these are red alarms). Be sure to set the clamps beyond the

configured ECG limits.

ECG and Pulse share the same alarm limits. The Tachy Clamp and Brady Clamp settings apply to

the currently selected alarm source, either ECG or Pulse. If you change the Tachy Clamp or Brady

Clamp setting in the Setup ECG menu, this will also change the Tachy Clamp or Brady Clamp

setting in the Setup Pulse menu and vice versa.

Alarms Off If this is configured to Disabled, the user cannot switch off ECG alarms in

monitoring mode. Note that changing the Alarms Off setting in the Setup ECG menu also changes

the Alarms Off setting in the Setup Pulse menu and vice versa.

Measurement Settings 4 Configuration Settings Appendix

AlarmSource Sel. If you do not want the Alarm Source setting to be available in monitoring

mode, you must set AlarmSource Sel. to Disabled. Note that if you change the

AlarmSource Sel. setting in the Setup ECG menu, this will also change the AlarmSource

Sel. setting in the Setup Pulse menu and vice versa.

PulseAlarms Tele This setting affects the monitor’s behavior only while it is paired with a

telemetry transmitter. In paired mode, if the Tele transmitter delivers a valid ECG, the monitor

automatically deactivates the internal ECG and displays the ECG from the telemetry transmitter. With

the internal ECG deactivated, and PulseAlarms Tele configured to Enabled, the monitor

automatically falls back to the monitor’s System Pulse as alarming source if a System Pulse is available.

With PulseAlarms Tele configured to Disabled, the monitor does not fall back to the System

Pulse as alarm source. In this case no ECG/Pulse alarms from the bedside monitor are active. When the

monitor ECG becomes available again, or the telemetry transmitter is unpaired, the monitor automatically

activates the internal ECG and the configured ECG/Pulse alarms are active again.

Configuring the System Pulse

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> Measurements -> Pulse

System Pulse Configuration Implications

System Pulse The System Pulse setting allows you to configure the measurement source for the

System Pulse.

The pulse rate chosen as system pulse:

• is monitored as system pulse and generates alarms when you select Pulse as the active

Alarm Source

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP5 - MP90 (H10/20/40)

MP5T

MP2/X2

MP5 - MP90 (H30) MP2/X2

C M Profile

Adult

Profile

Pedi

Profile

Neo

Profile

Adult

Profile

Pedi

Profile

Neo

Profile

Outdoor

High Limit x x not applicable, see "Configuring ECG/Pulse Alarms" on page 33.

Low Limit x x

Pulse Alarms x x

AlarmSrc (ECG) x x

System Pulse x x SpO

Auto SpO2

QRS Volume x x not applicable, see "Configuring User Interface Settings" on page 108.

Δ ExtrTachy x not applicable, see "Configuring ECG/Pulse Alarms" on page 33.

Tachy Clamp x

Δ ExtrBrady x

Brady Clamp x

Alarms Off x

AlarmSource Sel. x

PulseAlarms Tele x

4 Configuration Settings Appendix Measurement Settings

• is sent via the network to the Information Center, if available

• is trended in the HighRes Trends and stored in the monitor’s databases.

The choices are SpO

, SpO

l, SpO

r, %SpO

T, P, ABP, ART, Ao, PAP, UAP,

FAP, BAP, and Auto. If you select Auto, the monitor automatically chooses a pulse rate to be used as

system pulse. It looks through the list from top to bottom and activates the first pulse rate that is switched

on and available.

Configuring Arrhythmia

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> Measurements -> Arrhythmia

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP5 - MP90 (H10/20/40)

MP5T

MP2/X2

MP5 - MP90 (H30) MP2/X2

C M Profile

Adult

Profile

Pedi

Profile

Neo

Profile

Adult

Profile

Pedi

Profile

Neo

Profile

Outdoor

Arrhythmia

x x On Off Off On

Asystol. Threshold x x not applicable, see "Configuring ECG" on page 30.

Pause Threshold x x 2.0 sec 1.5 sec

2.0 sec

VTach HR x x 100 120 150

100

VTach Run x x 5

Vent Rhythm x x 14

SVT HR x x 180 200 210

180

SVT Run x x 5

PVCs/min x x 10 5 5

Non-Sustain x x On

Vent Rhythm x x On

Run PVCs x x On

Pair PVCs x x On

Off On

R-On-T PVCs x x On

Off On

V. Bi g em in y x x O n

Off On

V. Tri g eminy x x O n

Off On

PVCs/min x x On

Off On

Multif.PVCs x x On

Off On

Pacer N.Cap x x On

Pacer N.Pac x x On

Pause x x On

Off On

Missed Beat x x On

Off On

SVT x x On

IrregularHR x x On

Off On

Analysis Mode x x not applicable, see "Configuring ECG" on page 30

Measurement Settings 4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Arrhythmia Configuration Implications

Pause Threshold This setting lets you adjust the time period between the point where the monitor

cannot detect a QRS complex and the indication of a Pause alarm.

Timeout 1st, TimeOut 2nd The timeout period for first level yellow alarms can be configured

for between 0 and 5 minutes. The timeout period for second level yellow alarms can be configured for

between 0 and 15 minutes.

Arrhy OFF Msg If arrhythmia analysis is switched off, the INOP message Arrhythmia Off is

permanently displayed beside the first ECG wave on both the bedside monitor and on the Information

Center. If you do not want this message to appear, you must set Arrhy OFF Msg to Off.

SOME ECG IN If users want to be notified whenever the On/Off settings for ECG/Arrhythmia alarms

differ from the current Profile, you must configure Some ECG In to On (short for “Some ECG Alarms

Off” INOP message). If this message is configured off, it is important for the clinician to check the on/

off status of the alarms.

Arrhythmia Alarms

PVC alarms that combine runs of PVCs and rate are chained together and the configuration of one effects

the configuration of others.

TimeOut 1st x 3 min

TimeOut 2nd x 10 min

ArrhyOffMsg x not applicable, this setting is stored in the Monitor Settings Block, see

"Configuring User Interface Settings" on page 108

SOME ECG IN x On

Off

VTach To set the Ventricular tachycardia alarm, you must configure both the Vtach run limit, and

the Vtach heart rate limit. Both criteria must be met to cause an alarm.

Run = > 5

HR = > 100

Non Sustain VTach Non-sustained ventricular tachycardia cannot be configured. The criteria for this alarm is

based on the Vtach settings. It must be a run less than the Vtach run limit but the heart

rate limit must be the same as Vtach.

Run < 5

HR = > 100

Vent Rhythm Ventricular Rhythm can be configured for the number of PVCs in a run (Ventricular limit)

but the heart rate limit is automatically set to be less than the Vtach heart rate.

Run = > 14

HR < 100

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP5 - MP90 (H10/20/40)

MP5T

MP2/X2

MP5 - MP90 (H30) MP2/X2

C M Profile

Adult

Profile

Pedi

Profile

Neo

Profile

Adult

Profile

Pedi

Profile

Neo

Profile

Outdoor

4 Configuration Settings Appendix Measurement Settings

Configuring Arrhythmia Alarm Recordings

(See "Configuring Alarm Recordings" on page 87) Arrhythmia recordings are affected by the settings

Record HR and Record PVC, as some arrhythmia alarms have both a HR component and a PVC

component. To receive all arrhythmia alarm recordings, you must configure both these alarms on. If PVC

alarm recording is off but HR alarm recording is on, these PVC alarms are not recorded:

Non-Sustain Vtach; Vtach; Ventricular Rhythm; Run of PVCs; Pair of PVCs; R on T PVC; V Bigeminy;

V Trigeminy; PVC/min; MultiFocal PVC.

Arrhythmia and Visible and Audible Alarm Latching

(Main Setup -> Alarms -> Alarm Settings; see "Configuring Alarms" on page 84) Alarm visual and audio

latching settings can affect the arrhythmia alarm sounds. Visual and Audible Latching should be set to

Red or Red and Yellow if Arrhythmia is On.

Configuring ST Analysis

ST segment monitoring is intended for use with adult patients only and is not clinically validated for use

with neonatal and pediatric patients. For this reason, the recommended - and default - setting for

ST monitoring in neonatal and pediatric modes is ST Analysis: Off.

Lead-Independent Settings

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> Measurements -> ST Analysis

Run of PVCs A Run of PVCs must be more than two but less than the Ventricular Rhythm

Run > 5 < 14

HR < 100

Pair of PVCs a Pair of PVCs is by definition two PVCs in a run.

Run = 2

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP2 - MP90

MP5T

C M Profile Adult

Profile Outdoor

Profile Pedi Profile Neo Profile Adult Profile Pedi Profile Neo

ST Alarm Mode x x Single ST

Alarms x x On

ST Analysis x x On Off

Off

ST-Index x x On Off

Show ST In Wave x not applicable, this setting is stored in the Monitor Settings Block: see "Configuring User

Interface Settings" on page 108

Measurement Settings 4 Configuration Settings Appendix

ST Alarm Mode If you set ST Alarm Mode to Multi, the monitor will announce an ST alarm,

only if more than one ST lead is violating its alarm limit. For each mode, Multi and Single, a

different set of ST alarm limits can be configured.

ST Analysis This setting lets you switch ST Analysis On or Off.

ST-Index This setting lets you switch the ST-Index numeric On or Off for display. The ST index

numeric (STindx) is the sum of the absolute values for the ST leads V2, V5, aVF. Because it is based on

absolute values, it is always a positive number. If you haven’t selected one of the leads V2, V5, and aVF for

ST analysis, the STindx numeric will display a question mark “?”.

ST Uses If ST Uses is set to J+60 or J+80, the position of the ST Point is set relative to the

J Point. Change the ST Point by positioning the J Point up to 380ms after the peak of the R-wave.

If ST Uses is set to ST Point, the ST Point can be set directly and independently of the J Point

position. The ST Point can be positioned up to 460ms after the peak of the R-wave.

Note that switching between the settings does not move the J Point position.

Lead I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, V, V

1-6

, MCL Settings

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> Measurements -> ST Analysis

ISO Point x -80 ms -68 ms -56 ms

J Point

x 48 ms --- ---

ST Point

x --- 80 ms 60 ms

ST Uses x J+60 ST Point ST Point

1.The J Point setting is only available when ST Uses is set to J+60 or J+80

2.The ST Point setting is only available when ST Uses is set to ST Point

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP2 - MP90

MP5T

C M Profile Adult

Profile Outdoor

Profile Pedi Profile Neo

(Label)

xxOn Off

For Alarm Mode = Single-ST

(Label)

High x x +2.0 mm

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP2 - MP90

MP5T

C M Profile Adult

Profile Outdoor

Profile Pedi Profile Neo Profile Adult Profile Pedi Profile Neo

4 Configuration Settings Appendix Measurement Settings

Selecting Leads for ST Analysis

You select which leads to use for ST analysis in the Setup ST Analysis menu.

To select a lead for ST Analysis,

1 Select Main Setup -> Measurements -> ST Analysis to enter the Setup ST Analysis

menu.

2 Select Setup ST Leads to open the Setup ST Leads menu. All leads currently chosen for ST

monitoring are listed here.

3 Select the Add key. This opens the Choices pop-up window.

4 Choose a lead from the list. This closes the Choices window and adds the selected lead to the list of

chosen leads.

To disable ST monitoring for a lead,

1 In the Setup ST Leads window, choose a lead from the list.

2 Select the Delete key. This removes this lead from the list of chosen leads.

Changing ST Alarm Limits

The monitor can detect alarms on each ST lead separately, so you can set high and low ST alarm limits

individually for each ST lead. You can also set separate alarm limits for single-lead and multi-lead ST

monitoring.

(Label)

Low x x -2.0 mm

For Alarm Mode = Multi-ST

(Label)

High x x +1.0 mm

(Label)

Low x x -1.0 mm

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP2 - MP90

MP5T

C M Profile Adult

Profile Outdoor

Profile Pedi Profile Neo

Measurement Settings 4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Configuring QT Analysis

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> Measurements -> QT Analysis

QT Analysis Configuration Implications

QT Lead For QT Monitoring you can select one of the following QT Lead modes:

• All: all available leads (I, II, III, V, MCL, V1 - V6) are used to produce a global QT measurement. For

EASI lead placement, directly acquired AI, AS and ES leads are used.

• Primary: the primary lead will be used for QT measurement. If the original primary lead becomes

unavailable or is changed, QT measurement will continue with the new primary lead.

• I,II,III,MCL,V,V1-V6: a single lead selected from all available leads (except the augmented

leads) will be used for QT measurement. QT measurement will stop if the selected lead becomes

unavailable.

QT Analysis This setting lets you switch QT Analysis On or Off.

QTc Formula This setting lets you change the correction formula used to correct the measured QT

interval for the patients heart rate.

The QT interval has an inverse relationship to heart rate. Faster heart rates shorten the QT interval and

slower heart rates prolong the QT interval. Researchers have generated correction formulas to normalize

the effects of heart rate. Heart rate corrected QT interval is abbreviated as “QTc”.

Several commonly used heart rate correction formulas are available. In clinical practice, the most

commonly used formula is the Bazett formula. The setting QTc Formula let you configure either the

Bazett or Fridericia formula. The differences are shown here:

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP2 - MP90

MP5T

C M Profile Adult

Profile Outdoor

Profile Pedi Profile Neo

QT Lead x x All

QTc High Limit x x 500 480 460

ΔQTc High Limit x x 60

QTc High Alarm x x On

ΔQTc High Alarm x x On

QT Analysis x x Off

QTc Formula x Bazett

Correction Method Formula

Bazett QTc = QT / (RR)1/2

Fridericia QTc = QT / (RR)1/3

4 Configuration Settings Appendix Measurement Settings

For more detail about the QT/QTc measurement and correction formulas, refer to the IntelliVue

Instructions for Use, as well as the Application Note “QT/QTc Interval Monitoring”. Both documents are

available on the IntelliVue Documentation DVD.

Configuring SpO

The configuration settings for SpO

can be set individually for each label - SpO

, SpO

l, SpO

r, and

%SpO

SpO

, SpO

l, SpO

r, %SpO

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> Measurements -> SpO2

SpO

Configuration Implications

<SpO

Label> The On/Off state of the SpO

measurement cannot be preconfigured. SpO

automatically switched On when an SpO

sensor is connected to the monitor.

Perfusion If Perfusion is switched Off, Perfusion is not measured and the Perf numeric

disappears from the Screen. Note that you will only see the Perfusion numeric on the Screen if

Perfusion is switched On, and a Perf numeric is configured on the Screen.

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP2 - MP90

MP5T

MP2/X2

C M Profile Adult Profile Pedi Profile Neo Profile Outdoor

High Limit x x 100 95 100

Low Limit x x 90 85

Desat Limit x x 80 80

Alarms x x On

SpO

(or other label) x x not applicable, the SpO

On/Off state is not a setting, see "SpO

Configuration

Implications" on page 42.

Pulse <SpO

Label> x x not applicable, see "Configuring Pulse from SpO

" on page 44.

QRS Volume x x not applicable, these settings are stored in the Monitor Settings Block: see

"Configuring User Interface Settings" on page 108.

Tone Modulation x x

Tone Mod. Ty p e x

Perfusion x On

Average x 10 sec

High Alarm Delay x 10 sec

Low Alarm Delay x 10 sec

Desat Delay x 20 sec

NBP Alarm Suppr. x On

Extd. Auto OnOff x Disabled

Color x Cyan

White

Measurement Settings 4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Average The SpO

numeric represents an average value calculated from several SpO

values.

Average lets you adjust the averaging time between 5, 10, and 20 seconds. It represents the

approximate time period used for the calculation. The exact averaging algorithm depends on the SpO

technology (option) used and on the signal conditions. The longer the averaging time, the longer the time

needed until the SpO

value reflects the physiological event. Fast averaging is useful for situations where

an extremely fast measurement is required or few artifacts are expected. Use slow averaging where you

expect the number of artifacts to be relatively high.

High/Low/Desat Alarm Delay The alarm delay defines the amount of time that the averaged

SpO

value needs to be above or below the corresponding alarm limits before an alarm is activated.

NBP Alarm Suppr. This setting has an effect only when using SpO

options FAST-SpO

OxiMax-compatible SpO

. Set NBP Alarm Suppr. to On to suppress INOPs that would otherwise

be generated when you measure NBP on the same limb as SpO

. If NBP Alarm Suppr. is configured

to On, the monitor automatically remembers the SpO

value measured before cuff inflation and suppresses

any SpO

INOPs while the cuff is inflated.

Extd. Auto On/Off The default for this setting is Disabled. If Enabled, the SpO

measurement will be automatically switched Off when the SpO

sensor comes off the patient’s finger and

at least one of the following criteria is met:

•the resulting SpO2 Sensor Off INOP is silenced,

• alarms are paused or switched off. This also applies if alarms are remotely suspended from a connected

Information Center,

•both the SpO

alarm and the Pulse(SpO

) alarms are switched off.

If the sensor is reapplied, the SpO

measurement is automatically turned On.

WARNING Never set Extd. Auto On/Off to Enabled if continuous SpO

monitoring is intended, because

the SpO

measurement may be inadvertently turned off, when

•the SpO

sensor is off the patient’s finger and the user silences other alarms, or

• all alarms are off when the sensor comes off the finger, or

•the Pulse (SpO

) and the SpO

alarms are switched off when the sensor comes off the finger, or

• the user switches all alarms off while the sensor is off the finger, or

• the user switches off the Pulse (SpO

) and the SpO

alarms, while the sensor is off the finger.

CAUTION Consider the implications when you configure Extd. Auto On/Off differently for different

Measurement Settings blocks and Profiles.

4 Configuration Settings Appendix Measurement Settings

Configuring Pulse from SpO

Measurement Settings:

Main Setup -> Measurements -> SpO2 -> Pulse (<SpO

Label>)

Pulse from SpO

Configuration Implications

Pulse (<SpO

Label>) This setting lets you switch the Pulse from the related SpO

label On or

Off. If you switch Off a Pulse that is currently selected as the source for the System Pulse (see

"Configuring the System Pulse" on page 35), the monitor will use the next available Pulse from the list of

possible pulse sources as system pulse.

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP2 - MP90

MP5T

C M Profile Adult Profile Pedi Profile Neo

High Limit x x not applicable, see "Configuring ECG/Pulse Alarms" on page 33.

Low Limit x x

Pulse Alarms x x

AlarmSrc (ECG) x x

Pulse (<SpO

Label>) x x On

System Pulse x x not applicable, see "Configuring the System Pulse" on page 35.

QRS Volume x x not applicable, see "Configuring User Interface Settings" on page 108.

Δ ExtrTachy x not applicable, see "Configuring ECG/Pulse Alarms" on page 33.

Tachy Clamp x

Δ ExtrBrady x

Brady Clamp x

Alarms Off x

AlarmSource Sel. x

PulseAlarms Tele x

Measurement Settings 4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Configuring ΔSpO

(Oxygen Saturation Difference)

MP40-90

only

Δ SpO

is a derived measurement.

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> Measurements -> ΔSpO2

ΔSpO

Configuration Implications

First SpO

/Second SpO

This setting is only available when Measurement is Enabled. The

formula used to calculate the

Δ SpO

value is: Δ SpO

= First SpO

- Second SpO

. Possible sources are:

SpO

, SpO

l, SpO

Measurement/

ΔSpO

Set Measurement to Enabled, if you want the monitor to automatically

switch the

Δ SpO

measurement On when both configured SpO

sources are available. The user can still

switch Off

Δ SpO

in monitoring mode.

Set Measurement to Disabled, if you want the

Δ SpO

measurement to be permanently disabled,

which means that in monitoring mode it will not be possible to switch

Δ SpO

On.

Configuring NBP (Non-Invasive Blood Pressure)

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> Measurements -> NBP

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP40 - MP90

C M Profile Adult Profile Pedi Profile Neo

First SpO

xxSpO

Second SpO

xxSpO

Δ SpO

xxOff

Measurement x Enabled

Color x Green

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP20 - MP90

(H10/20/40)

MP5 - MP90

(H30)

MP20 (M20/M21)

MP5 (H10/20/40)

MP2/X2

MP5T MP2/X2

C M Profile

Adult

Profile

Pedi

Profile

Neo

Profile

Adult

Profile

Pedi

Profile

Neo

Profile

Adult

Profile

Pedi

Profile

Neo

Profile

Adult

Profile

Pedi

Profile

Neo

Profile

Outdoor

Alarms from x x Sys.

Sys. High x x 160 120 90

180 160

Sys. Low x x 90 70 40

70 90

Dia. High x x 90

70 60

Dia. Low x x 50

40 20

Mean High x x 110 90 70

110

Mean Low x x 60

50 24

65 60

4 Configuration Settings Appendix Measurement Settings

NBP Configuration Implications

Sequence A (B/C/D), every These settings are only visible if Auto/Manual is set to

Sequence and you select Setup Sequence in the Setup NBP menu. You can then define up to four

measurement cycles which will run consecutively. For each cycle you can set the number of measurements

and the interval between them. If you want to run less than four cycles in a sequence, set the number of

measurements for one or more cycles to Off.

Pulse(NBP) This lets you enable (On) or disable (Off) display of the Pulse numeric derived from the

NBP measurement. If the NBP numeric area on the monitor screen is configured large enough, the

Pulse(NBP) numeric will be displayed next to the NBP label in the NBP segment.

Alarms x x On

NBP x x On

Repetition Time x x 15 min

3 min 10 min 10 min

Auto/Manual x x Auto Manual

Manual Auto

Sequence A

x x 4 Times 5 Times

every

x x 5 min 15 min

Sequence B

x x 4 Times 5 Times

every

x x 10 min 15 min

Sequence C

x x 4 Times 5 Times

every

x x 15 min 15 min

Sequence D

x x 4 Times 5 Times

every

x x 30 min 15 min

Pulse(NBP) x x On

Unit x mmHg

Done Tone x Off

On Off

Start Time x Synchronized

Not Synchron. Synchroni

zed

VP Pressure x 60

mmHg

Reference x Auscultatory In-

vasive

Ausculta-

tory

NBP Time x not applicable, this setting is stored in the Monitor Settings Block: see "Configuring User Interface Settings" on page

108.

Color x Red

Magenta White

1.Settings are only visible when Auto/Manual is set to ’Sequence’

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP20 - MP90

(H10/20/40)

MP5 - MP90

(H30)

MP20 (M20/M21)

MP5 (H10/20/40)

MP2/X2

MP5T MP2/X2

C M Profile

Adult

Profile

Pedi

Profile

Neo

Profile

Adult

Profile

Pedi

Profile

Neo

Profile

Adult

Profile

Pedi

Profile

Neo

Profile

Adult

Profile

Pedi

Profile

Neo

Profile

Outdoor

Measurement Settings 4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Start Time If you set Start Time to Synchronized, the monitor will time the second

measurement in a series to coincide with the next easy-to-document time. For example, if you start the

first measurement at 08:23, and the Repetition Time is set to 10 minutes, the monitor will

automatically perform the next measurement at 8:30, then 8:40 and so on.

Done Tone Set Done Tone to On if you want to hear a short prompt tone and see a prompt message

at completion of each NBP measurement.

VP Pressure This setting determines the cuff pressure used during a Veni Puncture inflation. The

cuff deflates automatically after a set time (adult/pediatric: 170 seconds, neonatal: 85 seconds) if it is not

manually deflated beforehand.

Reference The NBP measurement reference method can be Auscultatory or Invasive.

Invasive delivers NBP values that very closely approximate values measured intra-arterially.

Auscultatory delivers NBP values that very closely approximate values measured using the manual

cuff method. The two references can exhibit a difference of 20 to 30 mmHg in patients with elevated

pressures, with the auscultatory reference registering the lower values. Note that when Patient

Category is set to Neo, the setting Reference is not shown. For the Neo patient category, the

Reference used will always be Invasive. For further information, see the Application Note on NBP

supplied on the monitor documentation DVD.

Configuring Invasive Pressure

Not

MP5T

When an MMS is connected to the monitor for the first time, it uses the default Pressure label ABP. When

a Measurement Extension Module is connected for the first time, the Pressure label used for the combined

Pressure/Temp connector is CVP, the label used for the single Pressure connector is PAP; plug-in Pressure

modules use the label P. If you then change the pressure label in monitoring mode, each device will

remember the new label the next time they are reconnected.

The configuration settings for Invasive Pressure can be set individually for each Pressure label. The

selection of labels depends on the configured Label Set, see "Global Settings" on page 144.

, ABP, ART, Ao, UAP, FAP, BAP, P1, P2, P3, P4 Settings

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> Measurements -> <Press Label>

1.The label P will be interpreted as P1 by the IntelliVue Information Center. It is therefore not recommended to use P and P1 simul-

taneously on the IntelliVue monitor when connected to an IntelliVue Information Center.

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP5 - MP90 (H10/20/40)

MP2/X2

MP5 - MP90 (H30) MP2/X2

C M Profile

Adult

Profile

Pedi

Profile

Neo

Profile

Adult

Profile

Pedi

Profile

Neo

Profile

Outdoor

Alarms from x x Systolic

Sys. High x x 160 120 90

180 160

Sys. Low x x 90 70 55

70 90

Dia. High x x 90 70 60

Dia. Low x x 50 40 20

Mean High x x 110 90 70

110

Mean Low x x 70 50 36

4 Configuration Settings Appendix Measurement Settings

CVP, RAP, LAP, UVP Settings

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> Measurements -> <Press Label>

Alarms x x On

ABP (or other label) x x not applicable, the Pressure On/Off state is not a setting, see "Invasive Pressure

Configuration Implications" on page 51.

Pulse (<Press Label>) x x not applicable, see "Configuring Pulse from Invasive Pressure" on page 52.

Scale x x 150 100 100

150

Mean Only x x No

Filter x 12 Hz

Mercury Cal x Yes

Artifact Suppr. x 60 sec

Unit x mmHg

Color x Red White

Extreme Alarms x Enabled

Δ Extreme Highx15105

Δ Extreme Low x 15 10 5

Sys. High Clamp x 190 140 105

190

Sys. Low Clamp x 80 60 45

65 80

Dia. High Clamp x 100 80 75

100

Dia. Low Clamp x 45 35 15

Mean High Clamp x 125 100 75

125

Mean Low Clamp x 65 45 30

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP5 - MP90 (H10/20/40)

MP2/X2

MP5 - MP90 (H30) MP2/X2

C M Profile

Adult

Profile

Pedi

Profile

Neo

Profile

Adult

Profile

Pedi

Profile

Neo

Profile

Outdoor

Alarms from x x Mean

Sys. High x x 14 10 10

Sys. Low x x 6 2 2

Dia. High x x 6 2 2

Dia. Low x x -4 -4 -4

-4

Mean High x x 10 4 4

Mean Low x x 0 0 0

Alarms x x On

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP5 - MP90 (H10/20/40)

MP2/X2

MP5 - MP90 (H30) MP2/X2

C M Profile

Adult

Profile

Pedi

Profile

Neo

Profile

Adult

Profile

Pedi

Profile

Neo

Profile

Outdoor

Measurement Settings 4 Configuration Settings Appendix

PAP Settings

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> Measurements -> PAP

CVP (or other label) x x not applicable, the Pressure On/Off state is not a setting, see "Invasive Pressure

Configuration Implications" on page 51.

Scale x x 30

Mean Only x x Yes

Filter x 12 Hz

Mercury Cal x Yes

Artifact Suppr. x 60 sec

Unit x mmHg

Color x Cyan

Blue White

Extreme Alarms x Enabled

Δ Extreme High x 5 5 5

Δ Extreme Low x 5 5 5

Sys. High Clamp x 20 15 15

Sys. Low Clamp x 0 0 0

Dia. High Clamp x 10 5 5

Dia. Low Clamp x -5 -5 -5

-5

Mean High Clamp x 15 10 10

Mean Low Clamp x -5 -5 -5

-5

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP2 - MP90

MP2/X2

C M Profile Adult Profile Pedi Profile Neo Profile Outdoor

Alarms from x x Diastolic

Sys. High x x 34 60 60

Sys. Low x x 10 24 24

Dia. High x x 16 4 4

Dia. Low x x 0 -4 -4

Mean High x x 20 26 26

Mean Low x x 0 12 12

Alarms x x On

PAP x x not applicable, the Pressure On/Off state is not a setting, see "Invasive Pressure

Configuration Implications" on page 51.

Scale x x 30

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP5 - MP90 (H10/20/40)

MP2/X2

MP5 - MP90 (H30) MP2/X2

C M Profile

Adult

Profile

Pedi

Profile

Neo

Profile

Adult

Profile

Pedi

Profile

Neo

Profile

Outdoor

4 Configuration Settings Appendix Measurement Settings

ICP, IC1, IC2 Settings

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> Measurements -> <Press Label>

Mean Only x x No

Filter x 12 Hz

Mercury Cal. x Yes

Artifact Suppr. x 60 sec

Unit x mmHg

Color x Yellow

White

Extreme Alarms x Enabled

Δ Extreme High x 5 5 5

Δ Extreme Low x 5 5 5

Sys. High Clamp x 45 65 65

Sys. Low Clamp x 5 15 15

Dia. High Clamp x 20 5 5

Dia. Low Clamp x -5 -5 -5

-5

Mean High Clamp x 25 35 35

Mean Low Clamp x -5 5 5

-5

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP2 - MP90

MP2/X2

C M Profile Adult Profile Pedi Profile Neo Profile Outdoor

Alarms from x x Mean

Sys. High x x 14 10 10 14

Sys. Lowxx622

Dia. Highxx622

Dia. Lowxx-4-4-4

-4

Mean High x x 10 4 4

Mean Lowxx000

Alarms x x On

ICP (or other label) x x not applicable, the Pressure On/Off state is not a setting, see "Invasive Pressure

Configuration Implications" on page 51.

Scale x x 30

Mean Only x x Yes

Filter x 12 Hz

Mercury Cal x Yes

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP2 - MP90

MP2/X2

C M Profile Adult Profile Pedi Profile Neo Profile Outdoor

Measurement Settings 4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Invasive Pressure Configuration Implications

Alarms From lets you choose the pressure alarm source. You can monitor for alarm conditions in

systolic, diastolic and mean pressure, either singly or in parallel.

<Pressure Label> The On/Off state of a Pressure label cannot be preconfigured. A pressure label

is automatically switched On when a pressure transducer is connected to a pressure socket on the monitor.

Mean Only If you configure Mean Only to Yes, only the mean pressure numeric will be displayed.

Filter This setting lets you apply a 12 Hz or a 40 Hz filter to the pressure signal. Use the 12 Hz filter

when the pressure transducer is connected to the intra-arterial catheter via a fluid filled tubing system

(pressure line). The 12 Hz filter reduces resonant effects that can be introduced by the tubing system. The

40 Hz filter should only be selected when using special pressure transducers, such as catheter-tip pressure

transducers, or transducers that are directly connected to the intra-arterial catheter without the need for a

fluid filled tubing system.

Mercury Cal This setting determines whether the menu entries Cal. Press and Cal.

Factor are shown in the pressure’s setup menu. If you want users to be able to perform a mercury

calibration while in monitoring mode, set Mercury Cal to Yes.For detailed information about

performing a mercury calibration, see the monitor Instructions for Use.

Artifact Suppr. Some clinical procedures may affect blood pressure, for example, a flush

procedure or a blood sample. The setting Artifact Suppr.lets you suppress the monitor’s normal

response (alarming) to these non-physiological artifacts for a specified duration (30, 60, or 90 seconds, or

Off). During artifact suppression, the monitor shows the INOP message “<Pressure Label>

ARTIFACT”, and a question mark is shown beside the pressure numerics. Pressure alarms and the

“<Pressure Label> Non-Pulsatile” INOP are suppressed during the configured period.

Extreme Alarms This setting let you enable or disable the extreme pressure alarms.

Artifact Suppr. x 60 sec

Unit x mmHg

Color x Magenta

White

Extreme Alarms x Enabled

Δ Extreme Highx101010

Δ Extreme Low x 10 10 10

Sys. High Clamp x 20 15 15

Sys. Low Clamp x 0 0 0

Dia. High Clamp x 10 5 5

Dia. Low Clamp x -5 -5 -5

-5

Mean High Clamp x 15 10 10

Mean Low Clamp x -5 -5 -5

-5

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP2 - MP90

MP2/X2

C M Profile Adult Profile Pedi Profile Neo Profile Outdoor

4 Configuration Settings Appendix Measurement Settings

Δ Extreme High/Low Extreme High and Low pressure alarms are based on the pressure limit

alarms. Use the

Δ Extreme High and Δ Extreme Low setting to define the difference between the

pressure limit and the corresponding extreme limit. For example, if the High Limit for a pressure is 160

mmHg and

Δ Extreme High is 15 mmHg, the resulting Extreme High limit is 175 mmHg. Note that

the

Δ Extreme High and Δ Extreme Low settings are the same for all pressure alarm sources:

systolic, diastolic, and mean.

Sys.High/Low Clamp The Sys.High Clamp and Sys.Low Clamp allow you to configure a

safety threshold for the Extreme Low and Extreme High systolic

pressure alarms. For example, if the High

Limit for the systolic pressure is 180 mmHg and the

Δ Extreme High setting is 15 mmHg (180 + 15 =

195) with a Sys. High Clamp set at 190, the resulting extreme high systolic pressure alarm would be

signalled at 190 instead of 195 mmHg. If the clinician sets the high or low systolic pressure alarm limits

above or below the limit clamps, the normal yellow alarm limits become extreme pressure limits and a red

alarm is signalled when the limit is violated. Be sure to set the clamps beyond the configured pressure

limits.

Dia.High/Low Clamp The Dia.High Clamp and Dia.Low Clamp allow you to configure a

safety threshold for the Extreme Low and Extreme High diastolic

pressure alarms. For example, if the Low

Limit for the diastolic pressure is 60 mmHg and the

Δ Extreme Low setting is 15 mmHg (60 - 15 = 45)

with a Dia.Low Clamp set at 50, the resulting extreme low diastolic pressure alarm would be signalled

at 50 instead of 45 mmHg. If the clinician sets the high or low diastolic pressure alarm limits above or

below the limit clamps, the normal yellow alarm limits become extreme pressure limits and a red alarm is

signalled when the limit is violated. Be sure to set the clamps beyond the configured pressure limits.

Mean High/Low Clamp The Mean High Clamp and Mean Low Clamp allow you to

configure a safety threshold for the Extreme Low and Extreme High mean

pressure alarms. For example, if

the High Limit for the mean pressure is 120 mmHg and the

Δ Extreme High setting is 15 mmHg

(120 + 15 = 135) with a Mean High Clamp set at 125, the resulting extreme high mean pressure alarm

would be signalled at 125 instead of 135 mmHg. If the clinician sets the high or low mean pressure alarm

limits above or below the limit clamps, the normal yellow alarm limits become extreme pressure limits and

a red alarm is signalled when the limit is violated. Be sure to set the clamps beyond the configured pressure

limits.

Configuring Pulse from Invasive Pressure

Not

MP5T

Measurement Settings:

Main Setup -> Measurements -> <Press Label> -> Pulse (<Press Label>)

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP2 - MP90

C M Profile Adult Profile Pedi Profile Neo

High Limit x x not applicable, see "Configuring ECG/Pulse Alarms" on page 33.

Low Limit x x

Pulse Alarms x x

AlarmSrc (ECG) x x

Pulse (<Press Label>) x x On

System Pulse x x not applicable, see "Configuring the System Pulse" on page 35.

Measurement Settings 4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Pulse from Invasive Pressure Configuration Implications

Pulse (<Press Label>) This setting lets you switch the Pulse from the related Invasive Pressure

label On or Off. If you switch Off a Pulse that is currently selected as the source for the System Pulse (see

"Configuring the System Pulse" on page 35), the monitor will use the next available Pulse from the list of

possible pulse sources as system pulse.

Configuring CPP (Cerebral Perfusion Pressure)

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> Measurements -> CPP

CPP is a derived measurement. The measurement unit used for the CPP calculation depends on the unit

setting for arterial source and ICP.

QRS Volume x x not applicable, see "Configuring User Interface Settings" on page 108.

Δ ExtrTachy x not applicable, see "Configuring ECG/Pulse Alarms" on page 33.

Tachy Clamp x

Δ ExtrBrady x

Brady Clamp x

Alarms Off x

AlarmSource Sel. x

PulseAlarms Tele x

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP2 - MP90

C M Profile Adult Profile Pedi Profile Neo

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP2 - MP90

MP5T MP2/X2

C M Profile

Adult

Profile

Pedi

Profile

Neo

Profile

Adult

Profile

Pedi

Profile

Neo

Profile

Outdoor

High Limit x x 130 100 90 130

Low Limit x x 50 40 30

Alarms x x On

CPP x x Off

Disabled Off

Measurement x Enabled

Arterial Source x x ABPm

Scale x 105 mmHg

Color x Magenta White

4 Configuration Settings Appendix Measurement Settings

CPP Configuration Implications

CPP / Measurement Set Measurement to Enabled, if you want the monitor to automatically

switch the CPP measurement On when both the ICP and the set arterial source are available. The user can

still switch Off CPP in monitoring mode.

Set Measurement to Disabled, if you want the CPP measurement to be permanently disabled,

which means that in monitoring mode it will not be possible to switch CPP On.

Arterial Source This setting is only available when Measurement is Enabled. The formula

used to calculate CPP is: CPP = Arterial Source - ICP. Possible sources are: ABPm, ARTm, AoM, FAPm,

BAPm

Configuring PPV (Pulse Pressure Variation)

MP5-90

only

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> Measurements -> PPV

PPV is a derived measurement. Pulse Pressure Variation can be calculated in two different ways on this

monitor - directly from the pressure measurement or in conjunction with the continuous cardiac output

measurement. Note that PPV settings made here do not apply to the PPV calculated by the continuous

cardiac output measurement. Only one PPV can be active at a time. See "Configuring CCO (Continuous

Cardiac Output)" on page 56.

PPV Configuration Implications

PPV / Measurement If you set Measurement to Enabled, the user can switch the PPV

measurement On in monitoring mode, provided the set arterial source is available. If Enabled, the

derived PPV may generate a label conflict with the PPV calculated by the CCO measurement, see "CCO

Configuration Implications" on page 56.

If set to Disabled, the PPV measurement is permanently disabled, which means that in monitoring

mode it will not be possible to switch PPV On.

Arterial Source This setting is only available when Measurement is Enabled. Possible

sources are: P, ABP, ART, AO, FAP, BAP.

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP5 - MP90

C M Profile Adult Profile Pedi Profile Neo

Arterial Source x x ABP

PPV x x Off

Measurement x Disabled

Measurement Settings 4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Configuring C.O. (Cardiac Output)

MP20-90

only

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> Measurements -> C.O.

C.O. Configuration Implications

Method This lets you choose the C.O. method to configure the settings for each method. If a cardiac

output catheter is connected, the correct method is automatically detected from the catheter type

connected and cannot be manually changed.

If you use the Transpulmonary method, and the PPV derived from an arterial source is Enabled

(see "Configuring PPV (Pulse Pressure Variation)" on page 54), a label conflict with the PPV derived from

the continuous cardiac output measurement may be generated.

Measuring Mode This setting lets you change the C.O. measurement mode. If set to Auto, the

clinician will be able to quickly perform a series of injections without further interaction with the monitor.

After the clinician has initially started the C.O. measurement, for example by selecting the pop-up key

Start C.O., the monitor will prompt the clinician when the measurement is ready for the next

injection, and the injection can be performed. If no injection is detected within 90 seconds, the user is

prompted again. If set to Manual, the clinician has to select the pop-up key Start C.O. again for

each new injection.

Auto-Calibration This setting is only available if Method is set to Transpulmonary. Set this

to Off if you do not want to automatically trigger a CCO calibration every time you save the C.O. value.

This results in two separate pop-up keys in the Cardiac Output Procedure window: one labeled Save

C.O., the other labeled Cal CCO. If Auto-Calibration is set to On, both functions are combined

and only one pop-up key will be available: Save C.O.&Cal CCO.

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP20 - MP90 (H10/20/40) MP20 - MP90 (H30)

C M Profile

Adult

Profile

Pedi

Profile

Neo

Profile

Adult

Profile

Pedi

Profile

Neo

Method x x not applicable, this is not a setting, see "C.O. Configuration Implications"

Measuring Mode x x Standard

Auto-Calibration

1.only if Transpulmonary method is selected

xOn

RL Shunt

1/2

2.not available in the U.S.A or in clinical environments under FDA control.

xOff

C.O. x x not applicable, the C.O. On/Off state is not a setting, see "C.O. Configuration

Implications".

Tblood High Limit x x 39.0

Tblood Low Limit x x 36.0

Alarms x x On

Temperature Unit x

Color x Green

Yellow

4 Configuration Settings Appendix Measurement Settings

RL Shunt This setting is only available if Method is set to Transpulmonary. Set RL Shunt to

On to enable Right-Left Shunt detection. This setting is not available in the U.S.A or in clinical

environments under FDA control.

C.O. The On/Off state of the Cardiac Output measurement cannot be preconfigured. Cardiac Output

is automatically switched On when a C.O. transducer is connected to the monitor. In configuration mode,

C.O. can be manually switched On, even if no catheter is connected.

Configuring CCO (Continuous Cardiac Output)

MP20-90

only

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> Measurements -> CCO

CCO Configuration Implications

Alarms From To set CCO alarms to be triggered by the indexed CCO value, set Alarms From to

CCI.

The CCO From setting defines the arterial pressure source for CCO. The following pressure labels can

be used as pressure source for the CCO: ABP, Ao, ART, UAP (plus FAP and BAP if Full is selected as

the Label Set, see “Global Settings” on page 144).

PPV From CCO This setting lets you switch the PPV calculated from the CCO measurement On or

Off. Pulse Pressure Variation can be calculated in two different ways on this monitor - in conjunction

with the continuous cardiac output measurement, or directly from the invasive pressure measurement.

Note that this setting does not apply to the PPV calculated from the pressure measurement.

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP20 - MP90 X2

C M Profile Adult Profile

Pedi

Profile

Neo

Profile

Adult

Profile

Pedi

Profile

Neo

Profile

Outdoor

Settings common to CCO and CCI

Alarms From x x CCO

CCO From x x ABP

PPV From CCO x Off

CCO x x not applicable, the CCO On/Off state is not a setting, see "CCO Configuration

Implications" on page 56.

Color x Green

White

CCO settings

CCO High Limit x x 8.5 l/min 3.7 l/min 1.3 l/min

8.5 l/min

CCO Low Limit x x 4.0 l/min 2.6 l/min 0.3 l/min

4.0 l/min

Alarms x x On

CCI settings

CCI High Limit x x 4.3 l/min/m

3.7 l/min/m

5.2 l/min/m

4.3 l/min/m

CCI Low Limit x x 2.0 l/min/m

2.6 l/min/m

1.2 l/min/m

2.0 l/min/m

Alarms x x On

Measurement Settings 4 Configuration Settings Appendix

CCO The On/Off state of the CCO measurement cannot be preconfigured. CCO is automatically

switched On when an appropriate C.O. transducer is connected to the monitor.

Configuring SVR (Systemic Vascular Resistance)

MP20-90

only

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> Measurements -> SVR

SVR is a derived measurement.

SVR Configuration Implications

Label This setting is only available when Measurement is Enabled. It lets you select whether the

SVR or the SVRI (indexed SVR) is displayed. It is not possible to display both values at one time.

Arterial Source This setting is only available when Measurement is Enabled. Possible

sources are: ABPm, ARTm, AoM, UAPm, FAPm, BAPm. The formula used to calculate SVR is:

Set CVP This setting is only available when Measurement is Enabled. It defines a value to be used

in place of CVP to calculate the SVR if no measured CVP is available. It can be set between 0 and 16

mmHg.

SVR / Measurement If Measurement is set to Enabled, the monitor automatically switches

the SVR measurement On when the set arterial source is available. The user can still switch Off SVR in

monitoring mode.

Set Measurement to Disabled, if you want the SVR measurement to be permanently disabled,

which means that in monitoring mode it will not be possible to switch SVR On.

Note that the settings made here do not affect the SVR calculated in the Hemo Calcs window.

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP20 - MP90

C M Profile Adult Profile Pedi Profile Neo

Label x x SVR

Arterial Source x x ABPm

Set CVP x x 0 mmHg

SVR x x Off

Measurement x Enabled

Color x green

SVR = 79,96

Arterial Source

mean

CVP

mean

–()

CCO

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

⋅

4 Configuration Settings Appendix Measurement Settings

Configuring SvO

(Mixed Venous Oxygen Saturation)

MP60-90

only

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> Measurements -> SvO

SvO

Configuration Implications

SvO

The On/Off state of the SvO

measurement cannot be preconfigured. SvO

is automatically

switched On when an SvO

transducer is connected to the monitor.

Light Intensity Set this to Off if you do not want the Light Intensity Indicator to be displayed

next to the SvO

numeric.

Configuring Sp-vO

(Oxygen Consumption )

MP60-90

only

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> Measurements -> Sp-vO

Sp-vO

is a derived measurement.

Sp-vO

Configuration Implications

SpO

Source This setting is only available when Measurement is Enabled. The formula used to

calculate Oxygen Extraction is: Sp-vO

= SpO

Source - SvO

. SpO

Source determines the SpO

source used for the calculation. Possible sources are: SpO

, SpO

l, SpO

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP60 - MP90

C M Profile Adult Profile Pedi Profile Neo

High Limit x x 80%

Low Limit x x 60%

Alarms x x On

SvO

x x not applicable, the SvO

On/Off state is not a setting, see "SvO2 Configuration

Implications" on page 58.

Light Intensity x On

Color x Yellow

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP60 - MP90

C M Profile Adult Profile Pedi Profile Neo

SpO

Source x x SpO

Sp - vO

xxOff

Measurement x Enabled

Color x Green

Measurement Settings 4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Sp-vO

2 /

Measurement If Measurement is set to Enabled, the monitor automatically switches

the Sp-vO

measurement On when the set SpO

source and the SvO

value are available. The user can still

switch Off Sp-vO

in monitoring mode.

Set Measurement to Disabled, if you want the Sp-vO

measurement to be permanently disabled,

which means that in monitoring mode it will not be possible to switch Sp-vO

On.

Configuring tcGas (transcutaneous Gas)

MP40-90

only

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> Measurements -> tcGas

TcGas Configuration Implications

Prolonged continuous monitoring may increase the risk of undesirable changes in skin characteristics, such

as irritation, reddening, blistering or burns. If the site timer is disabled, the transducer will heat

indefinitely while on a patient.

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP40 - MP90

C M Profile Adult Profile Pedi Profile Neo

TcpO

High Limit x x 80 mmHg

TcpO

Low Limit x x 50 mmHg

TcpO

Alarms x x On

TcpCO

HighLimit x x 50 mmHg

TcpCO

Low Limit x x 30 mmHg

TcpCO

Alarms x x On

TcpO

x x not applicable, the TcpO

On/Off state is not a setting, see "TcGas Configuration

Implications" on page 59.

TcpCO

x x not applicable, the TcpCO

On/Off state is not a setting, see "TcGas Configuration

Implications" on page 59.

Site Time x x 4.0 hrs

Site Timer x Enabled

Ambient Pressure x x not applicable, Ambient Pressure is not a setting, see "TcGas Configuration

Implications" on page 59.

HeatPowerDisplay x x not applicable, HeatPowerDisplay is not a setting, see "TcGas Configuration

Implications" on page 59.

Disable Timer x Not Allowed

Heat Switch Off x No

Transducer Temp. x x 43.0 °C

Correction x On

MetabolismFactor x 8 mmHg

TcGas Unit x mmHg

Temperature Unit x

TcpO

Color x Blue

TcpCO

Color x Green

4 Configuration Settings Appendix Measurement Settings

TcpO

/TcpCO

The On/Off state of the TcpO

/TcpCO

measurement cannot be preconfigured.

TcGas measurements are automatically switched On when a tcGas transducer is connected to the monitor.

Site Time This setting defines the period after which the clinician is reminded by the monitor to

change the sensor site. When the time expires, the monitor sounds a tone and displays a change site INOP.

Depending on how Heat Switch Off is configured, the monitor either switches off the transducer

heating or continues monitoring. Choose the time you want the transducer to remain on the measurement

site. The optimum time depends on the transducer temperature and your patient’s skin sensitivity.

Site Timer This setting is only available if Disable Timer is configured to Allowed. To

disable the site timer, set Site Timer to Disabled.

Ambient Pressure is not a setting that can be stored in the configuration. It uses the Global Setting

Altitude (see "Global Settings" on page 144) to determine the default Ambient Pressure.

Ambient Pressure can be adjusted in both Monitoring and Configuration mode. The monitor

remembers this pressure setting until a new one is entered.

HeatPowerDisplay is not a setting that can be stored in the configuration, it automatically defaults

to Absolute. When a tcGas transducer is connected, HeatPowerDisplay lets you change the way

the heating power of the tcGas sensor is displayed. Choices are Absolute and Relative. For more

detail, see the IntelliVue Instructions for Use.

Disable Timer If Disable Timer is set to Allowed, the user can disable the site timer in

monitoring mode so that the Change Site reminder message is not shown.

Heat Switch Off If Heat Switch Off is set to Yes, the transducer heater is automatically

switched off when the site time period has elapsed. If Heat Switch Off is set to No, the transducer

will remain at operating temperature while it is attached to the patient, and tcGas monitoring will not be

interrupted when the site time period is over.

Transducer Temp. Lets you select the temperature to heat the patient’s skin under the tcGas

transducer. This temperature should be selected according to the patient’s age, weight and physical

condition, and in accordance with the hospital policy. Usually, a higher transducer temperature gives a

better correlation and a quicker response time. However, higher temperatures also increase the risk of skin

burns. Most physicians prefer a temperature between 42°C (107° F) and 44°C (111° F), and a site time of

four hours or less. Usually, the higher the transducer temperature, the less the site time should be.

Whenever you change the temperature setting, the monitor forces you to make a new calibration.

Correction / MetabolismFactor Transcutaneous pCO

values tend to be higher than

arterial values due to the metabolic processes of the skin and the effect of heating on the blood under the

transducer.

The transducer temperature causes an increase in partial CO

pressure. If CO

Correction is set to

On, the monitor automatically corrects the measured tcpCO

for this increase.

production in the epidermis increases the CO

value. If CO

Correction is set to On, this

metabolic effect is corrected according to the value configured for MetabolismFactor. The monitor

automatically deducts the set value from the measured tcpCO

value.

Measurement Settings 4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Configuring CO

(Capnometry)

can be measured by an anesthetic gas analyzer (AGM, G1, or G5), measurement extension modules

(Microstream, Sidestream, or Mainstream), or the integrated CO

measurement in the MP5. The settings

listed in this section do not apply to CO

measured by an anesthetic gas analyzer.

Most settings apply to all supported CO

extensions. Where a setting only applies to a particular device,

this is indicated.

The algorithm with which the CO

measurement is calculated, changes according to the configured

altitude setting. Make sure that the correct altitude setting is entered before the CO

measurement is used.

Altitude can be configured under "Configuring Trend Priorities" on page 120.

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> Measurements -> CO

Configuration Implications

The On/Off state of the CO

measurement cannot be preconfigured. CO

is automatically

switched On when a CO

transducer is connected to the monitor.

imCO

This setting lets you switch the inspired minimum CO

(imCO

) numeric On or Off. The

imCO

value is the smallest CO

concentration measured during inspiration. This helps you to detect

unphysiological CO

concentrations in the inspired gas.

The imCO

High limit defines the alarm limit for the imCO

numeric.

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP5 - MP90 (H10/20/40),

MP2/X2

MP5 - MP90 (H30) MP2/X2

C M Profile

Adult

Profile

Pedi

Profile Neo Profile

Adult

Profile

Pedi

Profile

Neo

Profile

Outdoor

etCO

High x x 50 60 50

etCO

Low x x 30 25 30

imCO

High x x 4

Alarms x x On

x x not applicable, the CO

On/Off state is not a setting, see "CO

Configuration

Implications" on page 61

imCO

xOn Off On

O Corr.

1.Setting available for M3015A and M3016A only

xxOff

Oxygen Corr.

2.Setting available for M3014A only

x x 16%

Gas Corr.

xxOff

Agent Corr.

xx0%

Scale x x 40 mmHg

50 mmHg 40 mmHg

Unit x mmHg

Color x Yellow

White White

Max Hold x Off

HumidtyCorr x BTPS

4 Configuration Settings Appendix Measurement Settings

N2O Corr. This settings lets you correct the CO

reading for proportions of N

O. If N

O is present in

the ventilation gas mixture, you must turn this on. If this setting is not available in the

Setup CO

menu, the CO

measurement in your Measurement Extension Module does not require N

O correction

or it is setup with Gas Corr.

(see below).

Gas Corr. This settings allows correction of CO

reading for proportions of Helium or N

O. If

Helium or N

O is present in the ventilation gas mixture, you must make the appropriate selection. If this

setting is not available in the

Setup CO

menu, the CO

measurement in your Measurement

Extension Module does not require N

O or Helium correction, or the N

O correction is setup with N2O

Corr.

(see above).

Agent Corr. This setting lets you correct the CO

reading for proportions of the following anesthetic

agents: Halothane, Enflurane. Isoflurane, Sevoflurane, Desflurane. Corrections can be applied between

0.0% and 20.0%. If any of the specified anesthetic agents is present in the ventilation gas mixture, you

must select the appropriate concentration.

Oxygen Corr. This settings lets you correct the CO

reading for proportions of O

in the gas

mixture. If this setting is not available in the

Setup CO

menu, the CO

measurement in your

Measurement Extension Module does not require O

correction.

Max Hold If Max Hold is configured to

10 sec or 20 sec, the etCO

numeric shows the highest

value measured within the previous 10 or 20 seconds. If set to Off the etCO

numeric shows

breath-to-breath value.

HumidtyCorr This setting determines the method used to correct the influence of water vapor in the

patient’s breath on the CO

reading. The options are Body Temperature Pressure Saturated (BTPS) or

Standard Temperature Pressure Dry (STPD). Setting HumidtyCorr to BTPS takes the partial pressure

contributed by the water vapor into consideration and therefore results in lower CO

readings when

compared to STPD. For an exact definition and the formula used, see the section on “Measurement

Specifications” in the “Installation and Specifications” chapter of the monitor’s Instructions for Use.

Configuring awRR from CO

(Airway Respiration Rate)

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> Measurements -> awRR

AwRR can be derived from the CO

measured by an anesthetic gas analyzer (AGM, G1, or G5), or by any

of the CO

measurement extension modules (Microstream, Sidestream, or Mainstream), or by the

integrated CO

measurement in the MP5. The settings listed in this section do not apply for the awRR

derived from an anesthetic gas analyzer.

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP2 - MP90

C M Profile Adult Profile Pedi Profile Neo

High Limit x x 30 100

Low Limit x x 8 30

Apnea Time x x 20 sec

Alarms x x On

awRR x x On

Measurement Settings 4 Configuration Settings Appendix

awRR Configuration Implications

Apnea Time The apnea alarm is a high priority red alarm used to detect apneas. The Apnea Time

defines the time period between the point where the monitor cannot detect any respiration activity and the

indication of the apnea alarm.

awRR This setting lets you switch the awRR measurement from CO

On or Off.

Configuring Resp (Impedance Respiration)

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> Measurements -> Resp

Resp Configuration Implications

Apnea Time The apnea alarm is a high priority red alarm used to detect apneas. The Apnea Time

defines the time period between the point where the monitor cannot detect any respiration activity and the

indication of the apnea alarm.

Resp This setting lets you switch the Resp measurement On or Off. If Resp is switched Off, the small

current applied to the Resp electrodes to enable the impedance measurement is switched off.

Auto/Manual The Resp detection level can be configured to be set either automatically or manually.

For further information, see the section on “Changing Resp Detection Modes” in the monitor’s

Instructions for Use.

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP5 - MP90 (H10/20/40)

MP2/X2

MP5 - MP90 (H30) MP2/X2

C M Profile

Adult

Profile

Pedi

Profile

Neo

Profile

Adult

Profile

Pedi

Profile

Neo

Profile

Outdoor

High Limit x x 30 100

Low Limit x x 8 30

Apnea Time x x 20 sec

Alarms x x On

Resp x x On

Off On

Auto/Manual x x Auto

Color x Yellow

White White

4 Configuration Settings Appendix Measurement Settings

Configuring Spirometry

MP40-90

only

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> Measurements -> Spirometry

Spirometry Configuration Implications

No Al. til Breath If set to set On, the monitor suppresses alarms from the Spirometry module

until it detects that a patient has been connected to the module (when breathing is detected).

Spirometry AWF (Airway Flow) Settings

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> Measurements ->

Spirometry -> AWF

Spirometry AWP (Airway Pressure) Settings

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> Measurements ->

Spirometry -> AWP

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP40 - MP90

C M Profile Adult Profile Pedi Profile Neo

No Al. til Breath x On

Color x White

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP40 - MP90

C M Profile Adult Profile Pedi Profile Neo

Scale x x 150 l/min 100 l/min 20 l/min

Color x White

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP40 - MP90

C M Profile Adult Profile Pedi Profile Neo

PIP High x x 40 cmH2O 25 cmH2O 20 cmH2O

PIP Alarms x x On

PEEP High x x 25 cmH2O

PEEP Low x x 0 cmH2O

PEEP Alarms x x On

Scale x x 40 cmH2O 40 cmH2O 20 cmH2O

Color x White

Measurement Settings 4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Spirometry AWV (Airway Volume) Settings

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> Measurements ->

Spirometry -> AWV

Spirometry Configuration Implications

MV This setting lets you choose the measured components for minute volume (inspiratory, expiratory,

inspiratory + expiratory or off). If set to Off, there will be no alarming for minute volume.

TV This setting lets you choose the measured components for tidal volume (inspiratory, expiratory,

inspiratory + expiratory or off). If set to Off, there will be no alarming for tidal volume.

Spirometry Gas Compensation Settings

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> Measurements ->

Spirometry -> Gas Compensation

Spirometry Configuration Implications

Mode Use this setting to choose the gas compensation mode. Select Manual to manually enter gas

concentrations or Gas Analyzer to derive gas concentrations from the Philips gas analyzer.

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP40 - MP90

C M Profile Adult Profile Pedi Profile Neo

MVexp High x x 8.0 l/min 4.0 l/min 0.8 l/min

MVexp Low x x 4.0 l/min 2.5 l/min 0.4 l/min

MVexp Alarms x x On

MV x x exp + in

TV x x exp + in

Scale x x 800 ml 200 ml 50 ml

Color x White

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP40 - MP90

C M Profile Adult Profile Pedi Profile Neo

Mode x x Manual

Balance Gas x x N

Inspired O

xx30%

Inspired Agent x x 0.0%

Inspired Temp x x 25

Unit x

4 Configuration Settings Appendix Measurement Settings

Note: Gas concentrations from the gas analyzer are only available for Philips gas analyzers, not for devices

connected via the Vuelink module. If gas concentrations from the gas analyzer are selected but not all data

is available, the missing data is taken from manually entered values. In case of invalid data or no data at all,

the INOP message SPIRO GAS COMPENS? is displayed.

Balance Gas This setting lets you select the type of balance gas used. Choices are N

, and N

Inspired O

/ Inspired Agent / Inspired Temp These settings can be adjusted to

match the concentration of inspired O

and anesthetic agent, as well as the temperature of the inspired gas.

Configuring RRspir (Respiration from Spirometry)

MP40-90

only

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> Measurements ->

Spirometry -> RRspir

RRspir Configuration Implications

Apnea Time The apnea alarm is a high priority red alarm used to detect apneas. The Apnea Time

defines the time period between the point where the monitor cannot detect any respiration activity and the

indication of the apnea alarm.

RRspir This setting lets you switch the RRspir measurement On or Off.

Configuring EEG

MP40-90

only

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> Measurements -> EEG

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP40 - MP90

C M Profile Adult Profile Pedi Profile Neo

High Limit x x 30 rpm 60 rpm

Low Limit x x 8 rpm 30 rpm

Apnea Time x x 20 sec

RRspir Alarms x x On

RRspir x x On

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP40 - MP90

C M Profile Adult Profile Pedi Profile Neo

TP x x On

SEF x x On

MDF x x Off

PPF x x Off

Delta x x Off

Measurement Settings 4 Configuration Settings Appendix

EEG Configuration Implications

TP This setting lets you switch the TP numeric On or Off. The TP (Total Power) numeric indicates the

power in the measured frequency band.

SEF lets you switch the SEF numeric On or Off. The SEF (Spectral Edge Frequency) is the frequency

below which a configurable percentage (set by the SEF Threshold) of the Total Power is measured.

MDF lets you switch the MDF numeric On or Off. The MDF (Mean Dominant Frequency) is the mean

value of the frequency which dominates the measured EEG.

PPF lets you switch the PPF numeric On or Off. The PPF (Peak Power Frequency) is the frequency

with the highest measured amplitude.

Delta lets you switch the Delta numeric On or Off. The Delta numeric is the percentage of total

power in the Delta wave frequency band (0.5 to 4 Hz).

Theta lets you switch the Theta numeric On or Off. The Theta numeric is the percentage of total

power in the Theta wave frequency band (4 to 8 Hz).

Alpha lets you switch the Alpha numeric On or Off. The Alpha numeric is the percentage of total

power in the Alpha wave frequency band (8 to 13 Hz)

Beta lets you switch the Beta numeric On or Off. The Beta numeric is the percentage of total

power in the Beta wave frequency band (13 to 30 Hz).

Theta x x Off

Alpha x x Off

Beta x x Off

SEF Threshold x 90%

Numeric Average x 8 sec

Wave Scale x x 100uV

Show Gridlines x No

Low Filter x x 0.5 Hz

High Filter x x 30 Hz

Buffer A x not applicable, this setting is stored in the Monitor Settings Block: see "Configuring User

Interface Settings - Keys" on page 140.

Buffer B x

Buffer C x

Smoothing CSA x On

Impedance Limit x x 5 kOhm

Color x Yellow

EEG x x not applicable, the EEG On/Off state is not a setting, see "EEG Configuration

Implications".

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP40 - MP90

C M Profile Adult Profile Pedi Profile Neo

4 Configuration Settings Appendix Measurement Settings

SEF Threshold defines the percentage of the TP for which the SEF is calculated.

Numeric Average lets you define the averaging time used for all EEG numerics.

Wave Scale / Show Gridlines

•When Show Gridlines is set to No, you can choose from the available Wave Scale values.

Scaling information is displayed as a size bar beside the EEG wave.

•When Show Gridlines is set to Yes, scales are defined as a range, such as

± 50 μV or ± 250 μV.

Gridlines and the current wave scale values are shown with the EEG wave.

Note that this only changes the visual appearance of the wave. It does not affect the signal analyzed by the

monitor or printed in reports or recordings.

Low Filter / High Filter Set the low and high pass filters to screen out undesirable

interference from the raw EEG wave display.

Smoothing CSA This setting defines whether smoothing of the CSA lines is On or Off.

Impedance Limit Allows you to set the Impedance Limit for all electrodes simultaneously. If

the limit is exceeded during monitoring, an INOP will appear and the graphic impedance indicator will

change.

EEG The On/Off state of the EEG measurement cannot be preconfigured. EEG measurements are

automatically switched On when an EEG transducer is connected to the monitor.

Configuring EEG Montages

MP40-90

only

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> Measurements -> EEG ->

Show Montage

1 In the Setup EEG menu, select Show Montage to enter the EEG Impedance/Montage

window.

2 From the drop-down list, select the name of the montage you want to configure.

3 Select Change Electrds and follow the instructions given in the window.

4 Confirm when finished.

5 For each other montage, repeat steps 2 to 4.

Renaming EEG Montages

1 In the Setup EEG menu, select Show Montage to enter the EEG Impedance/Montage

window.

2 Select the pop-up key Change Name and use the on-screen keyboard to enter the new name.

3 Select Enter to save your changes.

Measurement Settings 4 Configuration Settings Appendix

EEG Montages Configuration Implications

Select Montage Lets you select the default montage the monitor uses when the EEG measurement

is started.

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP40 - MP90

C M Profile Adult Profile Pedi Profile Neo

Select Montage x x Montage A

Montage A

Electrode 1+ x FP1

Electrode 1- x T3

Electrode 2+ x Fp2

Electrode 2- x T4

Montage B

Electrode 1+ x O1

Electrode 1- x T3

Electrode 2+ x O2

Electrode 2- x T4

Montage C

Electrode 1+ x F3

Electrode 1- x C3

Electrode 2+ x F4

Electrode 2- x C4

Montage D

Electrode 1+ x C3

Electrode 1- x P3

Electrode 2+ x C4

Electrode 2- x P4

Montage E

Electrode 1+ x Fp1

Electrode 1- x T5

Electrode 2+ x Fp2

Electrode 2- x T6

4 Configuration Settings Appendix Measurement Settings

Configuring BIS (Bispectral Index)

MP20-90

only

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> Measurements -> BIS

BIS Configuration Implications

EMG This setting lets you switch the EMG numeric On or Off. The EMG (Electromyographic Activity)

numeric reflects the electrical power of muscle activity and high frequency artifacts.

SR lets you switch the SR numeric On or Off. The SR (Suppression Ratio) is the percentage of time

over the last 63-second period during which the EEG is considered to be in a suppressed state.

Bursts lets you switch the Bursts numeric On or Off. To configure this setting, you must

disconnect the BIS/BISx Engine from the BIS module. The Bursts numeric helps you quantify

suppression by measuring the number of EEG bursts per minute, where an EEG burst is defined as a

period of activity followed and preceded by inactivity (at least 0.5 second).

SEF lets you switch the SEF numeric On or Off. The SEF (Spectral Edge Frequency) is the frequency

below which 95% of the Total Power is measured.

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP20 - MP90 (H10/20/40) MP20 - MP90 (H30)

C M Profile Adult Profile Pedi Profile Neo Profile Adult Profile Pedi Profile Neo

SQI x On

EMG x On

SR x On

Bursts

1.Numeric available with BISx module only

xOn Off

SEF x Off

TP x Off

Scale x 100uV

Show Gridlines x No

Filters x On

Low Filter x 2 Hz

High Filter x 70 Hz

Notch Filter x On

High Limit x 70

Low Limit x 20

Alarms x On

Cont. Imp. Check x not applicable, this is not a setting, see "BIS Configuration Implications"

Smoothing Rate x 30 sec

15 sec

Color x Yellow

Magenta

BIS x x not applicable, the BIS On/Off state is not a setting, see "BIS Configuration Implications".

Measurement Settings 4 Configuration Settings Appendix

TP lets you switch the TP numeric On or Off. The TP (Total Power) numeric indicates the power in

the frequency band 0.5 to 30 Hz. The useful range is 30 - 100 dB.

Scales / Gridlines When Gridlines are switched Off, you can choose from the available

scale values: 50

μV, 100 μV, 200 μV, and 500 μV. Scaling information is displayed as a vertical bar on

the EEG wave together with its height equivalent in

μV.

When Gridlines are switched On, scales are defined as a range, either

± 25 μV, ± 50 μV, ± 100 μV,

± 250 μV. Scaling information is shown in the form of gridlines.

Low Filter / High Filter / Notch Filter These settings let you apply filters to the

raw EEG wave. The Low Filter and the High Filter screen out undesirable interference from

the raw EEG wave display. The Notch Filter removes line frequency interference. Filter settings

affect the EEG wave and the SEF and TP values, but they do not affect the BIS, EMG, SR, and SQI

values.

Cont. Imp. Check This setting can be temporarily changed in monitoring mode, but the changes

cannot be permanently stored in config mode. The default is On. The current setting is kept in the

monitor’s buffered memory and retained for a max of 60 sec after the monitor is switched off. If the

monitor is switched off for more than 60 sec, Cont. Imp. Check will be reset to On.

Smoothing Rate This setting lets you define how the monitor averages the BIS value. Set this to 15

Sec to increase responsiveness to changes in the patient’s state. If set to 30 Sec, the BIS trend will be

smoother with decreased variability and sensitivity to artifacts.

BIS The On/Off state of the BIS measurement cannot be preconfigured. BIS measurements are

automatically switched On when an BIS transducer is connected to the monitor.

Configuring Temperature

When an MMS is connected to the monitor for the first time, it uses the default Temperature label Temp.

When a Measurement Extension Module is connected for the first time, the Temp label used for the

combined Pressure/Temp connector is Trect, the label used for the single Temp connector is Tskin;

plug-in Temperature modules use the label Temp. If you then change the Temp label, the information

will be automatically stored and each device will remember the new label the next time they are

reconnected.

The configuration settings for Temperature can be set individually for each Temp label. The selection of

labels depends on the configured Label Set, see "Global Settings" on page 144.

4 Configuration Settings Appendix Measurement Settings

Temp, Trect, Tcore, Tskin, Tesoph, Tnaso, Tart, Tven, Tvesic, Ttymp,

Tcereb, Tamb, T1, T2, T3, T4 Settings

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> Measurements -> <Temp Label>

See "Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> Measurements -> C.O." on page 55 for Tblood settings. Tinj

has no settings. Taway is sourced from VueLink, therefore no settings can be changed.

Temp Configuration Implications

<Temp Label> The On/Off state of the Temp measurement cannot be preconfigured. The Temp

measurement is automatically switched On when a Temp probe is connected to a Temp socket on the

monitor.

Unit Lets you select the temperature unit.

Configuring Predictive Temp

MP5/

MP5T

only

pToral, pTaxil, pTrect Settings

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> Measurements -> <pTemp Label>

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP5 - MP90 (H10/20/40)

MP2/X2

MP5 - MP90 (H30) MP2/X2

C M Profile

Adult

Profile

Pedi

Profile

Neo

Profile

Adult

Profile

Pedi

Profile

Neo

Profile

Outdoor

High Limit x x 39

Low Limit x x 36

35 36

Alarms x x On

Te mp

(or other label)) x x not applicable, the Temp On/Off state is not a setting, see "Temp Configuration

Implications" on page 72.

Unit x

Range x 35...43

Color x Green

Light Green White

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP5 / MP5T

C M Profile Adult Profile Pedi Profile Neo

Label x x not applicable, the ’Label’ is not a setting, see "Predictive Temp Configuration

Implications".

Value Lifetime x x 1 h

Mode x x not applicable, ’the Mode’ is not a setting, see "Predictive Temp Configuration

Implications".

Prompt Tones x On

Measurement Settings 4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Predictive Temp Configuration Implications

Label Lets you select the label you want to configure. This is not a setting and cannot be preconfigured.

Value Lifetime Lets you configure the life time of a predicted temp value. After the configured life

time, a predictively measured Temp value disappears from the monitor screen, as well as from the screen of

a connected Information Center. This setting applies to all predictive temp labels.

Mode Lets you switch between Continuous and Predictive measurement mode. This switch

only applies when monitoring, it is not a setting and cannot be preconfigured. See the IntelliVue

Instructions for Use for more detail.

Prompt Tones Set this to On if you want the monitor to indicate when it is ready for a new

measurement and when a measurement is finished by a prompt message and a prompt tone.

Unit Lets you select the temperature unit.

Preferred Label Lets you configure which predictive temp label the monitor will use when one of

the following circumstances occurs:

• an oral or axillary probe is connected after a rectal probe has been used before,

• the patient is discharged,

•a coldstart is performed.

<PTemp Label> The On/Off state of the predictive temp measurement cannot be preconfigured. It

is automatically switched On when a predictive temp sensor is connected to the monitor.

Unit x °C

Color x Yellow

Preferred Label x pToral

pToral (or other label) x x not applicable, the Predictive Temp On/Off state is not a setting, see "Predictive Temp

Configuration Implications".

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP5 / MP5T

C M Profile Adult Profile Pedi Profile Neo

4 Configuration Settings Appendix Measurement Settings

Configuring ΔTemp (Temperature Difference)

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> Measurements -> ΔTemp

ΔTemp is a derived measurement.

ΔTemp Configuration Implications

First Temp/Second Temp This setting is only available when Measurement is Enabled. It

lets you select two temperature labels to calculate the temperature difference. Note that none of Predictive

Temp labels can be selected for the ΔTemp calculation.

The formula used to calculate

ΔTemp is: ΔTemp = First Temp - Second Temp.

ΔTemp / Measurement If Measurement is set to Enabled, the monitor automatically

switches the

ΔTemp measurement On when both configured Temp sources are available. The user can still

switch Off

ΔTemp in monitoring mode.

Set Measurement to Disabled, if you want the

ΔTemp measurement to be permanently disabled,

which means that in monitoring mode it will not be possible to switch

ΔTemp On.

Configuring VueLink

MP40-90

only

Measurement Setting: Main Setup -> Measurements -> VueLink

VueLink Configuration Implications

Device Alarms The VueLink module itself generates INOPs, but does not generate alarms. If the

external device’s alarms are on, the module transmits these to the monitor. Device Alarms lets you

select whether these alarms are indicated on the monitor (Accepted) or Ignored.

Note that the setting Device Alarms is not cloned between monitors. If you clone configurations

between IntelliVue monitors with VueLink plug-in modules, you must check that these settings are correct

and adjust them according to customer specifications, if needed.

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP2 - MP90

MP5T MP2/X2

C M Profile

Adult

Profile

Pedi

Profile

Neo

Profile

Adult

Profile

Pedi

Profile

Neo

Profile

Outdoor

First Temp x x Trect

Second Temp x x Tblood

ΔTe mp x x Of f

Measurement x Enabled

Disabled Enabled

Color x Green White

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP40 - MP90 (H10/20/40) MP40 - MP90 (H30)

C M Profile Adult Profile Pedi Profile Neo Profile Adult Profile Pedi Profile Neo

Device Alarms x Accepted

Ignored

Default Color x Green

Measurement Settings 4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Default Color The default color is the color used for any numerics that are not linked to a particular

wave, and for any waves for which no color is specifically configured. Note that this setting is not cloned

between monitors. If you clone configurations between IntelliVue monitors with VueLink plug-in

modules, you must check that these settings are correct and adjust them according to customer

specifications, if needed.

<Other Settings> All other VueLink settings are specific to the individual driver. They are stored

in the VueLink module and cannot be stored in the monitor configuration. See the documentation

supplied with the VueLink module for configuration information.

Configuring the Gas Analyzer

MP5-90

option

H30 only

General Gas Analyzer Settings

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> GM (AGM)

All gas analyzer settings are available on monitors with option H30 only. The MP5 does not support the

AGM (M1026A/B).

General Gas Analyzer Configuration Implications

Agent This setting is available when using the M1013A IntelliVue G1 only. It lets you select the agent

that will be analyzed by the M1013A.

Setup Agent This operation is available when using the M1013A IntelliVue G1 and the M1019A

IntelliVue G5 only. To configure the individual settings for each anesthetic gas for the IntelliVue G1 and

G5, select Setup Agent, and then in the Setup Agent menu, select the agent and adjust the settings as

needed.

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP5 - MP90 (H30)

C M Profile Adult Profile Pedi Profile Neo

Agent

1.only available when using a G1 (M1013A)

xxISO

x x not a setting, see "Configuring CO

from Gas Analyzer" on page 80

awRR x x not a setting, see "Configuring awRR from Gas Analyzer (Airway Respiration Rate)" on page 81

x x not a setting, see "O

Settings" on page 76

O x x not a setting, see "N

O (Nitrous Oxide) Settings" on page 76

ISO

x x not a setting, see "ISO (Isofluran) Settings" on page 78

AGT

2.only available when using an AGM (M1026A/B)

x x not a setting, see "AGT / AGT1 / AGT2 Settings" on page 77

AGT1

3.only available when using a G5 (M1019A)

x x not a setting, see "AGT / AGT1 / AGT2 Settings" on page 77

AGT2

x x not a setting, see "AGT / AGT1 / AGT2 Settings" on page 77

MAC x x not a setting, see "Configuring MAC (Minimum Alveolar Concentration)" on page 82

No Al. til Breath x On

AutoStandbyAfter x 120

Setup Agent

1/3

x not a setting, see "General Gas Analyzer Configuration Implications" on page 75

4 Configuration Settings Appendix Measurement Settings

No Al. til Breath If set to set On, the monitor suppresses alarms from the Gas Analyzer until it

detects that a patient has been connected to the gas analyzer (when breathing is detected).

AutoStandbyAfter This setting defines the time after which the gas analyzer automatically goes into

Standby when no breath is detected. During Standby, the gas analyzer’s gas sample intake pump and other

internal components are automatically switched off to increase the lifetime of the device. The message GM

(or AGM) STANDBY is shown on the monitor.

Settings

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> GM (or AGM) -> O

O (Nitrous Oxide) Settings

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> GM (or AGM)-> N

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP5 - MP90 (H30)

C M Profile Adult Profile Pedi Profile Neo

inO

High x x 100%

inO

Low x x 18%

inO

Alarms x x On

xxet + in

Scale x x 100

Unit x %

Color x Green

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP5 - MP90 (H30)

C M Profile Adult Profile Pedi Profile Neo

inN

O High x x 80%

inN

O Alarm x x On

Oxxet + in

Scale x x 60

Unit x %

Color x Blue

Measurement Settings 4 Configuration Settings Appendix

AGT / AGT1 / AGT2 Settings

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> GM (or AGM) -> AGT (AGT1, AGT2)

AGT / AGT1 / AGT2 Configuration Implications

Agent Channel This setting lets you define which numerics are displayed with any anesthetic agent

waveform on the screen.

– et displays the endtidal numerics,

– in displays the inspiratory numerics,

– et+in displays both endtidal and inspiratory numerics.

– Off switches off the anesthetic gas measurement. No waveforms or numerics will be shown for

anesthetic gases, and no alarms will be generated.

Agent Id This setting is available for the M1026A/B AGM only. Setting Agent Id to Manual

requires that the user manually chooses the correct anesthetic agent during monitoring. If set to

Automatic, the gas analyzer automatically identifies the predominant anesthetic agent in the breathing

circuit. To configure the individual settings for each anesthetic gas for the M1026A/B AGM, you must

first set Agent ID to Manual. This allows you to select the individual gases. If you use Manual agent

identification, the agent that was selected last will become the default agent. If you want to use

Automatic agent identification, make sure to switch Agent ID back to Automatic when you are

done.

HAL (Halothan) Settings

Main Setup -> GM -> Setup Agent -> HAL

Main Setup -> AGM -> HAL

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP5 - MP90 (H30)

C M Profile Adult Profile Pedi Profile Neo

Agent Channel x x et + in

Agent Id

1. only available when using an AGM (M1026A/B)

x x Automatic

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP5 - MP90 (H30)

C M Profile Adult Profile Pedi Profile Neo

inHAL High x x 2.0%

inHAL Low x x 0.0%

inHAL Alarms x x On

etHAL High x x 1.6%

etHAL Low x x 0.0%

4 Configuration Settings Appendix Measurement Settings

ISO (Isofluran) Settings

Measurement Settings:

Main Setup -> GM -> Setup Agent -> ISO

Main Setup -> AGM -> ISO

etHAL Alarms x x On

Scale x x 2.0

Unit x %

Color x Red

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP5 - MP90 (H30)

C M Profile Adult Profile Pedi Profile Neo

inISO High x x 3.0%

inISO Low x x 0.0%

inISO Alarms x x On

etISO High x x 2.5%

etISO Low x x 0.0%

etISO Alarms x x On

Scale x x 3.0

Unit x %

Color x Magenta

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP5 - MP90 (H30)

C M Profile Adult Profile Pedi Profile Neo

Measurement Settings 4 Configuration Settings Appendix

ENF (Enfluran) Settings

Measurement Settings:

Main Setup -> GM -> Setup Agent -> ENF

Main Setup -> AGM -> ENF

SEV (Sevofluran) Settings

Measurement Settings:

Main Setup -> GM -> Setup Agent -> SEV

Main Setup -> AGM -> SEV

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP5 - MP90 (H30)

C M Profile Adult Profile Pedi Profile Neo

inENF High x x 4.0%

inENF Low x x 0.0%

inENF Alarms x x On

etENF High x x 3.3%

etENF Low x x 0.0%

etENF Alarms x x On

Scale x x 4.0

Unit x %

Color x Orange

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP5 - MP90 (H30)

C M Profile Adult Profile Pedi Profile Neo

inSEV High x x 6.0%

inSEV Low x x 0.0%

inSEV Alarms x x On

etSEV High x x 5.0%

etSEV Low x x 0.0%

etSEV Alarms x x On

Scale x x 6.0

Unit x %

Color x Yellow

4 Configuration Settings Appendix Measurement Settings

DES (Desfluran) Settings

Measurement Settings:

Main Setup -> GM -> Setup Agent -> DES

Main Setup -> AGM -> DES

Configuring CO

from Gas Analyzer

MP5-90

only

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> GM (or AGM) -> CO

can be measured by an anesthetic gas analyzer (AGM, G1, or G5), measurement extension modules

(Microstream, Sidestream, or Mainstream), or the integrated CO

measurement in the MP5. The settings

listed in this section only apply to CO

measured by an anesthetic gas analyzer.

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP5 - MP90 (H30)

C M Profile Adult Profile Pedi Profile Neo

inDES High x x 15.0%

inDES Low x x 0.0%

inDES Alarms x x On

etDES High x x 10.0%

etDES Low x x 0.0%

etDES Alarms x x On

Scale x x 15.0

Unit x %

Color x Cyan

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP5 - MP90 (H30)

C M Profile Adult Profile Pedi Profile Neo

etCO

High x x 60 mmHg

etCO

Low x x 25 mmHg

etCO

Alarms x x On

imCO

High x x 4 mmHg

imCO

Alarm x x Off

xxet + im

Scale x x 50 mmHg

Unit x mmHg

Color x White

Humidity Corr. x Wet

Measurement Settings 4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Gas Analyzer CO

Configuration Implications

Humidity Corr. This setting determines the method used to correct the influence of water vapor in

the patient’s breath on the CO

reading. The options are Wet or Dry. Setting HumidtyCorr to Wet

takes the partial pressure contributed by the water vapor into consideration and therefore results in lower

readings when compared to DRY. For an exact definition and the formula used, see the section on

“Measurement Specifications” in the “Installation and Specifications” chapter of the Gas Analyzer

Instructions for Use.

Configuring awRR from Gas Analyzer (Airway Respiration Rate)

MP5-90

only

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> GM (or AGM) -> awRR

AwRR can be derived from the CO

measured by an anesthetic gas analyzer (AGM, G1, or G5), or by any

of the CO

measurement extension modules (Microstream, Sidestream, or Mainstream), or by the

integrated CO

measurement in the MP5. The settings listed in this section only apply for the awRR

derived from an anesthetic gas analyzer.

awRR Configuration Implications

Apnea Time The apnea alarm is a high priority red alarm used to detect apneas. The Apnea Time

defines the time period between the point where the monitor cannot detect any respiration activity and the

indication of the apnea alarm.

awRR This setting lets you switch the awRR measurement from the Gas Analyzer On or Off.

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP5 - MP90 (H30)

C M Profile Adult Profile Pedi Profile Neo

High Limit x x 40 rpm 60 rpm

Low Limit x x 8 rpm 30 rpm

Apnea Time x x 40 sec

Alarms x x On

awRR x x On

4 Configuration Settings Appendix Measurement Settings

Configuring MAC (Minimum Alveolar Concentration)

MP5-90

only

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> GM (or AGM) -> MAC

MAC Configuration Implications

The MAC (Minimum Alveolar Concentration) value of an anesthetic gas or agent denotes the

concentration at which 50% of a population of anesthetized patients do not respond with movement to a

painful stimulus. The MACawk (MAC awake) represents the concentration at which 50% of a population

of anesthetized patients responds to verbal command.

MAC Determines whether the MAC numeric is displayed or not.

Correction The IntelliVue monitor offers three methods of MAC calculation:

•Uncorrected MAC (Off)

• Ambient Pressure corrected MAC

(not available in the U.S.A or in clinical environments under FDA control.)

• Enhanced MAC Correction

(not available in the U.S.A. or in clinical environments under FDA control)

If Correction is set to Off, the uncorrected MAC is calculated, i.e the MAC value is not corrected for

ambient pressure, age, temperature or any other individual factors influencing the effect of volatile

anesthetic agents.

If Correction is set to Amb. Pressure, the MAC is corrected for the ambient pressure measured

during the last zero calibration.

If Correction is set to Enhanced, the MAC value is corrected for the patient’s age and temperature,

and the ambient pressure measured during the last zero calibration.

The age is derived from the Date Of Birth entry in the Patient Demographics window.

The temperature is taken from the currently measured value for one of the following temperature labels:

Tcore, or Tblood.

MACawk Determines whether the MAC awake numeric is displayed or not. The MACawk numeric can

only be calculated if Correction is configured to Enhanced.

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP5 - MP90 (H30)

C M Profile Adult Profile Pedi Profile Neo

MAC x x Off

MACawk

1.Setting not available in the U.S.A. or in clinical environments under FDA control. MAC correction is switched off and

MACawk value is not available.

xxOff

Correction

xOff

Color x White

Monitor Settings 4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Monitor Settings

This section lists all the settings grouped in the Monitor Settings Block. Read any information on

configuration implications at the end of the relevant tables before you make any configuration changes.

Understanding Monitor Settings

What sets monitor settings apart from measurement settings is that they are not specific to one

measurement. Monitor settings affect the general behavior of the monitor.

Alarm settings are a good example to help you understand the difference between monitor and

measurement settings: general alarm settings, such as Alarm Volume or the Alarms Off time are monitor

settings. They determine the monitor’s general alarming behavior. Individual alarm limits that can be set

individually for each measurement are measurement settings. They only affect the selected measurement.

The IntelliVue patient monitor uses two categories of monitor settings: normal and unique monitor

settings. Normal monitor settings can be configured differently for different monitor settings blocks (e.g.

Monitor A, Monitor B). Unique monitor settings cannot be configured differently. They are the same in

each monitor settings block and are automatically included in all monitor settings blocks when you store

them to one block.

The following table provides an overview of normal vs. unique monitor settings:

Monitor Settings

Normal Page Unique Page

Alarms 84 Tren d Grou ps 117

Alarm Recordings 87 Trend Priorities 120

Auto Alarm Limits 88 Trend Scales / Trend Units 121

INOP Severity 89 Event Surveillance 124

Screen Trend Settings 90 Event Annotations 131

Horizon Trend Settings 90 ProtocolWatch 132

Global Trend Style 91 Recordings (except Vital Signs & Alarm Rec.) 133

Tren d Win d ows 92 Timers 136

Tren d Re c ord i ngs 93 Global SmartKeys, Function Keys 140

ST Map 94 CSA Buffers 142

C.O. Window 94 Drug Calculator 143

Wedge Window 95

Loops Window 96

CSA Window 96

ECG Application 97

Calculations (except Drug Calc.) 98

Reports 99

Addressograph 103

Auto Reports 103

ECG Reports 105

CSA Reports 106

Tren d Re p or t s 10 6

User Interface (except Keys) 108

Network 112

4 Configuration Settings Appendix Monitor Settings

Configuring Alarms

Monitor Setting: Main Setup -> Alarms -> Alarm Settings

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP5 - MP90 (H10/20/40)

MP2/X2

MP5 - MP90 (H30) MP2/X2

C M Profile Adult

Profile Pedi

Profile Neo

Profile Adult

Profile Pedi

Profile Neo

Profile Outdoor

Alarm Volume x x 5 7

Alarms Off x 2 min

Pause Al. 5Min x Enabled

Pause Al. 10Min x Enabled

Auto Alarms Off x Disabled

AlarmOffReminder x Off

Visual Latching x Red&Yell

Red Only Red&Yell

Audible Latching x Red&Yell

Off Red&Yell

Alarm Reminder x On

Reminder Time x 3 min

Alarm Sounds x Traditional

RedAlarmInterval x 10 sec

Yel. Al. Interval x 20 sec

Alarm Low x 4

2 4

Red Alarm Volume x AlarmVol+2

Yell. Alarm Volume x AlarmVol+0

Inop Volume x AlarmVol+0

AutoIncrease Vol. x 2 Steps

IncreaseVolDelay x 20 sec

Keep Blinking. x No

Relay1 Sensitiv. x R & Y & I

Relay2 Sensitiv. x Red &Yell

Relay3 Sensitiv. x Red

CyanRelayLatency x 5 sec

Yel. RelayLatency x 2 sec

Alarm Text x Standard

NoCentrMonMinVol x 4

LED Brightness x High

Monitor Settings 4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Alarm Settings Configuration Implications

Alarm Volume Use this setting to define the base volume of the red and yellow audible alarm

indicators and the INOP tones.

Alarms Off Use this setting to determine how long the monitor’s alarm capabilities will be switched

off when the user selects the Alarms Off or Pause Alarms key. Possible choices are: 1min, 2min,

3min, Infinite. Be aware that if you configure Alarms Off to Infinite, all of the monitor’s

alarming capabilities will be permanently switched off when the user selects the Alarms Off key.

It is not recommeded to configure Alarms Off to Infinite in monitors that can be used as

companion devices to a host monitor, such as the X2 or MP5.

Pause Al. 5 Min / Pause Al. 10 Min If these settings are enabled, the user can extend the

alarm pause to 5/10 minutes. If Alarms Off is set to Infinite, these settings are automatically

disabled.

Alarm Low Use this setting to define a minimum value for the alarm volume. The alarm volume

cannot be set lower than this value.

Red Alarm Volume / Yell. AlarmVolume/Inop Volume Use these settings to set the

alarm volume level for each alarm type relative to the (base) volume selected under Alarm Volume.

Available choices are: AlarmVol+1, AlarmVol+2, AlarmVol+3.

Auto Alarms Off This setting can be used to switch off the monitor’s alarming capabilities if no

vital parameters are left with alarms switched On. The recommended value for this settings is Disabled.

WARNING If you configure the setting Auto Alarms Off to Enabled, the monitor will automatically switch

off its alarming capabilities if the user turns Off the individual alarms for all vital parameters (see below)

that are currently activated and switched On.

The following measurements are considered vital parameters:

•ECG/Pulse

• RR/awRR

• All invasive blood pressure (for example ABP, ART, CVP, PAP)

•SpO

•etCO

AlarmOffReminder If this setting is enabled, the monitor issues a short reminder tone every three

minutes when all alarms have been switched off (by selecting the Alarms Off/Pause Alarms

SmartKey), or if the alarms for the following measurements have been switched off individually: ECG/

Pulse, RR/awRR, all invasive blood pressures, SpO

, etCO

Visual Latching / Audible Latching The visual and audible latching settings can affect

the arrhythmia alarm sounds. Both Visual Latching and Audible Latching should be set to

Red or Red and Yellow if arrhythmia is on.

If the monitor is connected to an Information Center, both Visual Latching and

Audible Latching should be set to Red&Yell to enable alarms to be silenced at the Information

Center.

4 Configuration Settings Appendix Monitor Settings

Alarm Reminder Use this setting to define how alarm indications behave if alarm conditions remain

active after they have been acknowledged:

– On: After the configured Reminder Time, the alarm tone is repeated for a limited time (6

seconds).

– ReAlarm: After the Reminder Time the alarm tone is repeated continuously (this is the same as

a new alarm).

– Off: No Alarm Reminder is issued.

Reminder Time Use this setting to define the interval between acknowledging an alarm and issuing

an alarm reminder. The choices available are 1, 2, or 3 minutes.

Alarm Sounds Use this setting to change the alarm sound of the monitor to suit the alarm standards

valid in your hospital.

– Traditional: The traditional (“Carenet”) sounds used in previous HP/Agilent/Philips patient

monitor generations.

– ISO: A new set of alarm sounds that complies with the ISO/IEC Standard 9703-2.

RedAlarmInterval / Yel. Al. Interval Use this setting to define the interval between

alarm sounds (ISO alarm sounds only). The choices available are 5, 10, or 15 seconds for red alarms, and

10, 20,or 30 seconds for yellow alarms.

Auto Increase Vol Use this setting to define how the alarm volume of unacknowledged alarms

behaves.

– 1 Step: After the time defined by Increase Volume Delay, the alarm volume is increased

by one volume step.

– 2 Step: After the time defined by Increase Volume Delay, the alarm volume is increased

by two volume steps.

– Off: The Alarm Volume of unacknowledged alarms does not change.

Increase Volume Delay Use this setting to define the interval after which the alarm volume

increases in steps.

Keep Blinking Use this setting to specify whether the numerics that are in an active alarm condition

keep flashing even if all alarms are off or paused, or if individual alarms are switched off.

(Nurse Call) RelayX Sensitivity The RelayX Sensitivity setting defines the

alarm or INOP conditions that will trigger an alarm on nurse call relay. Only serious INOPs (that are

indicated with an INOP tone at the monitor) are indicated on the nurse call relay. The nurse call relay

follows the status of the monitor alarms, e.g. when the alarms are switched off at the monitor, no alarms

will be indicated on the nurse call relay.

When you use a nurse call relay that is connected to the traditional nurse call connector (phone jack), only

Relay 1 Sensitivity must be specified.

INOPRelayLatency / Yel.RelayLatency Use this setting to define how long a yellow alarm

or INOP condition must be active before an alarm is issued on any device connected to the alarm relay.

These settings are valid for all serious INOP conditions/all yellow alarms respectively.

Alarm Text Use this setting to define how alarm messages are presented on the monitor screen:

– Standard: Alarm texts are displayed in text form, for example ** Spo2 LOW

Monitor Settings 4 Configuration Settings Appendix

– Extended: Alarm texts are displayed as numeric values, for example, ** Spo2 94 < 96, where

the second number shows the current alarm limit, and the first number shows the maximum amount

by which this limit was exceeded.

NoCentrMonMinVol If your monitor is connected to an IntelliVue Information Center, and the

connection is interrupted, the INOP message No Central Monit. will appear, accompanied by an

INOP tone. To help ensure that this INOP, and any other active alarm, is not overlooked, the INOP and

alarm tones may be configured to have a minimum volume. In this case, INOP and alarm tones will sound

even if the monitor alarm volume is set to zero.

LED Brightness lets you configure the brightness of the alarm lamps. Three choices are available:

High, Medium, and Low.

Alarm Behavior (For Assistance Publique in France only)

To achieve the behavior required by the Assistance Publique in France, you must configure the settings

listed below to the values given in the table:

Configuring Alarm Recordings

Monitor Setting: Main Setup -> Alarms -> Alarm Recording

Item Name French Alarm Behavior Comment

Alarm Source ECG See "Configuring ECG/Pulse Alarms"

on page 33.

Alarm Source Selection Disabled

Alarms Off Disabled, by setting to 1 or 2 or 3 min (not infinite) See "Configuring Alarms" on page 84.

Pause Al. 5Min Disabled

Pause Al. 10Min Disabled

Auto Alarms Off Enabled

Alarm OffRemind. On

Visual Latching Red&Yell

Audible Latching Red&Yell

Alarm Reminder ReAlarm or On

Alarm Rem. Time 1 or 2 or 3 min

Alarm Low >= 1

Keep Blinking Yes

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP5 - MP90 (H10/20/40)

MP5T

MP2/X2

MP5 - MP90 (H30)

C M

HR x x Off

Red Only

PVC x x Off

Red Only

ST x x Off

QT x x Off

SpO

xxOff

4 Configuration Settings Appendix Monitor Settings

Alarm Recording Settings Configuration Implications

<Measurement> If you set a <Measurement> to Red Only, an alarm recording will

automatically be triggered when the measurement enters a red alarm condition. If you set it to

Red&Yell, both yellow and red alarms will trigger an alarm recording for that measurement.

Configuring Auto Alarm Limits

Monitor Setting: Main Setup -> Alarms -> Setup AutoLimits

Pulse x x Off

Press x x Off

NBP x x Off

CCO x x Off

xxOff

awRR x x Off

xxOff

Resp x x Off

tcGas x x Off

Te mp x x O ff

0xxOff

Agent x x Off

VueLnk x x Off

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP5 - MP90 (H10/20/40)

MP5T

MP2/X2

MP5 - MP90 (H30)

C M

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP2 - MP90

MP5T

C M

All x Enabled

HR x Enabled

ST x Enabled

SpO

xEnabled

Pulse x Enabled

Press x Enabled

NBP x Enabled

xEnabled

awRR x Enabled

xEnabled

RR x Enabled

Monitor Settings 4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Alarm AutoLimits Settings Configuration Implications

All Set this to Disabled if you do not want the user to be able to apply AutoLimits to all enabled

measurements at once by using the All Lim. Narrow or All Lim. Wide pop-up keys in the

Alarm Limits window.

<Measurement> If you set a <Measurement> to Disabled, AutoLimits cannot be applied to

this measurement.

Configuring INOP Severity

Monitor Setting: Main Setup -> Alarms -> Inop Severity

INOP Severity Settings Configuration Implications

ECG Leads Off Set ECG Leads Off to Yellow or Red if you want the “ECG Leads Off”

INOP to be signaled as a yellow or red INOP. This INOP alerts the clinician when not all required leads

for ECG monitoring are attached to the patient. If no ECG has been measured yet, for example for a

newly admitted patient, the INOP severity will be always be Cyan regardless of the configuration. Once a

valid ECG has been received, the severity will behave as configured.

Cuff Overpress Set Cuff Overpress to Yellow or Red if you want the “Cuff Overpress”

INOP to be signaled as a yellow or red INOP. This INOP alerts the clinician when the NBP cuff pressure

exceeds the overpressure safety limits.

tcGas x Enabled

Temp x E na b le d

xEnabled

OxEnabled

Agent x Enabled

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP2 - MP90

MP5T

C M

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP5 - MP90

MP5T

MP2/X2

C M

ECG Leads Off x Cyan

Cuff Overpress x Cyan

Cuff NotDeflated x Cyan

BattReplace Tele x Cyan

not available

4 Configuration Settings Appendix Monitor Settings

Cuff NotDeflated Set Cuff NotDeflated to Yellow or Red if you want the

“Cuff NotDeflated” INOP to be signaled as a yellow or red INOP. This INOP alerts the clinician when

the NBP cuff pressure has exceeded 15mmHg (2kPa) for more than 3 minutes for Adult or pediatric

patients, or the cuff pressure has exceeded 5mmHg (0.7kPa) for more than 90 seconds (for neonatal

patients).

BattReplace Tele This setting affects MP5 monitors only. Set BattReplace Tele to

Yellow or Red if you want the “Replace Battery T” INOP to be signaled as a yellow or red INOP when

a telemetry device is directly connected to the MP5 and the battery in the telemetry device is almost empty

and must be replaced. Note that if a telemetry device is paired with an MP5 monitor without a direct

connection, the severity of the Replace Battery T INOP is controlled by the Information Center.

Configuring Screen Trend Settings

Monitor Setting: Main Setup -> Trends

Screen Trend Configuration Implications

ScreenTrend Time Use this setting to set the Screen Trend Time for all graphical and horizon

screen trends. Choices are: 30min, 1h, 2h, 4h, 8h, or 12h.

This is the Global screen trend time. This setting can be overridden by the Change TrendTime

configuration (see “Configuring Screen Trends” on page 22) which lets the user set a different

ScreenTrend Time for a particular screen trend channel or a group of aligned screen trends.

HorizonArrowTime This setting determines the time period used for calculating the direction of the

Horizon Trend Indicator, which shows how the patient trend has developed in the set time period.

Choices are: 10min, 5min, or 2min.

Configuring Horizon Trend Settings

The horizon view presents trend information superimposed over a defined baseline or base range. This

helps you visualize changes in your patient’s condition since the baseline/base range was set.

The position of the horizon baseline and the scale used when a certain measurement is first displayed in

horizon trend view, is defined by the settings Horizon High, Horizon Low, Scale Delta and

Unit. The defaults for Horizon High, Horizon Low, and Scale Delta are based on clinical

considerations, the default for Unit follows the measurement unit defined for the corresponding

measurement label. These default are stored invisibly in the IntelliVue patient monitor software. The user

can adapt Horizon High, Horizon Low, and Scale Delta during monitoring.

If you are not satisfied with the default settings, you can modify the defaults for up to 25 measurement

labels.

To modify Horizon Trend default settings,

1 In configuration mode, select Main Setup -> Trends -> Horizon Settings.

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP2 - MP90

MP5T

C M

ScreenTrend Time x x 30 min

HorizonArrowTime x x 10 min

Monitor Settings 4 Configuration Settings Appendix

2 Select the pop-up key Add to bring up the Setup Measurement menu.

3 Select Label and choose the measurement label for which you want to define changed default

Horizon Trend Settings. A maximum of 25 labels can be added.

4 Adjust each setting as required, and close the menu.

Monitor Setting: Main Setup -> Trends -> Horizon Settings

Horizon Trend Configuration Implications

Unit Choose the measurement unit that you will use to define the values for Horizon High,

Horizon Low and Scale Delta.

Horizon High/Low Set Horizon High to select the upper horizon value. Set Horizon Low to

select the lower horizon value. If the high and low horizon values are the same, the horizon is a baseline, if

the values are different, the horizon is a range.

Scale Delta defines the distance between the horizon and the upper and lower scale limits. Note that

the upper and lower scale limits may also be restricted by the measurement ranges defined for a label.

Note Make sure the values you enter for Horizon High/Low and Scale Delta match the Unit you

have entered. The unit of a label is defined in its measurement setup menu. If for a label the unit defined

in the Horizon Settings menu differs from the unit defined in the measurement setup menu, the values

defined for Horizon High/Low and Scale Delta will be automatically converted to match the

unit defined in the measurement setup menu.

Example: you set the Horizon Trend Unit for the label “Temp” to

C, Horizon High/Low to 35. If

you then change the Unit in the “Temp” Setup menu to

F, the Horizon High/Low will be

automatically converted to 95.

Configuring Global Trend Style

Monitor Setting: Main Setup -> Trends

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP2 - MP90

MP5T

C M

Label x <none>

Unit x <none>

Horizon High x <none>

Horizon Low x <none>

Scale Delta x <none>

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP2 - MP90

MP5T

C M

Global Style x x Band

4 Configuration Settings Appendix Monitor Settings

Global Trend Style Configuration Implications

Global Style The Global Style setting affects the presentation of measurements with

compound (multiple) values (for example ABP or CO

) in the Graphical Trends window and on screen

trends. If you set this to Band, the area between the trend lines, for example, between the systolic and

diastolic pressures, is filled with color. If you set it to Line, the trends are displayed as separate

continuous lines.

This setting applies to the graphical trends displayed in the GraphTrends window and the screen trends.

This setting can be overridden for individual parameters displayed in the GraphTrends window by

changing the Style setting for these parameters to Band or Line in the Trend Group Parameters

menu (see “Configuring Trend Groups” on page 117).

Configuring Trend Windows

Vital Signs Window

Monitor Setting: Main Setup -> Trends -> Setup VitalSigns

Graphical Trends Window

Monitor Setting: Main Setup -> Trends -> SetupGraphTrends

Trend Window Settings Configuration Implications

Trend Group Use this setting to define the default trend group that is displayed each time a trend

window is opened.

Interval Use this setting to define the default time interval (resolution of the trend data) that is

displayed each time a trend window is opened.

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP20 - MP90 (H10/20/40) MP5 - MP90 (H30) MP20 (#M20 /#M21)

MP5 (H10/20/40)

MP5T

MP2/X2

C M

Tren d Grou p x x St an da rd

Interval x x 30 min 5 min 10 min

Show Unit x Off

Color x On

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP20 - MP90 (H10/20/40) MP5 - MP90 (H30) MP20 (#M20 /#M21)

MP5 (H10/20/40)

MP5T

MP2/X2

C M

TrendGroup x x Standard

Interval x x 30 min

5 min 10 min

Monitor Settings 4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Show Units (Vital Signs window only) If Show Units is configured to On, the measurements in

the Vital Signs window are shown together with their units.

Color (Vital Signs window only) If Color is configured to On, the measurements in the Vital Signs

window are displayed in their individual parameter colors. If set to Off, all measurements are displayed in

white.

Configuring Vital Signs Recording

MP5-90

only

Monitor Setting: Main Setup -> Recordings -> Vital Signs

Vital Signs Recording Configuration Implications

End Case Record. Set this to On if you want the Vital Sign recording be triggered when a patient is

discharged using the End Case function.

Trend Group. Use this setting to define the default trend group that is recorded each time a Vital

Signs recording is triggered.

Period. Use this setting to define the period of time for which trend data should be printed on the

recording. Available choices are: 1, 2, 3, 6, 12, 24, 48, and 72 hours.

Interval. Use this setting to determine the default time interval (resolution of the trend data) that is

recorded each time a Vital Signs recording is triggered. Available choices are: 12 sec, 1 min, 5min,

10 min, 15 min, 30 min, 1 hours, 2 hours, 3 hours.

Show Units. If Show Units is configured to On, the measurements in the Vital Signs recording

are printed together with their units.

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP20 - MP90

MP5 (H30)

MP20 (M20/M21)

MP5 (H10/20/40)

MP5T

C M

End Case Record. x x Off

Tren d Grou p x x Al l

Period x x 6 hours

3 hours

Interval x x 30 min

10 min

Show Unit x Off

4 Configuration Settings Appendix Monitor Settings

Configuring ST Map

Main Setup -> ST Map

ST Map Settings Configuration Implications

Interval From the ST Map window, use the pop-up key Select Interval to configure the time

interval between the trended ST map samples when using ST Map in Trend View. The interval ranges

from 12 seconds to 30 minutes.

Scale In the ST Map window, switch to Trend View and use the Size Up / Size Down keys to

define the scale that the monitor uses in the ST Map application. Available choices are 1mm, 2mm, 3mm,

5mm, 10mm, and 15mm.

Configuring the C.O. Window

MP20-90

only

This lets you configure the measurement parameters shown in the results table of the C.O. procedure

window.

Monitor Setting: Main Setup -> Cardiac Output -> Table Contents

1 To configure the C.O. window settings, you must either have a C.O. transducer connected or

manually switch the C.O. measurement On. You can do this by turning C.O. On in the C.O. Setup

menu. Make sure that while you are configuring without a connected C.O. transducer, you do not

pause, switch off or silence alarms.

2 Select Main Setup > Cardiac Output to open the Cardiac Output window.

3 Select the pop-up key Table Contents to enter the Table Contents menu. The left column

displays the parameters that are already switched on. The right column contains other available

parameters.

4 Select a parameter in the right column and select the left arrow key to move the selected parameter to

the left column. The maximum number of entries that can be moved to the left varies depending on

the monitor model and display resolution.

5 Close the menu when you are finished.

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP2 - MP90

MP5T

C M

Interval x x 5 min

Scale x x 2 mm

Monitor Settings 4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Configuring the Wedge Window

MP20-90

only

Monitor Setting: Main Setup -> Wedge

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP20 - MP90

C M

C.O. x x On

C.I. x x On

ITBV x x Off

ITBVI x x On

EVLW x x Off

EVLWI x x On

GEDV x x Off

GEDVI x x Off

ETVI x x On

CFI x x On

Tblood x x Off

Tinj x x On

InjVol x x On

CathCt x x On

CompCt x x On

PVPI

1.not available in the U.S.A or in clinical environments under FDA control.

xxOff

GEF

xxOff

RLShnt

xxOff

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP20 - MP90 (H10/20/40) MP20 - MP90 (H30)

C M

Reference Wave 1 x x Primary Lead

Reference Wave 2 x x Resp

Wave Speed x x 25 mm/sec

PAWP Color x Green

Yellow

4 Configuration Settings Appendix Monitor Settings

Configuring the Loops Window

MP40-90

only

Monitor Setting: Main Setup -> Loops

Configuring the CSA Window

MP40-90

only

CSA Window Configuration

Monitor Setting: Main Setup -> Measurements -> EEG ->

Setup CSA Window

CSA Window Configuration Implications

Buffer defines which of the three preconfigured buffers (see "Configuring User Interface Settings -

Keys" on page 140) is used in the CSA window. This setting can also be changed in monitoring mode.

Note that the default buffer interval for CSAs viewed in the CSA window is optimized for a quick update

of CSA information.

Trend SEF / Trend MDF / Trend PPF defines which of the trend lines (SEF, MDF, PPF)

are displayed in the CSA window. These settings can also be changed in monitoring mode.

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP40 - MP90

C M

Loop Type x x Press/Volume

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP40 - MP90

C M

Buffer x x A (2 Sec)

Tren d S EF x x On

Tren d MD F x x Of f

Trend PPF x x Off

Clipping x On

Frequency Scale x 0...30 Hz

Monitor Settings 4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Clipping Set Clipping to On to improve the 3-D presentation of the CSA and make it more

“readable”. When set to On, peaks in the spectral lines are artificially clipped at a certain height (see

graphic). If Clipping is Off, peaks can be displayed over the full window height which may result in a

more cluttered presentation.

Frequency Scale defines the bandwidth displayed in the CSA. Note that the calculation is always

done on the full bandwidth.

Configuring ECG Application

ECG Application Configuration

Monitor Setting: Main Setup -> Measurement -> ECG

ECG Application Configuration Implications

Auto Filter If the AutoFilter setting is configured to On the monitor will automatically

switch to the setting Filter if electromagnetic interference is detected.

Default ECG Size This setting lets you preconfigure the default size with which all ECG waves are

drawn on the Screen. The Choices are x0.5, x1, x2, x4, AutoSize. If you select AutoSize, the

monitor chooses the optimal adjustment factor for all the ECG waves so that they use the space available

to them as efficiently as possible. Use the 1 mV calibration bar as an indicator of the actual signal strength.

Clipping

Hidden lines

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP5 - MP90 (H10/20/40)

MP2/X2

MP5T

MP5 - MP90 (H30)

C M

AutoFilter x Off

Fix Pacer Amplit x Off

Default ECG Size x Size x1

Size x2

4 Configuration Settings Appendix Monitor Settings

Fix Pacer Amplit Set this to On to configure the pacer spikes to have a fixed size, for ease of

identification on the monitor Screen. The spikes are then shown in the background as a dotted line. The

length of the dotted line is fixed to the height of the wave channel and is independent of the actual pacer

amplitude. Set it to Off to display the pacer spikes as a solid line in their original height and the pace

pulse markers next to the pacer spikes.

Configuring Calculations

MP20-90

only

Monitor Setting: Main Setup -> Calculations

Calculations Configuration Implications

Calc. Time Ref. (relevant for Hemo Calcs only) The calculation time reference determines the

timestamp of all measurement values that are used for a hemodynamic calculation except the C.O. value.

Select C.O. Time if you want to use the values measured at exactly the time of the most recently saved

C.O. measurement.

Select Current Time if you want to use the currently measured values (i.e. the values measured at the

time you entered the Calculations window). The most recent available C.O. value is used for the

calculation. Be aware that if Calc. Time Ref. is set to Current Time, and the calculation is

performed significantly later then the C.O. value has been saved, the difference in timestamps may reduce

the clinical validity of the calculation results.

ON OFF

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP20 - MP90

C M

Calc. Time Ref. x C.O. Time

Height Unit x not applicable, these settings are stored as Global Settings, see "Global Settings" on page 144.

Weight Unit x

BSA Form. Adult x Dubois

BSA Form. Pedi x Dubois

BSA Form. Neo x Boyd

Hemo Press Unit x mmHg

Gas Press Unit x mmHg

Hb Unit x g/dl

Hemo Calcs x On

Oxy Calcs x On

Vent Calcs x Off

Monitor Settings 4 Configuration Settings Appendix

BSA Form. Adult/Pedi/Neo Defines the formula used to calculate the body surface area. The

choices are Dubois and Boyd.

Hemo Press Unit Defines the unit used for hemodynamic pressures in the calculation window. The

choices are mmHg and kPa.

Gas Press Unit Defines the unit used for gas pressures in the calculation window. The choices are

mmHg and kPa.

Hb Unit Defines the unit used for hemoglobin in the calculation window. The choices are g/dl and

mmol/l.

Hemo Calcs Set Hemo Calcs to On to make the Hemo Calcs menu entry available in the

Calculations menu in monitoring mode.

Oxy Calcs Set Oxy Calcs to On to make the Oxy Calcs menu entry available in the

Calculations menu in monitoring mode.

Vent Calcs Set Vent Calcs to On to make the Vent Calcs menu entry available in the

Calculations menu in monitoring mode.

Configuring Reports

Not

MP5T

Monitor Setting: Main Setup -> Reports -> Setup Reports -> Report

For some report types, some of the settings are not shown. This means that they cannot be changed.

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP2 - MP90

C M

Realtime Rep

Report Type x x VisibleWaves

Report Size x x Unspecified

Orientation x x Unspecified

Target Device x x Unspecified

VitalsReport

Report Type x x Vital Signs

Report Size x x Unspecified

Orientation x x Unspecified

Target Device x x Unspecified

Graph Report

Report Type x x Graph Trend

Report Size x x Unspecified

Orientation x x Unspecified

Target Device x x Unspecified

4 Configuration Settings Appendix Monitor Settings

100

EventEpisode

Report Type x x Episode

Report Size x x Unspecified

Orientation x x Unspecified

Target Device x x Unspecified

Event Review

Report Type x x Review

Report Size x x Unspecified

Orientation x x Unspecified

Target Device x x Unspecified

ECG Report A

Report Type x x ECG3X4

Report Size x x Unspecified

Orientation x x Unspecified

Target Device x x Unspecified

ECG Report B

Report Type x x ECG12x1

Report Size x x Ledger

Orientation x x Unspecified

Target Device x x Unspecified

ST Map Rep.

Report Type x x ST Map

Report Size x x Unspecified

Orientation x x Unspecified

Target Device x x Unspecified

EEG Report

Report Type x x EEG Report

Report Size x x Unspecified

Orientation x x Unspecified

Target Device x x Unspecified

C.O. Report

Target Device x x Unspecified

Wedge Report

Target Device x x Unspecified

ProtWatchRep

Report Type x x Protocol 1

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP2 - MP90

C M

Monitor Settings 4 Configuration Settings Appendix

101

For information on configuring ECG reports, see "Configuring ECG Reports" on page 105.

For information on configuring CSA reports, see "CSA Reports Configuration" on page 106.

For information on configuring Trend reports, see "Configuring Trend Reports" on page 106.

Report Size x x Unspecified

Orientation x x Unspecified

Target Device x x Unspecified

Alarm Limits

Report Type x x Alarm Limits

Report Size x x Unspecified

Orientation x x Unspecified

Target Device x x Unspecified

Calc. Report

Target Device x x Unspecified

Calc. Review

Target Device x x Unspecified

Loops Report

Target Device x x Unspecified

Drug Calc

Target Device x x Unspecified

System Report

Report Type x x Test Report

Report Size x x Unspecified

Orientation x x Unspecified

Target Device x x Unspecified

User Report A

Report Type x x None

Report Size x x Unspecified

Orientation x x Unspecified

Target Device x x Unspecified

User Report B

Report Type x x None

Report Size x x Unspecified

Orientation x x Unspecified

Target Device x x Unspecified

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP2 - MP90

C M

4 Configuration Settings Appendix Monitor Settings

102

Reports Configuration Implications

Each time a report is triggered, the monitor looks through the list of printers in the order they appear in

the Setup Printers menu and prints the report on the first enabled printer that meets the

requirements of the triggered report.

Report Type Lets you select a template for the report. The selection of templates listed depends on

the report selected. The following templates are available:

– VisibleWaves: all waves currently visible, in the order they appear on the screen.

– All Waves: all measured waves.

– RT Waves: all currently measured realtime waves, according to the monitor’s priority list.

– HiRes Waves: all measured HiRes waves.

– OxyCRG Waves: the OxyCRG/Neonatal Event Review waves.

– Vital Signs: trend information in tabular form.

– Graph Trend: trend information in graphic form.

– Episode: a single patient event episode.

– Review: an overview of patient events.

– Event Rev All:

– ECG3X4, ECG6X2, ECG12X1, ECG4X2, ECG8X1, ECG12X1(2P): Different formats

of ECG reports.

– ST Map: ST Map report.

– EEG Report: EEG report.

– Protocol 1 / 2 / 3: ProtocolWatch reports.

– Alarm Limits: a list of all currently set alarm limits.

– Battery Stat: Battery Status report.

Report Size Lets you choose the paper size to be used for the report. The selection of sizes listed

depends on the report type selected: Unspecified, Universal, A4, Letter, LrgUniversal,

A3, or Ledger.

• If set to Unspecified, the report prints on the first available printer in the list of printers which is

enabled and which has a paper size appropriate for the chosen template.

• If set to Universal, the report prints on the first available printer in the list of printers which is

enabled and which offers the paper size A4 or US letter.

•If set to LrgUniversal, the report prints on the first available printer in the list of printers which is

enabled and which offers the paper size A3 or ledger.

Orientation lets you set the orientation of the report printout. The selection of orientations listed

depends on the report type and report size selected: Unspecified to use the default size for the

template chosen, Landscape or Portrait.

Target Device Lets you choose which printer the print job will be sent to:

• If set to Unspecified, the report prints on the first printer in the list of printers which is enabled

and which has a paper size appropriate for the chosen template. If no printer is available when the report

is triggered, the report is sent to the print database from where it will be automatically printed, when an

appropriate printer becomes available.

Monitor Settings 4 Configuration Settings Appendix

103

• If set to Local 1 / 2, the report will be sent to the corresponding local printer. If the printer is not

available when the report is triggered, the report is not printed, and the information is lost.

• If set to Remote 1 / 2 /3, the report will be sent to the corresponding remote printer. If the

printer is not available when the report is triggered, the report is not printed, and the information is

lost.

• If set to Database, the report will be sent to the print database (provided this is enabled, see "Print

Database" on page 173). The print database is a special section of the monitor database which acts as a

buffer for print jobs. Print jobs stored in the print database are automatically printed when a print

device with a paper size matching the template of the report is available. Reports stored in the print

database will not be cleared by a discharge or by a power cycle.

Configuring Addressograph

Not

MP5T

Monitor Setting: Main Setup -> Reports

Addressograph This lets you configure an addressograph field at the top of the report. Choices are

Left side, Right side, or None. An addressograph field is an empty field which has a width of 60mm,

its height depends on the report. This enables the clinician to label the report with their own patient data.

Configuring Auto Reports

Not

MP5T

Monitor Setting: Main Setup -> Reports -> Auto Reports

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP2 - MP90

C M

Addressograph x None

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP5 - MP90 (H10/20/40)

MP2/X2

MP5 - MP90 (H30)

C M

Auto Report A

Report x x None

End Case Report x x On

Off

Scheduled Rep. x x On

Start Hour x x 7

Start Minute x x 0

Rep. Freq.(Hr) x x 24

Rep. Freq.(Min) x x 0

Auto Report B

Report x x None

4 Configuration Settings Appendix Monitor Settings

104

Auto Reports Configuration Implications

Auto Reports print automatically when a specified trigger occurs. There are two types of Auto Reports:

• Scheduled reports can be set up to print at predefined intervals, starting at a predefined time of

day. The start time you set applies for every following day. For example, if you set a start time of 07:00

and a repeat time of six hours, the first report will print at 07:00 every day, the next at 13:00 and so on.

• End Case Reports print when a patient is discharged using the monitor’s End Case function.

An Auto Report can include both a Scheduled Report and an End Case report.

Setting up an End Case Report

1 Select Main Setup -> Reports -> Auto Reports

2 Select one of the four available Auto Report “slots” (A, B, C, or D)

3 Select Report, then select the type of report you want to be printed when a patient is discharged

using the End Case function, for example “VitalsReport”.

4 Set End Case Report to On.

End Case Report x x On Off

Scheduled Rep. x x On

Start Hour x x 7

Start Minute x x 0

Rep. Freq.(Hr) x x 24

Rep. Freq.(Min) x x 0

Auto Report C

Report x x None

End Case Report x x On

Off

Scheduled Rep. x x On

Start Hour x x 7

Start Minute x x 0

Rep. Freq.(Hr) x x 24

Rep. Freq.(Min) x x 0

Auto Report D

Report x x None

End Case Report x x On

Off

Scheduled Rep. x x On

Start Hour x x 7

Start Minute x x 0

Rep. Freq.(Hr) x x 24

Rep. Freq.(Min) x x 0

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP5 - MP90 (H10/20/40)

MP2/X2

MP5 - MP90 (H30)

C M

Monitor Settings 4 Configuration Settings Appendix

105

5 Set Scheduled Rep. to Off, if do not want the monitor to trigger a Vital Signs Report at

predefined intervals.

6 If needed, set up the VitalsReport or whatever type of report you used for the EndCase Report.

7 If you want more than one report to be printed when using End Case on a patient, repeat steps 2

through 6, selecting a different Auto Report (A, B, C, or D) and allocating it a different report

type.

Configuring ECG Reports

Not

MP5T

ECG Reports Configuration

Monitor Setting: Main Setup -> Reports -> ECG Reports

ECG Reports Configuration Implications

Report Lead Layout The layout of the report can be configured to either International or

Cabrera.

ECG Gain This lets you set a defined ECG Gain to determine how ECG waves will appear on the ECG

report printouts.

Speed Allows you to set the ECG wave speed used on the printout.

Annotation Set Annotation to On if the printed ECG wave should be annotated with beat labels.

Pace pulse marks are automatically printed beside the wave for paced patients.

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP2 - MP90

C M

ReportLead Layout x Internat

ECG Gain x x 10 mm/mV

Speed x x 25 mm/sec

Annotation x x Off

4 Configuration Settings Appendix Monitor Settings

106

Configuring CSA Reports

MP40-90

only

CSA Reports Configuration

Monitor Setting: Main Setup -> Reports -> CSA on EEG Rep.

CSA Reports Configuration Implications

Buffer defines which of the three preconfigured buffers (see "Configuring User Interface Settings -

Keys" on page 140) is used on a CSA report. This setting can also be changed in monitoring mode. Note

that the default buffer interval for CSA reports is intended to provide an overview of longer term CSA

trends.

Trend SEF / MDF / PPF defines which of the available trend lines (SEF, MDF, PPF) are printed

on the CSA report. This setting can also be changed in monitoring mode.

Clipping Set Clipping to On to improve the 3-D presentation of the CSA and make it more

“readable”. When set to On, peaks in a spectral line are artificially clipped at a certain height (see graphic

under "Configuring User Interface Settings - Keys" on page 140). If Clipping is Off, peaks can reach

as high as the window allows which may result in a more cluttered presentation.

Frequency Scale defines the bandwidth used for the CSA report.

Configuring Trend Reports

Not

MP5T

Vital Signs Report

Monitor Setting: Main Setup -> Reports -> Vital Signs Rep.

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP40 - MP90

C M

Buffer x x C (120 Sec)

Tren d S EF x x On

Tren d MD F x x Off

Trend PPF x x Off

Clipping x On

Frequency Scale x 0...30 Hz

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP20 - MP90

MP5 (H30)

MP20 (M20/M21)

MP5 (H10/20/40)

MP2/X2

C M

Tr e n d G r o u p x x A l l

Period x x 6 hours

3 hours

Interval x x 30 min

10 min

Show Units x Off

Monitor Settings 4 Configuration Settings Appendix

107

Graphical Trend Report

Not

MP5T

Monitor Setting: Main Setup -> Reports -> Graph Trend Rep.

Trend Report Settings Configuration Implications

Trend Group Use this setting to define the default trend group that is printed each time a trend report

is triggered.

Interval (Vital Signs Report only) Use this setting to determine the default time interval (resolution

of the trend data) that is printed each time a trend report is triggered.

Show Units (Vital Signs Report only) If Show Units is configured to On, the measurements in the

Vital Signs report are printed together with their units.

Period Use this setting to define the period of time for which trend data should be printed on the

report. If Automatic Period is configured to On, all trend data for the current patient will be

printed, irrespective which trend period is selected.

Automatic Period (Graphical Trend Report only) When Automatic Period is set to Off,

the Period setting defines the period of trend information printed on Graphic Trend Reports. When

Automatic Period is On, the Period setting is ignored and the Graphic Trend Report shows

trend information for the entire period stored in the trend database. The time is shown on the report’s

horizontal axis, which always extends across one page, and the measurement trends are printed below each

other on the vertical axis.

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP20 - MP90

MP5 (H30)

MP20 (M20/M21)

MP5 (H10/20/40)

MP2/X2

C M

Tr e n d G r o u p x x A l l

Period x x 6 hours

3 hours

Automatic Period x x Off

4 Configuration Settings Appendix Monitor Settings

108

Configuring User Interface Settings

Monitor Setting: Main Setup -> User Interface

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP20-MP90

(H10/20/40)

MP5-MP90

(H30)

MP20 (M20/M21)

MP5 (H10/20/40)

MP5T

MP2/X2 MP2/X2

C M Profile Adult

Profile Pedi

Profile Neo

Profile Adult

Profile Pedi

Profile Neo

Profile Adult

Profile Pedi

Profile Neo

Profile Adult

Profile Pedi

Profile Neo

Profile

Outdoor

General QRS Volume x x 1

3 1 1 3

QRS Low x 0

QRS Type x not applicable, this setting is stored as a global setting, see "Global Settings" on

page 144.

Prompt Volume x 8

4 8 10

Ton e Mod u la ti o n x x Yes

Tone Mod. Type x Enhanced

Global Speed x x 25mm/s

RespiratorySpeed x x 6.25mm/s

EEG Speed x x 25 mm/s

Tou ch To n e Vo lu me x 1 3

Tou ch En ab le

Yes

MMS Keys

xEnabled not applicable

ArrhyOff Message x Yes

No Yes

Meas. Selection x Window

Meas. Deactivate x Manual

Timer Volume x 4 6

OtherBed Colors x not applicable, this setting is stored as a network setting: see "Configuring

Network Settings" on page 112.

Global SmartKeys x not applicable, these settings are stored as unique monitor settings: see

"Configuring User Interface Settings - Keys" on page 140.

Oper. 1 Fn Keys x

Oper. 2 Fn Keys x

Companion Operating

x Enabled not applicable

Display

x Curr. Screen not applicable

Display 1 Brightness

x x Optimum 10

Standby Brightn.

x Optimum

TransportBrightn

x Optimum 10

Menu LineSpacing

xWide not applicable

Display Units x No

Alarm Limits x Yes

No Yes

Auto Fill Waves x x Yes

No Yes

Show ST In Wave x No

Yes No

NBP Time x Meas Time

Monitor Settings 4 Configuration Settings Appendix

109

User Interface Configuration Implications

QRS Volume Sets the default volume of the QRS tone. The QRS tone is derived from either the ECG

or Pulse, depending on which is currently selected as the alarm source.

QRS Low Defines the minimum QRS tone volume that can be selected by the user while in monitoring

mode.

Wave Style x Line Filled

Wave Line Style x Thin

Medium

Display 2

Menu LineSpacing x Wide not applicable, only one display supported

Display Units x No

Alarm Limits x Yes

Auto Fill Waves x x Yes

Show ST In Wave x No

Yes

Hide Alarm Info x No

Hide Keys x No

NBP Time x Meas Time

Wave Style x Line

Filled

Wave Line Style x Thin

Medium

Display 3

Menu LineSpacing x Wide not applicable, only one display supported

Display Units x No

Alarm Limits x Yes

Auto Fill Waves x x Yes

Show ST In Wave x No

Yes

Hide Alarm Info x No

Hide Keys x No

NBP Time x Meas Time

Wave Style x Line

Filled

Wave Line Style x Thin

Medium

1.Setting can be changed in service mode only.

2.Setting not available in MP2/X2 monitors.

3.Setting not available in MP2/X2 and MP5 monitors.

4.Setting only affects monitors that have a built-in display.

5.Setting only available in monitors that can be operated on battery power.

6.Setting not available for MP2/X2

7.Setting only available in monitors with two main displays.

8.Setting only available in monitors with three main displays.

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP20-MP90

(H10/20/40)

MP5-MP90

(H30)

MP20 (M20/M21)

MP5 (H10/20/40)

MP5T

MP2/X2 MP2/X2

C M Profile Adult

Profile Pedi

Profile Neo

Profile Adult

Profile Pedi

Profile Neo

Profile Adult

Profile Pedi

Profile Neo

Profile Adult

Profile Pedi

Profile Neo

Profile

Outdoor

4 Configuration Settings Appendix Monitor Settings

110

Prompt Volume Defines the volume of the tone the monitor emits to draw the user’s attention to a

prompt message shown in the monitor’s prompt/status line.

Tone Modulation if you set Tone Modulation to Yes, the pitch of the SpO

tone will change

with the measured signal strength.

Tone Modulation Type This setting lets you choose between Standard and Enhanced.

Standard is the regular Nellcor behavior. The difference in frequency per % saturation change is small

which might make it difficult to hear smaller changes. Enhanced results in a larger (and therefore more

obvious) frequency decrease for each drop in SpO

level. Due to the larger steps, when the saturation

drops below 70%, the absolute frequency may become so low that the perceived volume will be low and it

will be hard to hear a frequency change per % saturation.

Global Speed The Global Speed setting defines the speed of all non-respiratory and non-EEG

waves on the Screen. The Global Speed setting can be overridden by fixed wave channel speeds. See

“Configuring Screen Trends” on page 22.

RespiratorySpeed The Respiratory Speed setting defines the speed of all respiratory waves

(CO

, Resp. anesthetic agents and O

) on the Screen. The RespiratorySpeed setting can be

overridden by fixed wave channel speeds. See “Configuring Screen Trends” on page 22.

EEG Speed The EEG Speed setting defines the speed of all EEG waves (including BIS) on the

Screen. The EEG Speed setting can be overridden by fixed wave channel speeds. See “Configuring

Screen Trends” on page 22.

Touch Tone Volume The Touch Tone Volume setting defines the volume of the tone you hear

every time you select a field on the monitor screen. You may want to set this to 0 if you want to operate the

monitor in a quiet environment.

MMS Keys To prevent users from using the hardkeys on the Multi-Measurement Module, set

MMS Keys to Disabled. This setting is not available in the MP2 and X2.

ArrhyOff Messg If ArrhyOff Messg is set to On, and arrhythmia analysis is switched off, the

message “Arrhythmia OFF” appears beside the ECG wave. Set this to Off, if you do not want to see this

message when arrhythmia is off.

Meas. Selection. The Meas. Selection setting defines the behavior of the monitor if a

measurement label conflict occurs.

•Set this to Indicator to make the measurement selection icon with question marks your only

indicator of the label conflict.

•Set it to Window to pop up the Measurement Selection window indicating the label conflict.

•Set it to Auto Select. to let the monitor resolve the conflict automatically by assigning a new,

generic label to the newly connected measurement device. Be aware that this behavior only applies to

the following plug-in module measurements:

–SpO

– Invasive Pressure

–Temperature

Auto Select. does not work on any MMS measurements.

Meas. Deactivate This setting defines the monitor’s behavior when you connect a measurement

device (MMS or plug-in module) to the monitor, and

Monitor Settings 4 Configuration Settings Appendix

111

• a measurement label of the newly connected device duplicates the label of an already connected

measurement device, and

• the already connected device is switched off.

If Meas. Deactivate is set to Manual, the monitor deactivates the newly connected measurement,

due to the label conflict.

If Meas. Deactivate is set to Auto, the monitor deactivates the previously connected measurement

device and activates the newly connected device.

Timer Volume determines the volume of the notification tone for all timers.

Companion - Operating This setting is only available on host monitors that can support the X2

or MP5 as a multi-measurement module (companion mode). It determines whether the companion

monitor (X2 or MP5) can still be operated, when it is connected to a host monitor. If Enabled,

functions you can operate on an X2 or MP5 are restricted to measurements originating in that device. If

Disabled, no operation is possible.

Companion - Display This setting is only available on host monitors that can support the X2 or

MP5 as a multi-measurement module (companion mode). It determines which Screen is shown on the

companion monitor (X2 or MP5), when it is connected to a host monitor. Choices are:

• Curr. Screen: shows the Screen that was active before connecting to the host.

• Blank Screen: shows a special companion mode standby Screen.

Brightness Defines the default brightness for monitoring. This setting is not applicable for an MP80/

90 monitor (external display). For Brightness, the choice Optimum is equivalent to 8.

Standby Brightness Lets you choose a brightness setting for when the monitor is in Standby.

This setting is not applicable for an MP80/90 monitor (external display). For Standby Brightness,

the choice Optimum is equivalent to 1.

Transport Brightness This setting is only available on the MP2 - MP50. It defines the display

brightness when the monitor is running on battery power. For Transport Brightness, the choice

Optimum is equivalent to 4.

Menu LineSpacing Use this to change the line spacing for all menus. Wide provides more room

between menu entries and is the recommended setting for touchscreen use. Narrow lets you see more

menu entries on one menu page and is recommended when using mouse or SpeedPoint/Navigation Point

as the primary input device.

Display Units If Display Units is set to Yes, the measurement units are displayed next to the

measurement numerics, provided that there is enough space.

Alarm Limits If Alarm Limits is set to Yes, the alarm limits are displayed next to the

measurement numerics, provided that there is enough space.

Auto Fill Waves If Auto Fill Waves is set to Yes, the monitor automatically assigns

available waves that would otherwise not be displayed, to wave channels for which the preconfigured waves

are currently not available. Set Auto Fill Waves to No, if you do not want waves other than the ones

preconfigured to automatically appear on the Screen.

4 Configuration Settings Appendix Monitor Settings

112

An example: assume you are viewing a 4 wave Screen with the following wave channel configuration (top

to bottom): ECG, Any SpO

, Any Press, CO

. With Auto Fill Waves set to Yes, if you were

currently not measuring CO

but a 2nd Invasive Pressure, the monitor would automatically assign the 2nd

Invasive Pressure to the 4th wave channel. With Auto Fill Waves set to No, the 4th wave channel

would be empty.

Show ST In Wave If Show ST in Wave is set to Yes, the current ST value will be shown next

to each ECG wave.

Hide Alarm Info This setting only applies to monitors with two or three main displays. It is only

available for Display 2 and Display 3. If you set it to Yes, for example for Display 3, this

display will no longer show any alarm related information, such as alarm messages, alarm limits next to the

numerics, and Alarm off symbols. Flashing numerics will also be deactivated on this display.

Hide Keys This setting only applies to monitors with two or three main displays. It is only available

for Display 2 and Display 3. If you set it to Yes, for example for Display 3, the Operating

Area, including permanent keys, SmartKeys, and the Measurement Selection key will be deactivated and

invisible on this display.

NBP Time If NBP Time is set to Meas Time, the time shown beside the NBP numeric will show the

timestamp of the most recent NBP measurement. If set to Next Meas, and NBP mode is set to Auto,

the time until the next automatic measurement is shown, along with a graphic representation of the

remaining time.

Wave Style This setting lets you change the presentation of certain respiratory waveforms (CO

AWF, AWP, and AWV). If you set this to Filled, the area underneath the waves is filled with color. If

you set it to Line, the waves are displayed in the standard way, as continuous lines.

Wave Line Style This setting lets you configure the thickness of all waves and HiRes Trends on

display 1 (2,3). For better visibility over a distance you might want to use Medium or Thick. The

choices are: Thin, Medium, Thick, Extra Thick.

Configuring Network Settings

Monitor Setting: Main Setup -> Network

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP5 - MP90 (H10/20/40)

MP2/X2

MP5 - MP90 (H30)

C M

Auto Window x x not applicable, see "Network Configuration Implications"

Auto Window Type x PatWindow

Off

Auto Window Disp

xDisplay 1

CareGroup Status x On

Caregroup x Standard

CentralMonitorng x Mandatory

Optional

Tele Screen x on ECG

Return To x Previous

Other BedColors

xEnabled

Monitor Settings 4 Configuration Settings Appendix

113

Network Configuration Implications

Auto Window This is not a configurable setting. It can be used during monitoring to temporarily

disable automatic notification of alarm conditions at the other beds in the Care Group. To configure the

automatic notification to disabled, set Auto Window Type to Off.

Auto Window Type If you want to prevent automatic notification of alarm conditions at the other

beds in the Care Group, configure Auto Window Type to Off. If you want notification at the

monitor of alarm conditions at other beds in the Care Group, configure either:

• Care Group, to make the My Care Group window pop up.

• Alarming Beds, to make the Alarming Beds window pop up, that shows all beds in the associated

care group that currently have unsilenced alarms.

• Pat.Window, to make the Other Patient Window for the alarming bedside pop up.

Note that if the Information Center is configured to unit-based care groups and Auto Window Type

is configured to Pat.Window, the monitor may automatically fall back to Alarming Beds.

Auto Window can be temporarily disabled in monitoring mode. To do this, select the network symbol on

the monitor’s information line, then select Auto Window and toggle to Disabled. Remember to re-

enable the Auto Window as soon as possible.

Auto Window Disp This setting applies only to monitors with multiple main displays. It defines on

which of the connected displays the automatic pop-up window configured under Auto Window Type

is shown. If the configured display is not available, the monitor automatically uses Display 1.

CareGroup Status If you are asked to hide the Care Group Overview Bar on all Screens, set the

CareGroup Status to Off.

Caregroup This setting lets you change the way care groups are defined.

• Set this to Standard if you want the beds in your care group to be defined by the care group setup at

the IntelliVue Information Center. Depending on your revision of the Information Center, the

following care group models are supported:

– Bed-Based CareGroups: lets you assign a maximum number of 12 patients from a clinical unit to a

care group.

Remote Controls x not applicable, this settings is stored as a global setting, see "Global Settings" on page 144

CaregroupToneVol x 8

Caregroup Tone x Standard

RF Access Code

1.setting available for MP90 with more than one main display only.

2.setting not available for MP2/X2.

3.setting available for MP2, MP5, MP20/30 and MP40/50 only.

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP5 - MP90 (H10/20/40)

MP2/X2

MP5 - MP90 (H30)

C M

4 Configuration Settings Appendix Monitor Settings

114

– Unit-Based CareGroup (IIC Rev. G and higher): assigns all beds on all Information Centers assigned

to a clinical unit to one large care group (up to 64 patients monitored by up to 4 Information

Centers).

For more detail, please refer to the IntelliVue Information Center Instructions for Use.

•Set it to My Central if you need to assign more than 12 beds, but not more than 16 beds to a care

group. This care group model is typically used in facilities with only one IntelliVue Information Center

(IIC). “My Central” care groups include all beds (up to 16) from a directly connected IIC, but cannot

combine beds from different IICs. The selection of beds in a “My Central” care group is static and

cannot be configured.

Be aware that in order to be included in the My Central care group, beds need to be assigned to a care

group at the Information Center. Also, at the IIC, configure “Overview Auto-Alarm” and “Overview

Prompt-Tone” for all Care Groups to the same settings. This ensures that all beds in the “My Central”

Care Group exhibit the same alarm behavior.

Central Monitorng If CentralMonitorng is set to Mandatory, and the monitor was not

connected to an Information Center when switched on, or loses its connection to the Central during

monitoring, it will generate the INOP message “No Central Monit.”, accompanied by an INOP tone.

If CentralMonitorng is set to Optional, the monitor generates the same INOP, but only when

the monitor loses the connection during monitoring. The INOP will not be generated if the monitor is

not connected to an Information Center when it is switched on. This setting is intended for standalone

monitors.

Tele Screen Set Tele Screen to On Pair if you want the monitor to automatically switch to

a Screen with a Telemetry Data Overview screen element embedded when the user “pairs” the monitor

with a telemetry device. If there is more than one of these special Screens available, the monitor uses the

first Screen in the Screen list. If Tele Screen is set to On ECG, the change to the Tele Screen happens

if the monitor is paired with the tele transmitter and a valid ECG signal from the Tele transmitter is

available. Set Tele Screen to Off, to switch off the automatism completely.

The availability of this function depends on the Information Center revision the monitor is connected to.

See your Information Center Instructions for Use for further details.

Return To This setting determines which Screen the monitor loads when it is unpaired from the

telemetry device or when, while paired, the ECG is sourced from the bedside.

• Previous loads the Screen that was active before the Telemetry Screen was loaded.

• Default loads the Screen defined for the default profile.

• Off does not automatically switch the Screen.

OtherBed Colors This determines whether the measurement information from another bed is

shown in the colors assigned at the Information Center or in monochrome (green on black).

The availability of this function depends on the Information Center revision the monitor is connected to.

See your Information Center Instructions for Use for further details.

Caregroup Tone A new alarm that occurs in any of the beds assigned to the monitor’s care group can

be announced with a tone. The Caregroup Tone setting lets you toggle between a Standard and

Enhanced tone. The Enhanced tone is a more prominent tone to draw attention to the screen.

The Caregroup Tone will only be generated if an alarm exceeds the Auto Alarm Severity level

configured at the Information Center. The volume of the

Caregroup Tone is determined by the

CaregroupToneVol setting (see below). Note that the Caregroup Tone can be completely

disabled at the Information Center.

Monitor Settings 4 Configuration Settings Appendix

115

CaregroupToneVol This setting defines the volume of the caregroup tone. It can be set in a range

between 0 and 10. If you set CaregroupToneVol to 0, this is indicated by a crossed speaker symbol in

any embedded Other Bed window. For more information on care groups and Other Bed windows, see the

Monitor and Information Center Instructions for Use.

RF Access Code This setting is a global setting. It is available with IntelliVue MP2, MP5, MP20/30

and MP40/50 monitors only. It is needed to establish communication of the IntelliVue Instrument

Telemetry transceiver with the access points of the wireless network. The IntelliVue Instrument Telemetry

transceiver only communicates with an access point that is configured to the same RF Access Code.

4 Configuration Settings Appendix Unique Monitor Settings

116

Unique Monitor Settings

Some Monitor settings are unique settings. This means that they are the same in every Profile and they are

automatically included in each monitor settings block when you store them. See "Understanding Monitor

Settings" on page 83 for more detail.

The following table provides an overview of normal vs. unique monitor settings:

Monitor Settings

Normal Page Unique Page

Alarms 84 Tre nd Group s 117

Alarm Recordings 87 Trend Prior it i es 120

Auto Alarm Limits 88 Trend Scales / Trend Units 121

INOP Severity 89 Event Surveillance 124

Screen Trend Settings 90 Event Annotations 131

Horizon Trend Settings 90 ProtocolWatch 132

Global Trend Style 91 Recordings (except Vital Signs & Alarm Rec.) 133

Tren d Wi nd ows 92 Timers 136

Vital Signs Recording 93 Global SmartKeys, Function Keys 140

ST Map 94 CSA Buffers 142

C.O. Window 94 Drug Calculator 143

Wedge Window 95

Loops Window 96

CSA Window 96

ECG Application 97

Calculations (except Drug Calc.) 98

Reports 99

Addressograph 103

Auto Reports 103

ECG Reports 105

CSA Reports 106

Tren d Re p o rt s 106

User Interface (except Keys) 108

Network 112

Unique Monitor Settings 4 Configuration Settings Appendix

117

Configuring Trend Groups

Unique Monitor Setting: Main Setup -> Trends -> Trend Groups

Factory Defaults

# Oper.

Mode

MP2 - MP90

MP5T

C M Name Parameters Scale Style

1 x x All All parameters Global Global

2 x x Standard HR, SpO

, SpO

l, SpO

NBP

, RR, awRR

Any Press

Any Temp

Global

2xxCardiac HR, PVC

STindx, ST, Any QT

Global

4xxHemo HR

ABP, Pulse(ABP)

ART, Pulse(ART)

Ao, Pulse(Ao)

PAP, Pulse(PAP)

CVP

RAP

LAP

ICP

UAP, Pulse(UAP)

UVP

P, P u l s e ( P )

PAWP, CPP

C.O., C.I., CCO, CCI

ITBV, ITBVI, EVLW, EVLWI

Tblood

Global

5xxResp CO

awRR

Global

4 Configuration Settings Appendix Unique Monitor Settings

118

6 x x Spirometry PIP, PEEP

TVexp

TVin

MVexp

MVin

RRspir

COMP

Raw

Global

7 x x Neuro BIS, TP, SEF, SQI, EMG, SR

TP1, TP2

SEF1, SEF2

MDF1, MDF2

PPF1, PPF2

Delta1, Delta2

Theta1, Theta2

Alpha1, Alpha2

Beta1, Beta2

Global

8 x x Temp AnyTemp, Any DiffTemp Global Global

9xxGases CO

awRR

ISO

SEV

ENF

HAL

DES

MAC

Global

Factory Defaults

# Oper.

Mode

MP2 - MP90

MP5T

C M Name Parameters Scale Style

Unique Monitor Settings 4 Configuration Settings Appendix

119

Trend Groups Configuration Implications

The measurements grouped in trend groups define the trends displayed together in the Vital Signs or

Graphics Trends windows and printed in trends reports and recordings. The trend group All contains all

available measurements, you can change its name, but not the order or selection of parameters as they

appear when this group is selected.

Sort Up / Sort Down Lets you change both the sequence of trend groups, and the sequence of the

trended measurement parameters within a group.

Add Separatr Lets you add line separators. Trended parameters listed between line separators are

displayed overlapping in one trend segment.

Scale Lets you change the scales for the trended parameters. If set to Global, the Graphical Trends

window and the Graph Trends Report use the scales as defined in the general Trend Scales configuration,

see "Configuring Trend Scales / Trend Units" on page 121.

Style Lets you change how trended parameters are presented in the Graphical Trends window and on

the Graph Trends Report. Select Line to display the trends as a continuous line. For measurements with

compound values (for example, the systolic and diastolic pressures), select Band to fill the area between

trend lines with color. If set to Global, the trend windows and reports use the style as defined in the

Global Style configuration, see "Configuring Horizon Trend Settings" on page 90.

10 x x Vuelink CO

awRR

, FIO

, PIP

MINVOL

MV (ext)

SpMV

PEEP

PCO

, PcO

Pmean (ext)

RRaw

Ppeak

Global

Factory Defaults

# Oper.

Mode

MP2 - MP90

MP5T

C M Name Parameters Scale Style

4 Configuration Settings Appendix Unique Monitor Settings

120

Configuring Trend Priorities

Unique Monitor Setting: Main Setup -> Trends -> Trend Priority

Trend Priority Configuration Implications

The monitor stores trend information for up to 32 monitored measurements, depending on the installed

database option and the configuration of the trend database (see "Trend Database" on page 172). If you

are monitoring more measurements than can be trended, the monitor determines which measurements are

trended acording to an internal priority list.

The Trend Priority configuration overrides this internal measurement priority. It allows you to set

your own priority for trended measurements. The Trend Priority shows the trended measurements

in order of their priority - the measurement with the highest priority is at the top of the list. Any additional

measurement that is monitored, but not listed in the Trend Priority menu, is assigned a priority

according to the internal priority list.

Note that the monitor provides a second trend database exclusively reserved for aperiodic parameters.

Aperiodic parameters are parameters that are measured intermittently, such as NBP, C.O., C.I., PAWP

(Wedge), manually entered measurements, or lab results from external devices obtained from the VueLink

interface. Aperiodic parameters do not count towards the max. number of trended parameters allowed by

the trend database configuration and therefore do not have to be considered when configuring the

Trend Priority.

To add measurements to the priority list,

♦ select the pop-up key Add and choose from the pop-up list of available measurements.

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP2 - MP90 (H10/20/40)

MP5T

MP5 - MP90 (H30)

C M

Priority x x HR HR

PVC PVC

SpO

lSpO

SpO

rSpO

Any Press Any Press

CPP CPP

CCO CCO

CCI CCI

awRR awRR

RR RR

Any Agent

BIS

EMG

SQI

Unique Monitor Settings 4 Configuration Settings Appendix

121

To delete measurements,

♦ select the measurement that should be deleted, and select the pop-up key Delete.

To change the priority order,

♦ use the Sort Up and Sort Down pop-up keys.

Configuring Trend Scales / Trend Units

Unique Monitor Setting: Main Setup -> Trends -> Parameter Scales

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

Unit MP2 - MP90

MP5T

C M Profile Adult Profile Pedi Profile Neo

HR x x bpm 30...180 30...210

PVC x x /min 0...20

Any ST x x mm -2.5...+2.5

STindx x x mm 0.0...5.0

QTc x x msec 350..450

375..425

ΔQTc x x msec -40..40

-20..20

QT x x msec 300..500

QT-HR x x bpm 50..130

60..140 80..160

Any Pulse x x bpm 30...180 30...210

SpO

, SpO

l, SpO

r x x % 80...100

ΔSpO

x x % 0...50

Perf, Perf l, Perf r x x 0.0...10.0 0.0...5.0

NBP x x mmHg 30...200 20...150 10...100

x x kPa 4.0...28.0 2.0...20.0 1.0...14.0

P, P1, P2, P3, P4, ABP,

ART, Ao, UAP, BAP,

FAP

x x mmHg 0...200 0...150 0...100

x x kPa 0.0...28.0 0.0...20.0 0.0...14.0

PAP x x mmHg 0...60 0...40 0...30

x x kPa 0.0...8.0 0.0...6.0 0.0...4.0

C V P, R A P, L A P, U V P x x m m H g 0 . . . 3 0

x x kPa 0.0...4.0

ICP, IC1, IC2 x x mmHg 0...60

x x kPa 0.0...8.0

PAWP x x mmHg 0...30

x x kPa 0.0...4.0

CPP x x mmHg 0...100

x x kPa 0.0...14.0

PPV x x % 0...20

CO,CCO x x l/min 0.0...12.0 0.0...6.0 0.0...3.0

4 Configuration Settings Appendix Unique Monitor Settings

122

CI, CCI x x l/min/m2 0.0...6.0

SV x x ml 1...200

SI x x ml/m2 1...100

SVV x x % 0...20

dPmax x x 200...2000

ITBV x x ml 500...3000

ITBVI x x ml/m2 500...1300

EVLW x x ml 0...2500

EVLWI x x ml/kg 0.0...20.0

GEDV x x ml 400...2400

GEDVI x x ml/m2 400...1000

CFI x x 1.0...15.0

PVPI x x 0.0...5.0

GEF x x % 10...40

SvO

xx% 40...80

LI x x 0...59

Sp-vO

x x % -40...40

tcpO

x x kPa 4.0...20.0

x x mmHg 30...150

tcpCO

x x kPa 1.0...11.0

x x mmHg 10...80

x x kPa 0.0...8.0 0.0...11.0

x x mmhg 0...60 0...80

awRR x x rpm 0...60 0...110

x x % 0...100

x x mmHg 0...800

x x kPa 0...100

FiO

x x 0.00...1.00

x x % 0...100

RR x x rpm 0...60 0...110

PIP x x mmHg 0...60

TV x x ml 0...1000 0...500 0...100

MINVOL x x liter 0.0...10.0 0.0...6.0 0.0...3.0

SpMV x x liter 0.0...10.0 0.0...6.0 0.0...3.0

PEEP x x mmHg 0...15

BIS x x 0...100

SQI x x % 0...100

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

Unit MP2 - MP90

MP5T

C M Profile Adult Profile Pedi Profile Neo

Unique Monitor Settings 4 Configuration Settings Appendix

123

EMG x x dB 0...60

TP x x dB 40...80

TP1, TP2 x x nW 0.00...1.00

SR x x % 0...100

Bursts x x /min 0...30.0

SEF x x Hz 15.0...30.0

SEF1,SEF2 x x Hz 0.0...30.0

MDF1, MDF2 x x Hz 0.0...30.0

PPF1, PPF2 x x Hz 0.0...30.0

Alpha1, Alpha2 x x % 0.0...100.0

Beta1, Beta2 x x % 0.0...100.0

Delta1, Delta2 x x % 0.0...100.0

Theta1,Theta2 x x % 0.0...100.0

Any Temp x x °F 95.0...110.0

x x °C 35.0...43.0

Tblood x x °F 80.0...110.0

x x °C 28.0...43.0

Any DiffTemp x x °F -12.0...12.0

x x °C -6.0...6.0

O x x % 0...100

x x kPa 0...100

x x mmHg 0...800

ISO x x % 0.0...4.0

x x kPa 0.0...4.0

x x mmHg 0...30

SEV x x % 0.0...6.0

x x kPa 0.0...6.0

x x mmHg 0...50

ENF x x % 0.0...6.0

x x kPa 0.0...6.0

x x mmHg 0...50

HAL x x % 0.0...3.0

x x kPa 0.0...3.0

x x mmHg 0...25

DES x x % 0...20

x x kPa 0...20

x x mmHg 0...160

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

Unit MP2 - MP90

MP5T

C M Profile Adult Profile Pedi Profile Neo

4 Configuration Settings Appendix Unique Monitor Settings

124

Trend Scales/Units Configuration Implications

These settings apply to the graphical trends displayed in the GraphTrends window and the screen trends.

They can be overridden for individual parameters displayed in the GraphTrends window by changing the

Scale setting for these parameters from Global to a specific value in the Trend Group Parameter

menu (see “Configuring Trend Groups” on page 117).

Configuring Event Surveillance

MP5-90

only

Unique Monitor Setting: Main Setup -> Event Surveill. -> Setup Events

Levels of Event Surveillance

The appearance of the events windows and menus and the settings you can configure for events depends

on the event surveillance option purchased for the monitor: basic event surveillance (BES), advanced event

surveillance (AES), or neonatal event review (NER). This table lists the differences between the options:

SVR x x DS/cm

400...2400

SVRI x x DSm

/cm

800...4800

pH x x 7.0...7.8

PCO

x x mmHg 25...50 25...60 25...80

x x mmHg 40...160

MV (ext) x x liter 0.0...10.0 0.0...6.0 0.0...3.0

Pmean (ext) x x mmHg 0...30

RRaw x x rpm 0...60 0...110

Ppeak x x mmHg 0...75

PcO

x x mmHg 25...50 25...60 25...80

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

Unit MP2 - MP90

MP5T

C M Profile Adult Profile Pedi Profile Neo

Event Functionality Basic Event

Surveillance (BES)

Option C06

Advanced Event Surveillance

(AES)

Option C07

Neonatal Event Review

(NER)

Option C04

Available for monitor models

MP20 - MP90 MP60 - MP90 MP5 - MP90

Event groups

15 + NER NER

Measurements per group

34 3

Triggers per measurement

12 1

Trigger types

Simple (“at least one”) Combined (“at least two”) Simple (“at least one”)

Annotation

no yes no

Unique Monitor Settings 4 Configuration Settings Appendix

125

Select one of the listed Event Groups to start configuring it. Then either select each item and select the

correct setting, or select Guided Setup to move automatically from each setting to the next.

Types of event episode

Average trend Average trend

High resolution trend

Snapshot events

High Resolution Trend

Event views

Graphic Event Review

window, graphic

Event Episode window

Summary view, graphic and

tabular

Event Review window, graphic

and tabular

Event Episode window

Graphic and tabular

Event Review window,

graphic and tabular

Event Episode window

Database capability

25 events for 24 hours 25 events for 24 hours

25 events for 8 hours

50 events for 8 hours

50 events for 24 hours

25 events for 24 hours

25 events for 8 hours

50 events for 8 hours

50 events for 24 hours

Event Notification

no yes no

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP20 - MP90

C M

Group 1

Group Name x Standard

Activated

1.As a factory default, group 1 is activated in monitors with options H10, H30, or H40. In monitors with option H20, group 1

is deactivated.

xxYes

Notification Type x None

Episode Type x x Average Trend (20min)

Pre/Post Time x x -10/+10 min

Trigger Condition x At Least One Param.

Parameters x HR(Pulse), SpO

, Resp

Param. 1: Trigger Type x x HR(Pulse) All ***/** Alarms

Param. 2: Trigger Type x x SpO

All ***/** Alarms

Param. 3: Trigger Type x x Resp All ***/** Alarms

Param. 4: Trigger Type x x Blank

Event Functionality Basic Event

Surveillance (BES)

Option C06

Advanced Event Surveillance

(AES)

Option C07

Neonatal Event Review

(NER)

Option C04

Available for monitor models

MP20 - MP90 MP60 - MP90 MP5 - MP90

4 Configuration Settings Appendix Unique Monitor Settings

126

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP60 - MP90

C M

Group 2

Group Name x Neuro

Activated x x No

Notification Type x None

Episode Type x x Average Trend (20min)

Pre/Post Time x x -10/+10 min

Trigger Condition x At Least One Param.

Parameters x HR(Pulse), ABP, CPP, BIS

Param. 1: Trigger Type x x HR(Pulse) All ***/** Alarms

Param. 2: Trigger Type x x ABP All **HIGH Alarms

All **LOW Alarms

Param. 3: Trigger Type x x CPP ** Mean LOW

Param. 4: Trigger Type x x BIS

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP60 - MP90

C M

Group 3

Group Name x Hemo

Activated x x No

Notification Type x None

Episode Type x x Average Trend (20min)

Pre/Post Time x x -10/+10 min

Trigger Condition x At Least One Param.

Parameters x HR(Pulse), SpO

, ABP, CVP

Param. 1: Trigger Type x x HR(Pulse) All ***/** Alarms

Param. 2: Trigger Type x x SpO

All ***/** Alarms

Unique Monitor Settings 4 Configuration Settings Appendix

127

Param. 3: Trigger Type x x ABP All **HIGH Alarms

All ** LOW Alarm

Param. 4: Trigger Type x x CVP ***/** All Mean

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP60 - MP90

C M

Group 4

Group Name x Ventil.

Activated x x No

Notification Type x None

Episode Type x x HighResTrend (4min)

Pre/Post Time x x -2/+2 min

Trigger Condition x At Least One Param.

Parameters x HR(Pulse), SpO

, Resp, etCO

Param. 1: Trigger Type x x HR(Pulse) *** EXTR TACHY

*** EXTR BRADY

Param. 2: Trigger Type x x SpO

All ***/** Alarms

Param. 3: Trigger Type x x Resp All ***/** Alarms

Param. 4: Trigger Type x x etCO

All ***/** Alarms

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP60 - MP90

C M

Group 5

Group Name x Arrhy/ST

Activated x x No

Notification Type x None

Episode Type x x RealtimeWaves (15sec)

Pre/Post Time x x -5/+10 sec

Trigger Condition x At Least One Param.

Parameters x HR(Pulse), PVC, All ST Leads

Param. 1: Trigger Type x x HR(Pulse) *** EXTR TACHY

*** EXTR BRADY

4 Configuration Settings Appendix Unique Monitor Settings

128

Event Settings Configuration Implications

Events are electronic records of episodes in the patients' condition. They can be used to drive alert

notification to assist compliance to any protocol that is being used by the clinician.

Group Name You can change the name of each event group, except of the Neonatal Event Review

(NER) group.

Activated This setting defines whether an event group is currently active, that is it detects events

according to its configuration. If the status is Deactivated event surveillance is effectively switched off.

With Advanced Event Surveillance (AES, Option #C07) up to six event groups may be active at any given

time. With Basic Event Surveillance (BES, Option #C06) or with Neonatal Event Review (NER, Option

#C04) only one event group is available.

Param. 2: Trigger Type x x PVC All ***/** Alarms

Param. 3: Trigger Type x x All STLeads ** HIGH

** LOW

Param. 4: Trigger Type x x

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP5 - MP90

C M

Group 6

Group Name NER

Activated

1.As a factory default, group 6 is activated in monitors with option H20. In monitors with option H10, H30, or H40, group 6

is deactivated.

xxYes

Notification Type None

Episode Type x x High Res.Trend (4 min)

Pre/PostTime x x -2/+2 min

Trigger Condition At Least One Param.

Parameters HR, SpO

, Resp

Param. 1: Trigger Type x x HR *** EXTR BRADY

Param. 2: Trigger Type x x SpO

*** DESAT

Param. 3: Trigger Type x x Resp *** APNEA

Param. 4: Trigger Type x x

Unique Monitor Settings 4 Configuration Settings Appendix

129

Notification Type This setting is available in Advanced Event Surveillance only. It defines the

type of notification that is issued when an event is detected. For each event group, the appropriate

notification can be selected depending on the severity of condition.

•Set Notification Type to None to receive no notification at all. Any captured event will still be

stored and can be reviewed in the Event Episode or Event Review window.

•Set it to Screen Prompt to get a status message with a prompt tone.

•Set it to * Alarm, ** Alarm, or *** Alarm to receive an alarm notification that will be

independent from the alarm settings for each measurement. To prevent dual alarming, these options are

only available if Trigger Condition is set to At Least Two Param. or higher. These event

alarms are handled exactly like measurement alarms; they can be silenced and are also suspended when

all alarms are suspended. You should only use alarm notification for events which are comparable in

severity to standard measurement alarms to avoid potential confusion due to too many alarms.

Episode Type This setting lets you define the level of detail captured in an event episode for up to

four measurements. The higher the data resolution, the shorter the period that the monitor can store in its

memory. The choices are:

• Realtime Wave (15sec) - available in AES (#C07) only

• HighRes Trend (4min) - available in AES (#C07) and NER (#C04)

• Average Trend (20min) - available in BES and AES (#C06, #C07)

In addition to the wave or trend data, the following data is always stored with each event:

– Numeric vital signs for all (up to 1030) measurements monitored.

– Any alarm conditions active when the event episode was triggered.

– Annotations connected with the event.

Pre/Post Time When an event occurs, information for a predefined duration is stored. This is the

event episode. It includes information from a defined period before the trigger, called the event

Pre-time. The episode time after the event is called the event Post-time. If a further event occurs

during the event post-time it changes a single event to a combined event (combi-event). Manually-

triggered event episodes document patient information from the time leading up to the event trigger; they

do not have a post-time. The following table lists the available choices for each Event Episode Type:

Event Episode Type Pre-time Post-time

Average Trend

20 minutes, five samples per minute

2 minutes 18 minutes

4 minutes 16 minutes

6 minutes 14 minutes

8 minutes 12 minutes

10 minutes 10 minutes

12 minutes 8 minutes

14 minutes 6 minutes

16 minutes 4 minutes

18 minutes 2 minutes

4 Configuration Settings Appendix Unique Monitor Settings

130

Parameters Up to four measurement parameters (three with BES and NER) can be included in each

event group. For each parameter you can define two trigger conditions (one in BES and NER). If at least

one of these conditions is met this parameter counts towards the number of events that can start an event

capture.

The following categories of trigger conditions are available:

• Patient alarms: this means that an event is triggered when either a specific patient alarm, such as

***EXTREME TACHY, or all patient alarms of a set severity for a certain measurement occur. An

example for this last type of condition would be All *** HR Alarms. No events of this kind are

triggered if alarms are switched off. Changing alarm limits changes the event trigger definitions.

• User-defined limit violations: allow you to define event triggers that are independent of alarm limits.

You must set a threshold value and a threshold time for the trigger. If you set the trigger threshold time

to 10 seconds, the monitor triggers an event if the threshold is violated for more than 10 seconds.

Example: “HR higher than 120 bpm for 10sec (and longer)”

• User-defined value deviations: If you set user-defined deviation triggers, you can define event triggers

that are independent of specific limits and based instead on deviations from the current values. You

must set a deviation and a period of time in which the deviation occurs. There are three types of

deviation available: ANY deviation, UP deviation where only changes in a positive direction are detected

and DOWN deviation where only changes in a negative direction are detected. The deviation can be

defined either in relative terms as a percentage, for example 10%, or as an absolute value, such as 10

bpm. Examples:

–etCO

: UP Deviation of 300% within 5 minutes.

– RESP: ANY Deviation of 8 rpm within 5 minutes.

• On-measurement triggers: this means that an event is triggered when an aperiodic measurement (such

as NBP) or a procedure (such as Cardiac Output) is finished.

Trigger Condition If more than one trigger is available for the measurements in the event group,

the trigger condition may be At Least One Param., At Least Two Param., At Least

Three Par. or All Four Parameter.

• If the trigger is At Least One Param., the monitor starts an event capture if a trigger occurs in

any of this event group’s measurements.

• If the trigger is At Least Three Par., the monitor captures events when three or more trigger

thresholds from this event group’s measurements are violated.

•With Enhanced Condition you can not only select a minimum number of triggers to trigger an

event, but define which specific measurement triggers these must be. For example, At Least Two

Param. will cause an event to be captured if a trigger occurs in any two of this event group’s

measurements - with Enhanced Condition you can select for example that only when triggers are in HR

and SpO2 an event will be captured.

HighRes Trend

Four minutes, four samples per second.

1 minute 3 minutes

2 minutes 2 minutes

3 minutes 1 minute

Realtime Wave

15 seconds at 12.5 mm/s

5 seconds 10 seconds

10 seconds 5 seconds

Event Episode Type Pre-time Post-time

Unique Monitor Settings 4 Configuration Settings Appendix

131

Configuring Event Annotations

MP60-90

only

Unique Monitor Setting: Main Setup -> Event Surveill. -> Setup Events

-> Event Annotation

When you configure additional annotations, you can choose whether they appear with one particular

Event Group or with all Event Groups. No Group indicates that the annotation is not yet linked to

appear with any Event Group.

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP60 - MP90

C M

Annotations (Text / Group) Te x t Group

Annotation 1 x No Intervention All Groups

Annotation 2 x Mild Stimulation All Groups

Annotation 3 x Moderate Stimulation All Groups

Annotation 4 x Vigorous Stimulation All Groups

Annotation 5 x Awake Standard

Annotation 6 x Sleeping Standard

Annotation 7 x Gagging/Emesis Standard

Annotation 8 x Feeding Standard

Annotation 9 x Stressful Procedure Standard

Annotation 10 x Skin Color: Pink NER

Annotation 11 x Skin Color: Dusky NER

Annotation 12 x Skin Color: Cyanotic NER

Annotation 13 x Skin Color: Mottled NER

Annotation 14 x Skin Color: Jaundice NER

Annotation 15 x Annotation 15 No Group

Annotation 16 x Annotation 16 No Group

Annotation 17 x Annotation 17 No Group

Annotation 18 x Annotation 18 No Group

Annotation 19 x Annotation 19 No Group

Annotation 20 x Annotation 20 No Group

4 Configuration Settings Appendix Unique Monitor Settings

132

Configuring ProtocolWatch

MP5-90

only

Unique Monitor Setting: Main Setup -> ProtocolWatch

ProtocolWatch Configuration Implications

ProtocolWatch (PW) is a clinical decision support tool. It allows you to run a clinical protocol which can

monitor developments in the patient’s condition. ProtocolWatch notifies you when certain conditions or

combinations of conditions occur and it documents developments in a log which can be printed. For

detailed information on how to use this application, see the monitor’s instructions for Use.

Protocol Lets you select the protocol for which you want to modify the configuration settings. At this

point (Rel. F.0), only the SSC Sepsis protocol is available. If you select None, no protocol will be

active.

SSC Sepsis is not a setting that can be stored in the configuration. SSC Sepsis lets you activate or

deactivate the SSC Sepsis Protocol. This protocol assists you in recognizing the early signs and symptoms

of sepsis by comparing the state of your patient to the defined criteria and then guides you through the

recommended treatment protocol. This operation is only available when Protocol is set to SSC

Sepsis.

StartUp Time If the SSC Sepsis protocol is active, and the patient category is Adult, and the monitor

detects a valid HR or Pulse for the duration of the configured StartUp Time, the monitor

automatically enters the Severe Sepsis Screening phase. If StartUp Time is set to 0 min, the

screening will start between about 3 minutes after the monitor detects a valid Pulse or HR. This setting is

only available when Protocol is set to SSC Sepsis.

Shift Duration This setting lets you adjust the frequency of ProtocolWatch tasks that should be

conducted once per shift to the units shift duration. Choices are 8 hrs or 12 hrs. This setting is only

available when Protocol is set to SSC Sepsis.

AutoScreenChange Set this to Yes, if you want the monitor to prompt you to change the active

Screen to the Sepsis Screen when entering the Sepsis Resuscitation and Sepsis Management phase. This

setting is only available when Protocol is set to SSC Sepsis.

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP5 - MP90

C M

Protocol

1.This is a normal monitor setting, not a unique monitor setting

x x SSC Sepsis

SSC Sepsis x x not applicable, this is not a setting, see "ProtocolWatch Configuration Implications".

StartUp Time x 0 min

Shift Duration x 8 hours

AutoScreenChange x Yes

Standby Time x 7 days

Drotrecogin Alfa x Yes

LowDose Steroids x Yes

Unique Monitor Settings 4 Configuration Settings Appendix

133

Standby Time After completion of the Sepsis Management phase, a sepsis standby phase begins

which allows time for further patient stabilization and recovery. During this phase Severe Sepsis Screening

is suspended. Standby Time lets you adjust the length of the standby phase between 1 and 7 days.

This setting is only available when Protocol is set to SSC Sepsis.

Drotrecogin Alfa Set this to Yes if you want the recommendation for Drotrecogin Alfa to appear

during the SSC Sepsis Management phase. This setting is only available when Protocol is set to SSC

Sepsis.

LowDose Steroids Set this to Yes if you want the recommendation for Low Dose Steroids to

appear during the SSC Sepsis Management phase. This setting is only available when Protocol is set to

SSC Sepsis.

Configuring Recordings

Unique Monitor Setting: Main Setup -> Recordings

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP20 - MP90

MP5 (H30)

MP20 (M20/M21)

MP5 (H10/20/40)

MP5T

MP2/X2

C M

General

Central Config x x No

ECG Gain x x 10 mm/mV

Delayed Recording

Recording Name x Recordng

Recorder x x Local Central 2-Ch

Channel 1 x x Primary Lead

Channel 2 x x ABP

Channel 3 x x Blank

Channel 4

xxBlank

Overlap x x Off

Speed x x 25 mm/s

Delay Time x 15 sec

Run Time x 20 sec

Alarm Recording

Recorder x x Local Central 2-Ch

Channel 1 x x Primary Lead

Channel 2 x x Alarm Par

Channel 3 x x Blank

Overlap x x Off

Speed x x 25 mm/s

Delay Time x 15 sec

Run Time x 20 sec

4 Configuration Settings Appendix Unique Monitor Settings

134

Realtime A

Recording Name x Recordng

Recorder x x Local Central 2-Ch

Channel 1 x x Primary Lead

Channel 2 x x ABP

Blank ABP

Channel 3 x x Blank

Channel 4

xxBlank

Overlap x x Off

Speed x x 25 mm/s

Run Time x Continuous

Realtime B

Recording Name x Recordng

Recorder x x Local Central 2-Ch

Channel 1 x x Primary Lead

Channel 2 x x ABP

Channel 3 x x Pleth

Channel 4

xxBlank

Overlap x x Channel 2+3 Off

Speed x x 25 mm/s

Run Time x Continuous

Realtime C

Recording Name x Recordng not applicable, MP20/30, MP5, MP5T, and MP2/X2 do not

support Realtime C recordings.

Recorder x x Local

Channel 1 x x Primary Lead

Channel 2 x x ABP

Channel 3 x x Pleth

Channel 4

Overlap x x Channel 1+2+3

Speed x x 25 mm/s

Run Time x Continuous

HiResTrend

Recording Name x Recordng not applicable, the

MP2/X2 does not

support HiRes

Trend recordings.

Recorder x x Local

Channel 1 x x btbHR

Channel 2 x x SpO2

Channel 3 x x Resp

Overlap x x Off

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP20 - MP90

MP5 (H30)

MP20 (M20/M21)

MP5 (H10/20/40)

MP5T

MP2/X2

C M

Unique Monitor Settings 4 Configuration Settings Appendix

135

For information on configuring Vital Signs Recordings, see “Configuring Vital Signs Recording” on

page 93.

Recordings Configuration Implications

ECG Gain This defines how every recorded ECG wave, irrespective of template or recording type, will

appear on the recorder strip. This does not affect the displayed ECG wave, or printed ECG reports. Set

ECG Gain to Auto to use the same scale as the ECG wave on the monitor screen.

Central Config This setting defines for a central recording whether the layout of the recording

(waves, speed, overlap, etc.) is defined by the bedside or the Information Center.

Select No to use the layout defined in the monitor, select Yes to use the layout defined in the Information

Center.

When a telemetry device is paired with a bedside monitor, the ECG waveforms available at the

Information Center are provided by the telemetry device. If the recorder is set to Central, and

Central Config is set to Yes, the waveforms recorded will be the telemetry ECG waveforms, Pleth

from telemetry if available and then any other waveforms from the bedside (except ECG). If the recorder is

set to Central, and Central Config is set to No, the bedside monitor will send the request for the

recording based on its configuration. If none of the waves are available at the Information Center, it will

record the waves based on the layout defined in the Information Center. For example, if the requested

recording is configured to be Primary ECG (bedside ECG) and ABP and there is no ABP waveform

available, the recording will be the paired telemetry ECG waveforms.

Recorder choose which recorder the recording will print to. Choices are Local, Central 2-Ch.,

Central 4-Ch.

If you configure a Local recorder, and no local recorder is available, the monitor will automatically send

the recording to a central recorder, if available.

For alarm recordings the additional choice Printer is available. If you select Printer, all other

settings disappear and the alarm recording will be printed as a realtime report, following the settings

configured for Realtime Reports, see "Configuring Reports" on page 99. You can use this choice if you

need to generate Alarm Recordings on monitors that have no local recorder, such as the MP2 or X2,

especially in circumstances when the monitor has no connection to a central recorder, for example during

transport.

Channel 1 - 4 defines which waveform to record in each channel. Channel 4 will only be

available when the Central 4-Ch recorder has been selected. If the wave assigned to a recording

channel in a particular template is not available when a recording is triggered, the channel is left blank on

the recording strip. The pop-up list of available (currently monitored) waves differs according to the

recording type:

Speed x x 2 cm/min

Delay Time x 6 min

Run Time x Continuous

1.The setting Channel 4 is only available if a four-channel recorder is available and selected.

2.Realtime C recordings are not available on MP2, MP5, and MP20/30 monitors.

3.HiRes Trend recordings are not available on MP2 monitors.

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP20 - MP90

MP5 (H30)

MP20 (M20/M21)

MP5 (H10/20/40)

MP5T

MP2/X2

C M

4 Configuration Settings Appendix Unique Monitor Settings

136

– Realtime, delayed and alarm recordings: the list shows all the currently available waves.

– High-resolution recordings: the list shows all the available high-resolution waves

In addition to the currently available waves, you can choose from several other settings which make an

automatic allocation when the recording starts:

– Alarm Par will always record the measurement in alarm in the chosen recorder channel

– Primary Lead will always record the current primary lead in the chosen recorder channel

– Secondary Lead will always record the current secondary lead in the chosen recorder channel

– Agent will always record the currently selected anesthetic agent.

For high-resolution recordings only the Agent setting is available.

Overlap defines whether the recorded waveforms will be printed overlapping or beside each other.

Speed lets you define the recording print speed.

Delay Time Some recordings start documenting on the recorder strip from a pre-set time before the

recording is started. This interval is called the “Delay Time” and can be set to 10 or 15 seconds for

Delayed and Alarm recordings and to 1 - 6 minutes for HiResTrnd recordings.

Runtime defines how long this type of recording is configured to run. Continuous recordings run

indefinitely.

Configuring Timers

MP5-90

only

Unique Monitor Setting: Main Setup -> Timers -> Setup <Timer Label>

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP5 - MP90

C M

1Label xxTimer A

Run Time x x 1 min

Typ e x Basic

Direction x x Up

Notification x x No Sound

Auto Window x No

Color x White

2Label xxTimer B

Run Time x x 5 min

Typ e x Basic

Direction x x Down

Notification x x No Sound

Auto Window x No

Color x White

3Label xxTimer C

Run Time x x 10 min

Unique Monitor Settings 4 Configuration Settings Appendix

137

Typ e x Ba sic

Direction x x Up

Notification x x No Sound

Auto Window x No

Color x White

4Label xxTimer D

Run Time x x 15 min

Typ e x Ba sic

Direction x x Down

Notification x x No Sound

Auto Window x No

Color x White

5Label xxBypass

Run Time x x 30 min

Typ e x Ba sic

Direction x x Down

Notification x x No Sound

Auto Window x No

Color x White

6 Label x x Clamp

Run Time x x 10 min

Typ e x Ba sic

Direction x x Down

Notification x x No Sound

Auto Window x No

Color x White

7Label xxCode

Run Time x 0

Type x No Limit

Direction x Up

Notification x No Sound

Auto Window x No

Color x White

8Label xxCase

Run Time x 0

Type x No Limit

Direction x Up

Notification x No Sound

Auto Window x No

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP5 - MP90

C M

4 Configuration Settings Appendix Unique Monitor Settings

138

Color x White

9Label xxDocu

Run Time x x 60 min

Typ e x Cyclic

Direction x x Up

Notification x x No Sound

Auto Window x No

Color x White

10 Label x x Tournq (Tourniquet)

Run Time x x 2 hours

Typ e x Basic

Direction x x Down

Notification x x No Sound

Auto Window x No

Color x White

11 Label x x Infus

Run Time x x 30 min

Typ e x Basic

Direction x x Down

Notification x x No Sound

Auto Window x No

Color x White

12 Label x x PreOxy (Preoxygenation)

Run Time x x 5 min

Typ e x Basic

Direction x x Down

Notification x x No Sound

Auto Window x No

Color x White

13 Label x x NST (Non-Stress Test)

Run Time x x 20 min

Typ e x Basic

Direction x x Up

Notification x x Sound

Auto Window x No

Color x Blue

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP5 - MP90

C M

Unique Monitor Settings 4 Configuration Settings Appendix

139

Timer Configuration Implications

Timer Label When you assign a label to a timer, the monitor automatically applies the settings

preconfigured for this label to the timer. You can then change these settings. The timer label itself cannot

be customized.

The IntelliVue MP60/70/80/90 can run a maximum of four timers at the same time (MP40/50: three

timers, MP20/30: two timers, MP5: one timer). The selection and priority of the timers can be configured

in the Timers window. For details, see "Configuring Ask for New Patient Settings" on page 150.

Run Time The run time can be set between 1 minute and 96 hours. No Limit timers have no run

time. This setting can also be changed in monitoring mode.

Type This setting defines the timer type. It can also be changed in monitoring mode. The following

timer types are available:

•A Basic timer has a single, defined run time. The progress is shown in the progress bar.

•An Enhanced timer is like a Basic timer, but the progress bar shows progress beyond the end of the

run time.

•A Cyclic timer is like a Basic timer but restarts automatically when the run time is expired.

•A No Limit timer has no run time or progress bar and shows the time elapsed since the timer was

started.

Direction Timers can count up or down, showing elapsed time or remaining time. No Limit timers

automatically count up. This setting can be also changed in monitoring mode.

Notification When any timer expires (except a No Limit timer), its color changes to red and a

message appears in the monitor status line on the Main Screen. The setting Notification lets you

configure an alarm or a single tone as additional means of notification:

• Select Alarm to receive an INOP alarm when the timer expires.

• Select Sound to hear a single tone when the timer expires.

• Select No Sound for no additional notification.

Auto Window This setting lets you configure whether a window automatically pops up when the timer

expires. Choice are Yes or No.

Color lets you configure the color for a timer. This setting only has an effect on timers that are displayed

on the Main Screen (i.e. timers that are embedded on a Screen). The timers displayed in the Timers

window are always shown in gray color.

Configuring Timer Selection and Order

The selection and order of timers as they appear in the Timers menu are stored as Global settings, see

"Global Settings" on page 144.

4 Configuration Settings Appendix Unique Monitor Settings

140

Configuring User Interface Settings - Keys

Global SmartKeys

Unique Monitor Setting: Main Setup -> User Interface

Global SmartKeys Configuration Implications

Global SmartKeys. This lets you define the selection and sequence of the global SmartKeys.

Global SmartKeys become effective (visible) when you activate a Screen that has no SmartKeys defined on

it.

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP20 - MP90 MP20 (M20/M21)

MP5

MP5T

MP2/X2

C M

Global SmartKeys x Start/Stop (NBP)

Start/Stop (NBP) Start/Stop (NBP)

Stop All (NBP)

Repeat Time (NBP) Measmt. Select.

Repeat Time (NBP)

Delayed Record Admit/Dischrge

Zero Press

Vitals Trend AlarmLimits

RT Record

Default Profile Vitals Trend

Delayed Record

End Case Profiles

Standby

<none> Alarm Volume

Wedge

<none> QRS Volume

C.O. / CCO

<none> Monitor Standby

Calcs

<none> Stop All (NBP)

VeniPuncture

<none> NBP STAT

Adjust Size

<none> VeniPuncture (NBP)

Annot. Arrhy

<none> Repeat Time (NBP)

RelearnArrhy

<none> Zero Press

Vitals Trend

<none> Adjust Size

Graph Trend

<none> Brightness

Event Summary

<none> Graph Trend

Remote Applics

<none> Main Setup

VueLink

PrintReports

End Case

AlarmLimits

Alarm Volume

QRS Volume

Brightness

Unique Monitor Settings 4 Configuration Settings Appendix

141

The number of SmartKeys visible at a time depends on the monitor’s display resolution and the resolution

of the Screen:

SVGA: 6

XGA: 7

SXGA: 9

WXGA: 9

WXGA+: 9

WSXGA: 9

Changing the Selection and Sequence of Global SmartKeys

To change the selection of the Global SmartKeys,

1 Select Main Setup -> User Interface -> Global SmartKeys.

2 From the pop-up key line, select Add to open the Choices menu that contains all available

SmartKeys.

3 From the Choices menu, select the desired SmartKey. This adds the new key to the bottom of the

list of configured SmartKeys (on the left).

To delete a SmartKey from the list of configured SmartKeys,

♦ select it in the list, then select the pop-up key Delete.

To move a SmartKey to a different position,

♦ use the Sort Up and Sort Down pop-up keys.

Function Keys

MP20-90

only

Unique Monitor Setting: Main Setup -> User Interface

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP20 - MP90

C M

Oper. 1 Fn. Keys x F1 <none>

F2 <none>

F3 <none>

F4 <none>

F5 <none>

F6 <none>

F7 <none>

F8 <none>

F9 <none>

F10 <none>

F11 <none>

F12 <none>

4 Configuration Settings Appendix Unique Monitor Settings

142

Function Key Configuration Implications

Be aware that after upgrading a monitor from any software revision prior to E.0, no functions will be

assigned to the function keys.

Oper. 1 Fn. Keys. This setting lets you assign specific SmartKey functions to the 5 function keys

(F1 - F5) on a connected Remote SpeedPoint and the 12 function keys (F1 - F12) on an attached PS/2

keyboard.

Oper. 2 Fn Keys. This setting is only available for MP90 monitors with more than one CPU

board. If you have configured the MP90 for two operators, this setting lets you assign specific SmartKey

functions to the 5 function keys (F1 - F5) on the Remote SpeedPoint assigned to Operator 2, and the 12

function keys (F1 - F12) on a PS/2 keyboard assigned to Operator 2.

Configuring CSA Buffers

MP40-90

only

Unique Monitor Setting: Main Setup -> Measurements -> EEG

Oper. 2 Fn. Keys

x F1 <none>

F2 <none>

F3 <none>

F4 <none>

F5 <none>

F6 <none>

F7 <none>

F8 <none>

F9 <none>

F10 <none>

F11 <none>

F12 <none>

1.available on MP90s with more than one CPU only

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP20 - MP90

C M

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP40 - MP90

C M

Buffer A x 2 sec

Buffer B x 30 sec

Buffer C x 120 sec

Unique Monitor Settings 4 Configuration Settings Appendix

143

CSA Buffer Configuration Implications

These CSA buffer settings apply for CSAs viewed on screen and for CSA reports.

Buffer A / Buffer B / Buffer C A buffer defines the interval between the spectral lines

displayed in the CSA. The smaller the interval, the more often the CSA is updated, and the shorter the

time span covered by the CSA display. Buffer A, Buffer B, and Buffer C give you three

preconfigured choices which are then available for configuration of the CSA window and CSA reports.

Configuring the Drug Calculator

Unique Monitor Setting

Configuration of the drug calculator cannot be done in the monitor’s configuration mode, it can only be

done with the Support Tool. When the Drug Calculator is delivered from the factory, the only drug in the

Drug Calculator drug list is the generic drug “Any Drug”.

Philips does not accept responsibility for any drug configuration created using the Support Tool. Before

the drug list is used on a patient monitor, a signed copy of it must be approved by a hospital representative.

Up to 75 drugs (including the generic drug ANY DRUG) can be configured for all three patient categories.

Configuration includes

• Amount and Volume

•Dose

•Rate

•Units

• Minimum/maximum ranges and start values

• Titration Table settings, such as Dose and Rate increments

• Whether the Rule of 6 may be used weight-based drugs in the neonatal and pediatric patient category.

WARNING When you clone a configuration to a monitor, the associated drug list is automatically cloned with the

configuration. Therefore, before cloning a configuration to a monitor, you must always check

• whether there is a drug list in the configuration

• whether this configuration is correct for the hospital unit you are working in

• that you have a Drug Calculator Offline Configuration Report on file, signed by a hospital

representative, with the same CRC number as the drug list in the configuration.

For detailed information on configuring the drug calculator, see the chapter “Using the Drug Calculator

Configuration Editor” in the Support Tool Instructions for Use.

4 Configuration Settings Appendix Global Settings

144

Global Settings

This section lists all global settings. Just like unique monitor settings (see "Understanding Monitor

Settings" on page 83), global settings are set once per monitor and are independent of the Profiles and

Settings Blocks. The difference is that any changes you may configure are automatically stored, there is no

need to save them.

Read any information on Configuration Implications at the end of the sections before you make any

configuration changes.

Configuring General Global Settings

Global Setting: Main Setup -> Global Settings

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP20 - MP90

(H10/20/40)

MP20 - MP90

(H30)

MP5

(H30)

MP5

(H10/20/40)

MP5T MP2 / X2

C M

Default Profile x The factory default Profile depends on the monitor model and H option. See the section

Configuration Overview starting on page 180.

Altitude (m) x 0

Line Frequency

x60Hz

QRS Type x QRS Tone

ECG Cable Color

xAAMI

Asystole Detect. x Standard

Pat. Sel. Default x Cont Monitor

Ask User not applicable, settings are not available for MP2/

X2 and MP5.

MMS Sett. Upload x No

Yes

MMS Trend Upload x No

Yes

MMS PW Sync x No

Yes

AskUser Reminder x Off

QuickAdmit Field x MRN

QuickAdmitDischg x Ask User

Height Unit

xin

Weight Unit

xlb kg kg lb

Automat. Default x Yes

Ask For New Pat x See "Configuring Ask for New Patient Settings" on page 150

Tele Discharge

x not applicable, this setting is only

available on MP5 / MP5T

Off OnDisc

onnect

not

applicable

TransportProfile x not applicable, this setting is not

available for MP20-90

As Is

Remote Controls x Enabled

Silence Key x Checkmark (MP60-90 only)

Global Settings 4 Configuration Settings Appendix

145

General Global Settings Configuration Implications

Default Profile To set the default Profile, select Profiles in the Monitor Info Line, select Profile in

the Profiles window, then select the Profile you want to set as default Profile from the pop-up list. Select

the Set Default softkey. This change takes effect immediately and you do not need to save it. Use the

table in the section "Profile Settings" on page 28 to document the default Profile.

Altitude Some measurements use the configured altitude setting to derive a typical ambient pressure

which is used in the calculation of partial pressure values. To ensure correct measurement values, the

altitude setting must be correctly set.

Line Frequency Use the Line Frequency setting to configure the correct line frequency for the

AC Power, either 50 Hz or 60 Hz. If the Line Frequency is incorrectly set, this may affect the ECG signal

quality.

QRS Type Select QRS Tone or QRS Tick. If Tone Modulation is set to Yes, the QRS Type

automatically switches to QRS Tone. For both types, the frequency and rhythm information is derived

from either the ECG or Pulse, depending on which is currently selected as the alarm source.

ECG Cable Color This setting determines the labels the monitor uses when it refers to individual

ECG electrodes, such as in a LEAD Off INOP message that will be issued when an individual ECG

electrode has fallen off. If ECG Cable Color is set to AAMI, the monitor uses the labels RA, LA, LL,

RL, V, and V1 through V6. If set to IEC, it uses RA, LA, LL, RL, and C1 through C6.

Asystole Detect. Set Asystole Detect. to Enhanced to improve alarming on asystole

under certain conditions. In enhanced mode, an asystole alarm will be suppressed for up to nine seconds (=

Asystole Threshold + 5 sec.) if a valid beat-to-beat Pulse is detected from an active pulsatile invasive

Pressure measurement.

Pat.Sel.Default This setting defines how the monitor behaves when there is a patient

identification mismatch between the MMS and the monitor. If you set this to Cont Monitor or

Continue MMS, the monitor resolves the mismatch automatically. To require user confirmation before

the mismatch is resolved, set this to Ask User. For more detail, please refer to the monitor’s Instructions

for Use.

Arrhy Text x * Alarm

Power Loss Sound x not applicable, setting is not available for

MP2-90

Enabled

not

applicable

Label Set x Restricted

LAN Data Export All

1.For new monitors shipped from the factory, the defaults for these settings are set for the country to which the monitor is shipped,

see "Configuring Country-Specific Settings" on page 154.

2.Setting only visible if the monitor has a telemetry device (TAAP) connector.

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP20 - MP90

(H10/20/40)

MP20 - MP90

(H30)

MP5

(H30)

MP5

(H10/20/40)

MP5T MP2 / X2

C M

4 Configuration Settings Appendix Global Settings

146

AskUser Reminder This setting lets you specify a time after which the clinician will be reminded of

an unresolved patient identification mismatch. If the user ignores a patient identification mismatch by

closing the Patient Selection window, the monitor will automatically pop up the Patient Selection window

on the Main Screen after the configured time (5min, 10min, 15min, or 30min). To disable this

behavior, set AskUser Reminder to Off.

MMS Sett.Upload If set to Yes, the active settings from the MMS measurements will be uploaded

to the monitor when you connect an MMS to a monitor and one of the following conditions applies:

• the patient in the MMS and the patient in the monitor are the same, i.e. no patient identification

mismatch occurs.

• the patient in the MMS and the patient in the monitor are different, and Pat.Sel.Default is

configured to Continue MMS.

• the patient in the MMS and the patient in the monitor are different, and Pat.Sel.Default is

configured to Ask User, and the clinician resolves the patient identification mismatch by selecting

Same Patient or Cont MMS.

Note: if Pat.Sel.Default is set to Cont Monitor, MMS Sett.Upload is automatically set

to No and cannot be changed.

MMS Trend Upload If set to Yes, the trend data from the MMS measurements will be uploaded to

the monitor when you connect an MMS to a monitor and one of the following conditions applies:

• the patient in the MMS and the patient in the monitor are the same, i.e. no patient identification

mismatch occurs.

• the patient in the MMS and the patient in the monitor are different, and Pat.Sel.Default is

configured to Continue MMS.

• the patient in the MMS and the patient in the monitor are different, and Pat.Sel.Default is

configured to Ask User, and the clinician resolves the patient identification mismatch by selecting

Same Patient or Cont MMS.

Note: iff Pat.Sel.Default is set to Cont Monitor, MMS Trend Upload is automatically set

to No and cannot be changed.

MMS PW Sync If set to Yes, the ProtocolWatch information stored in the MMS will be uploaded to

the monitor when you connect an MMS to a monitor and one of the following conditions applies:

• the patient in the MMS and the patient in the monitor are the same, i.e. no patient identification

mismatch occurs.

• the patient in the MMS and the patient in the monitor are different, and Pat.Sel.Default is

configured to

Continue MMS.

• the patient in the MMS and the patient in the monitor are different, and Pat.Sel.Default is

configured to Ask User, and the clinician resolves the patient identification mismatch by selecting

Same Patient or Cont MMS.

Note: if Pat.Sel.Default is set to Cont Monitor, MMS PW Sync is automatically set to No

and cannot be changed.

Global Settings 4 Configuration Settings Appendix

147

QuickAdmit Field This setting defines which data field is used when performing a Quick Admit

procedure. Choices are MRN and Last Name. If you are using a barcode reader to enter the Quick

Admit data, make sure that the setting made here corresponds to the information provided by the barcode.

If Quick Admit Field is set to MRN, and the monitor is connected to an Information Center, the

monitor enters “---” into the Last Name field to enable admission at the Information Center.

QuickAdmitDischg When a Quick Admit is initiated, the monitor compares the information

entered into the Quick Admit Field (see above) with the information that is currently stored for that field.

If the information is different, the monitor optionally discharges the previous patient, depending on how

the QuickAdmitDischg setting is configured:

–If set to Ask User, the monitor asks the user whether they want to discharge the previous patient.

–If set to Yes, the monitor automatically discharges the previous patient.

–If set to No, the monitor overwrites the data in the Quick Admit Field with the new data, but does

not discharge the patient.

Tele Discharge This setting is only available in MP5 monitors with a telemetry device (TAAP)

connector, including MP5T monitors. It determines the automatic discharge behavior of the monitor only

when it is used in Telemon mode. Telemon mode means that the monitor:

– has no connection to a host monitor (companion mode),

– has no connection to an Information Center, and

– a telemetry transceiver is directly connected (taaped) to the monitor.

The available configuration choices are:

• OnDisconnect The monitor automatically discharges the patient from the monitor when the

telemetry transceiver is disconnected from the monitor.

Be aware that if you then measure NBP or Pred. Temp with the monitor before you connect a new

transceiver, only the measurement readings with the latest timestamp will be uploaded to the

Information Center when you connect the new transceiver.

• OnDevChange The monitor automatically discharges the patient from the monitor when a different

transceiver is connected. The transceivers are distinguished by their telemetry labels.

With Tele Discharge configured to OnDevChange, be aware of the following: if you want to

measure NBP or Pred. Temp for a patient and want to upload this data via the transceiver to the

Information Center, always connect the transceiver to the monitor before you make the measurements,

otherwise the measurement data will be erased by the discharge when you connect the new transceiver.

• Off This setting is not recommended if you want to use the monitor for spot-checking in Telemon

mode. With Tele Discharge set to Off, the monitor does not perform an automatic discharge.

If you disconnect a transceiver and then measure NBP or Pred. Temp with the monitor, the latest

measurement readings will be uploaded to the Information Center when you connect a new transceiver.

Height Unit/ Weight Unit define the unit used when entering the height / weight of the patient.

Choices are in or cm

for height and lb or kg for weight. Be aware that these settings can be overwritten

by the Region settings applied during an Upgrade or Cloning procedure with the IntelliVue Support Tool.

Automat. Default

–If Automat. Default is set to Yes, and the monitor is switched off for more than one minute,

the default Profile is reloaded in the monitor. Any unstored changes made to the Settings Blocks and

Profiles are lost.

4 Configuration Settings Appendix Global Settings

148

–If Automat. Default is set to No, and the monitor is switched off for more than one minute,

the active settings from the most recent session are retained. Automatic Default does not affect the

monitor behavior when you discharge a patient. After discharge, the default Profile is always restored.

If the monitor is switched off and then on again in less than one minute, all active settings are retained,

irrespective of the Automat. Default setting.

TransportProfile (MP5, X2 only) This setting is only available on monitors that can be connected

to a host monitor and work in companion mode. It defines which settings become active in the monitor

when the monitor is disconnected from the host monitor, for example to be used in a transport

situation.

– If set to As Is, the active settings from the host monitor are used, no user interaction is required.

– If set to Def. Profile, settings are reset to the default profile defined in the monitor. The user

needs to confirm this action.

– If set to Ask User, the monitor will prompt the user to select a profile from the list of configured

profiles.

Remote Controls Some functions of the IntelliVue bedside monitor, such as silencing alarms,

Starting/Stopping NBP measurements, arrhythmia settings, and HR alarm limits can be remotely

controlled from an Information Center. For a complete list of functions that can be remotely controlled,

please refer to your Information Center Instructions for Use. Set Remote Controls to Disabled if

you do not want to allow users to control these functions from the Information Center.

For remote controls to work, they must be Enabled at the monitor and at the Information Center. If

you disable them at the bedside monitor, the user at the Information Center may not be notified of this

change. The controls at the Information Center may appear to work, but they will not change anything at

the monitor.

Silence Key This setting is applicable for the MP60/MP70 and MP90 only. It lets you change the

symbol shown on the Silence SmartKey. The Silence hardkey on early versions of the IntelliVue patient

monitor and on the Remote SpeedPoint is labelled with a loudspeaker. If your equipment is labelled with

the loudspeaker, you might want to set this to “Loudspeaker”.

Arrhy Text This setting defines whether short arrhythmia alarm messages are displayed as one star (*)

or two star (**) alarms. If you are using an IntelliVue Information Center you might want to set this to one

star (*) for consistency.

Power Loss Sound (MP5 only) Lets you defines whether the power loss sound in the MP5 is

Enabled or Disabled. If Enabled, a sound will be generated whenever the main power is lost or

the power cord is disconnected while the monitor is running.

Label Set The Full label set provides extra labels for Pressure and Temp.

•The Restricted label set offers the following labels:

– Pressure: P, ABP, ART, Ao, PAP, CVP, RAP, LAP, ICP, UAP, UVP

– Temp: Temp, Trect, Tcore, Tskin, Tesoph, Tnaso, Tart, Tven

•The Full label set offers the following additional labels:

– Pressure: FAP, BAP, IC1, IC2, P1, P2, P3, P4

– Temp: Tvesic, Ttymp, Tcereb, Tamb, T1, T2, T3, T4

Global Settings 4 Configuration Settings Appendix

149

Note: If you connect an MMS or FMS from a monitor using the Full label set to an IntelliVue monitor

using a Restricted label set or an M3/M4 monitor, any additional labels switch to labels available in

the target monitor. This may cause a label conflict with other monitored measurements. If you connect a

monitor using the Full label set to an Information Center with certain software revisions, this may affect

the availability of measurement information from the additional labels on the Information Center. See the

Information Center documentation for information on label set compatibility.

LAN Data Export If the network (LAN) interface is not used for a connection to an Information

Center, it can be used for MIB data export. If the monitor is connected to an Information Center, the

MIB data export is automatically disabled for the LAN interface (the serial interface can still be used).

The setting LAN Data Export lets you configure how much of the MIB data export information is

sent via the LAN interface:

• All: full functionality, all available MIB data export information is sent.

• Anonymous: restricted functionality, no patient demographics information is included.

• Off: MIB data export is disabled for the LAN interface.

Configuring Timer Selection and Order

Global Setting: Main Setup -> Timers

The selection and order of timers as they appear in the Timers menu are stored as Global settings.

Timer Selection and Order Configuration Implications

The maximum number of timers that can be simultaneously displayed on the IntelliVue monitor depends

on your monitor model. The IntelliVue MP60/70/80/90 can run a maximum of four timers, the MP40/

50 can run three timers, the MP20/30 two timers, the MP5 one timer. The MP2/X2 does not provide a

timer function.

The selection and order of timers is important when you change a numeric on the Main Screen into a

timer:

•The selection determines which timer labels are actually available to choose from.

•The order determines which timer label is used when you change a numeric into an Any Timer. The

monitor automatically uses the label that is located highest in the Timers window, provided that is not

displayed on the Main Screen yet.

To change the selection and order of timers in the Timers menu,

1 Select Main Setup -> Timers to open the Timers menu.

2 Select the timer label that you want to change.

3 From the pop-up key line, select Setup <Timer X> to open the Setup menu for this timer label.

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP60/70

MP80

MP90

MP40/50 MP20/30 MP5

MP5T

MP2

C M

<Timer 1> x Timer A not applicable

<Timer 2> x Timer B not applicable

<Timer 3> x Timer C not applicable

<Timer 4> x Timer D not applicable

4 Configuration Settings Appendix Global Settings

150

4 Select Label and change it to a different label. Notice that the monitor automatically applies the

settings preconfigured for this label to the timer.

Configuring Ask for New Patient Settings

Global Setting: Main Setup -> Global Settings -> Ask For New Pat

Ask for New Patient Configuration Implications

Power Off can be configured to a specific time (1min, 10min, 30min, 1h, 3h, or 8h) or to

Never. If the monitor is switched on, after being switched off for longer than the specified time, it will

ask the user whether a new patient is now being monitored. The user can then select Yes to discharge the

current patient and to begin monitoring a new patient or No to continue monitoring with the current

patient data and settings.

Standby can be configured to a specific time (1min, 10min, 30min, 1h, 3h, or 8h) or to Never. If

monitoring is resumed, after the monitor was in Standby for longer than the specified time, it will ask the

user whether a new patient is now being monitored. The user can then select Yes to discharge the current

patient and to begin monitoring a new patient or No to continue monitoring with the current patient data

and settings.

No Basic Vitals can be configured to a specific time (1min, 10min, 30min, 1h, 3h, or 8h) or

to Never. If no basic vitals (HR, RR, Pulse, SpO

, NBP) have been measured for the specified time, the

monitor will ask the user whether a new patient is now being monitored. The user can then select Yes to

discharge the current patient and to begin monitoring a new patient or No to continue monitoring with

the current patient data and settings.

Ask Paced Mode can be configured to Yes or No. If you set it to Yes and the clinician selects Yes

when asked whether this is a new patient, the monitor will prompt the clinician to enter the patients paced

mode.

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP2 - MP90

MP5T

C M

Power Off x Never

Standby x Never

No Basic Vitals x Never

Ask Paced Mode x No

Global Settings 4 Configuration Settings Appendix

151

Configuring Manual Data Entry

MP5-90

only

Global Setting: Main Setup -> Enter MeasValues -> Setup Meas.

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP5 - MP90

C M

Labels for General Use

Label x Tskin

Unit x

Color x Green

Interval x 4h

Msmnt x x Off

Format not applicable, temperature labels don’t have different formats

Label x Trect

Unit x

Color x Green

Interval x 4h

Msmnt x x Off

Format not applicable, temperature labels don’t have different formats

Label x CVP

Unit x mmHg

Color x Red

Interval x 1 h

Msmnt x x Off

Format x x Mean

Labels reserved for ProtocolWatch

Label

Unit

Color x Green

Interval

x4 h

Msmnt x x Off

Format

not applicable, temperature labels don’t have different formats

Label

SpRR

Unit

rpm

Color x Green

Interval

x2 h

Msmnt x x Off

Format

not applicable, this label does not have different formats

Label

Lact

Unit

mmol/l

4 Configuration Settings Appendix Global Settings

152

Manual Data Entry Configuration Implications

You can manually enter measurement values into the monitor that have been measured with other

equipment or manually, for example, manual temperatures, or lab values. The monitor is shipped with a

number of measurements preconfigured for manual entry (see table above).

Color x Green

Interval

x2 h

Msmnt x x Off

Format

x x not applicable, this label does not have different formats

Label

ScvO

Unit

Color x Green

Interval

x1 h

Msmnt x x Off

Format

x x not applicable, this label does not have different formats

Label

SvO

Unit

Color x Green

Interval

x1 h

Msmnt x x Off

Format

not applicable, this label does not have different formats

Label

Glu

Unit

mmol/l

Color x Green

Interval

x4 h

Msmnt x x Off

Format

not applicable, this label does not have different formats

Label

CVP

Unit

mmHg

Color x Red

Interval

x1 h

Msmnt x x Off

Format

Sys&Dia&Mean

1.For ProtocolWatch labels, Label, Unit, and Format cannot be modified.

2.For ProtocolWatch labels, the choices for Interval are restricted to the times used in the ProtocolWatch application.

3.The label CVP is not visible in the ProtocolWatch section, if it is also configured as a general label.

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP5 - MP90

C M

Global Settings 4 Configuration Settings Appendix

153

A maximum of 20 measurements can be configured, 13 for general purposes, the remaining seven are

reserved for the ProtocolWatch application. These will only be shown in the Enter Measurement Values

menu if the ProtocolWatch option is installed on the monitor and the ProtocolWatch application is active.

If you add a measurement to the general section with the same label as a measurement reserved for the

ProtocolWatch application, the label will disappear from the ProtocolWatch section. This has no negative

effect on the ProtocolWatch application. For details on configuring the ProtocolWatch application, see the

section "Configuring ProtocolWatch" on page 132.

To add more measurements for manual entry,

1 In configuration mode, select Main Setup -> Enter MeasValues to open the

Enter Measurement Values window. The measurements that are currently configured for manual data

entry are displayed.

2 Select the pop-up key Setup Meas. to open the Setup Measurement Values window, then select

the pop-up key Add.

3 In the Setup Measurement submenu, select Label and choose the required measurement label from

the pop-up list.

4 Select the Unit and Color that should be used for the chosen label.

5 Select Interval to define the time after which a manually entered value becomes invalid (no value

is then displayed). Values can be entered up to two hours after they have been measured or up to the

measurement interval, if this is shorter.

6 Select Msmnt to define whether the selected measurement will be On or Off. The On/Off state can

be changed by the user in Monitoring mode.

7 If available, select Format to define an input format. For pressures, for example you can configure

whether the user should enter all pressure values (Sys&Dia&Mean) or only the Mean pressure. The

Format can be changed by the user in Monitoring mode.

4 Configuration Settings Appendix Global Settings

154

Configuring Country-Specific Settings

Global Setting: Main Setup -> Global Settings

Some settings are made in the factory to match the typical requirements in a specific country. Line

frequency, units for weight and height, and ECG cable colors (AAMI or IEC) have been set to appropriate

values. If you suspect that these settings may not match your institution’s requirements, check the settings

and change them if necessary.

The settings are listed here for all countries alphabetically.

Factory Defaults - By Country

Country All Monitor Models

Line Frequency Weight

Unit

Height

Unit

ECG Cable Color

Afghanistan 50 kg cm AAMI

Åland Islands 50 kg cm IEC

Albania 50 kg cm IEC

Algeria 50 kg cm IEC

American Samoa 60 lb in AAMI

Andorra 60 lb in AAMI

Angola 50 kg cm IEC

Anguilla 60 lb in AAMI

Antarctica 60 lb in AAMI

Antigua and Barbuda 50 kg cm AAMI

Argentina 50 kg cm AAMI

Armenia 50 kg cm IEC

Aruba 60 kg cm AAMI

Australia 50 kg cm AAMI

Austria 50 kg cm IEC

Azerbaijan 50 kg cm IEC

Bahamas, The 60 kg cm AAMI

Bahrain 50 kg cm AAMI

Bangladesh 60 lb in AAMI

Barbados 50 kg cm AAMI

Belarus 50 kg cm IEC

Belgium 50 kg cm IEC

Belize 60 lb in AAMI

Benin 60 lb in AAMI

Bermuda 60 kg cm AAMI

Bhutan 60 lb in AAMI

Bolivia 50 kg cm AAMI

Bosnia and Herzegovina 50 kg cm IEC

Global Settings 4 Configuration Settings Appendix

155

Botswana 50 kg cm IEC

Bouvet Island 60 lb in AAMI

Brazil 60 kg cm AAMI

British Indian Ocean Territory 60 lb in AAMI

Brunei Darussalam 50 kg cm AAMI

Brunei 50 kg cm IEC

Bulgaria 50 kg cm IEC

Burkina Faso 50 kg cm IEC

Burundi 50 kg cm IEC

Cambodia 50 kg cm IEC

Cameroon 50 kg cm IEC

Canada 60 kg cm AAMI

Cape Verde 60 lb in AAMI

Cayman Islands 60 kg cm AAMI

Central African Republic 50 kg cm IEC

Chad 60 lb in AAMI

Chile 50 kg cm AAMI

China 50 kg cm IEC

Christmas Islands 60 lb in AAMI

Cocos Keeling Islands 60 lb in AAMI

Colombia 60 kg cm AAMI

Comoros 60 lb in AAMI

Congo 50 kg cm IEC

Congo, Democratic Republic of the 50 kg cm IEC

Cook Islands 60 lb in AAMI

Costa Rica 60 kg cm AAMI

Côte d'Ivoire 50 kg cm IEC

Croatia 50 kg cm IEC

Cuba 60 kg cm IEC

Cyprus 50 kg cm IEC

Czech Republic 50 kg cm IEC

Denmark 60 lb in AAMI

Djibouti 50 kg cm IEC

Dominica 50 kg cm AAMI

Dominican Republic 60 kg cm AAMI

Ecuador 60 kg cm AAMI

Egypt 50 kg cm IEC

El Salvador 60 kg cm AAMI

Equatorial Guinea 50 kg cm IEC

Eritrea 50 kg cm IEC

4 Configuration Settings Appendix Global Settings

156

Estonia 50 kg cm IEC

Ethiopia 50 kg cm IEC

Falkland Islands, Malvinas 60 lb in AAMI

Faroe Islands 60 lb in AAMI

Fiji 60 lb in AAMI

Finland 50 kg cm IEC

France 50 kg cm IEC

French Guiana 50 kg cm IEC

French Polynesia 60 lb in AAMI

French Southern Territories 60 lb in AAMI

Gabon 50 kg cm IEC

Gambia, The 50 kg cm IEC

Georgia 60 lb in AAMI

Germany 50 kg cm IEC

Ghana 50 kg cm IEC

Gibraltar 60 lb in AAMI

Greece 50 kg cm IEC

Greenland 60 lb in AAMI

Grenada 50 kg cm AAMI

Guadeloupe 50 kg cm IEC

Guam 60 lb in AAMI

Guatemala 60 kg cm AAMI

Guernsey 50 kg cm IEC

Guinea 60 lb in AAMI

Guinea-Bissau 60 lb in AAMI

Guyana 60 kg cm AAMI

Haiti 60 kg cm AAMI

Heard Island and McDonald Islands 60 lb in AAMI

Holy See, Vatican City State 60 lb in AAMI

Honduras 60 kg cm AAMI

Hong Kong 50 kg cm IEC

Hungary 50 kg cm IEC

Iceland 50 kg cm IEC

India 50 kg cm IEC

Indonesia 50 kg cm IEC

Iran, Islamic Republic of 50 kg cm AAMI

Iraq 50 kg cm AAMI

Ireland 50 kg cm IEC

Isle of Man 50 kg cm IEC

Israel 50 kg cm IEC

Global Settings 4 Configuration Settings Appendix

157

Italy 50 kg cm IEC

Jamaica 50 kg cm AAMI

Japan 60 kg cm IEC

Jersey 50 kg cm IEC

Jordan 50 kg cm AAMI

Kazakhstan 50 kg cm IEC

Kenya 50 kg cm IEC

Kiribati 60 lb in AAMI

Korea, Democratic People’s Republic of 60 lb in AAMI

Korea, Republic of 60 kg cm AAMI

Kuweit 50 kg cm AAMI

Kyrgyzstan 60 lb in AAMI

Lao People’s Democratic Republics 50 kg cm IEC

Latvia 50 kg cm IEC

Lebanon 50 kg cm AAMI

Lesotho 50 kg cm IEC

Liberia 50 kg cm IEC

Libyan Arab. Jamahiriya 60 lb in AAMI

Liechtenstein 60 lb in AAMI

Lithuania 50 kg cm IEC

Luxembourg 50 kg cm IEC

Macao 60 lb in AAMI

Macedonia, The former Yugoslav. Rep. of 50 kg cm IEC

Madagascar 50 kg cm IEC

Malawi 50 kg cm IEC

Malaysia 50 kg cm IEC

Maldives 60 lb in AAMI

Mali 50 kg cm IEC

Malta 50 kg cm IEC

Marshall Islands 60 lb in AAMI

Martinique 60 kg cm IEC

Mauritania 50 kg cm IEC

Mauritius 60 lb in AAMI

Mayotte 60 lb in AAMI

Mexico 60 kg cm AAMI

Micronesia, Fed. States of 60 lb in AAMI

Moldova, Republic of 60 lb in AAMI

Monaco 60 lb in AAMI

Mongolia 60 lb in AAMI

Montenegro 50 kg cm IEC

4 Configuration Settings Appendix Global Settings

158

Montserrat 50 kg cm AAMI

Morocco 50 kg cm IEC

Mozambique 50 kg cm IEC

Myanmar 60 lb in AAMI

Namibia 50 kg cm IEC

Nauru 60 lb in AAMI

Nepal 60 lb in AAMI

Netherlands 50 kg cm IEC

Netherlands Antilles 50 kg cm AAMI

New Caledonia 60 lb in AAMI

New Zealand 50 kg cm AAMI

Nicaragua 60 kg in AAMI

Niger 50 kg cm IEC

Nigeria 50 kg cm IEC

Niue 60 lb in AAMI

Norfolk Islands 60 lb in AAMI

Northern Mariana Islands 60 lb in AAMI

Norway 50 kg cm IEC

Oman 50 kg cm AAMI

Pakistan 50 kg cm IEC

Palau 60 lb in AAMI

Palestinian Territory 50 kg cm AAMI

Panama 60 lb in AAMI

Papua New Guinea 60 lb in AAMI

Paraguay 50 kg cm AAMI

Peru 60 kg cm AAMI

Philippines 60 kg cm AAMI

Pitcairn 60 lb in AAMI

Poland 50 kg cm IEC

Portugal 50 kg cm IEC

Puerto Rico 60 lb in AAMI

Qatar 50 kg cm AAMI

Reunion 60 lb in AAMI

Romania 50 kg cm IEC

Russian Federation 50 kg cm IEC

Rwanda 50 kg cm IEC

Saint Helena 60 lb in AAMI

Saint Kitts and Nevis 60 kg cm AAMI

Saint Lucia 50 kg cm AAMI

Saint Pierre and Miquelon 60 lb in AAMI

Global Settings 4 Configuration Settings Appendix

159

Saint Vincent and the Grenadines 50 kg cm AAMI

Samoa 60 lb in AAMI

San Marino 60 lb in AAMI

Sao Tome and Principe 60 lb in AAMI

Saudi Arabia 50 kg cm AAMI

Senegal 50 kg cm IEC

Serbia 50 kg cm IEC

Serbia & Montenegro 50 kg cm IEC

Seychelles 60 lb in AAMI

Sierra Leone 50 kg cm IEC

Singapore 50 kg cm IEC

Slovakia 50 kg cm IEC

Slovenia 50 kg cm IEC

Solomon Islands 60 lb in AAMI

Somalia 50 kg cm IEC

South Africa 60 lb in AAMI

South Georgia and the South Sandwich

Islands

60 lb in AAMI

Spain 50 kg cm IEC

Sri Lanka 60 lb in AAMI

Sudan 50 kg cm IEC

Suriname 60 kg cm AAMI

Svalbard and Jan Mayen 60 lb in AAMI

Swaziland 60 lb in AAMI

Sweden 50 kg cm IEC

Switzerland 50 kg cm IEC

Syrian Arab Rep 50 kg cm AAMI

Taiwan, Province of China 60 kg cm AAMI

Tajik istan 60 lb in AAMI

Tanzania, United Republic of 60 lb in AAMI

Thailand 50 kg cm AAMI

Timor-Leste 60 lb in AAMI

To g o 6 0 lb in AAMI

To k el au 6 0 lb in AAMI

To n ga 6 0 lb in AAMI

Trinidad and Tobago 60 lb in AAMI

Tu n i s i a 5 0 kg cm IEC

Tu r k e y 5 0 kg cm IEC

Tu r k m e n i s t a n 6 0 lb in AAMI

Turks a n d C ai co s Is la n d s 60 kg cm AAMI

4 Configuration Settings Appendix Global Settings

160

Configuring Printers

Global Setting: Main Setup -> Reports -> Setup Printers

Tuvalu 60 lb in AAMI

Uganda 60 lb in AAMI

Ukraine 60 lb in AAMI

UK 50 kg cm IEC

United Arab Emirates 50 kg cm AAMI

United Kingdom 50 kg cm IEC

United States 60 lb in AAMI

United States (Weight kg) 60 kg in AAMI

United States Minor Outlying Islands 60 lb in AAMI

Uruguay 50 kg cm AAMI

Uzbekistan 60 lb in AAMI

Vanuatu 60 lb in AAMI

Venezuela 60 lb in AAMI

Viet Nam 50 kg cm IEC

Virgin Islands (British) 50 kg cm AAMI

Virgin Islands (US) 60 lb in AAMI

Wallis and Futuna Islands 60 lb in AAMI

Western Sahara 50 kg cm IEC

Yemen 50 kg cm AAMI

Zambia 60 lb in AAMI

Zimbabwe 60 lb in AAMI

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP20 - MP90 MP2/X2

MP5 / MP5T

C S M

Printer: Local 1

Chg Printer Name x x Local 1 not applicable, the

MP2/X2 and MP5/

MPT do not support

local printing

Port x x not applicable, this is not a setting, see "Printer

Configuration Implications" on page 162

Config Printer

xManual

Printer Status x x x Disabled

Paper Size x x Letter

Resolution x x 300 dpi

Color Support x x Monochrome

Duplex Option x x Simplex

Global Settings 4 Configuration Settings Appendix

161

Printer: Local 2

Chg Printer Name x x Local 2 not applicable, the

MP2/X2 and MP5/

MP5T do not

support local

printing

Port x x not applicable, this is not a setting, see "Printer

Configuration Implications" on page 162

Config Printer

xManual

Printer Status x x x Disabled

Paper Size x x Letter

Resolution x x 300 dpi

Color Support x x Monochrome

Duplex Option x x Simplex

Printer: Remote 1

Chg Printer Name x x Remote 1

Port x x not applicable, this is not a setting, see "Printer Configuration Implications" on

page 162

Config Printer

xAuto

Printer Status x x x Enabled

Paper Size x x Letter

Resolution x x 300 dpi

Color Support x x Monochrome

Duplex Option x x Simplex

Printer: Remote 2

Chg Printer Name x x Remote 2

Port x x not applicable, this is not a setting, see "Printer Configuration Implications" on

page 162

Config Printer

xAuto

Printer Status x x x Enabled

Paper Size x x Letter

Resolution x x 300 dpi

Color Support x x Monochrome

Duplex Option x x Simplex

Printer: Remote 3

Chg Printer Name x x Remote 3

Port x x not applicable, this is not a setting, see "Printer Configuration Implications" on

page 162

Config Printer

xAuto

Printer Status x x x Enabled

Paper Size x x Letter

Resolution x x 300 dpi

Color Support x x Monochrome

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP20 - MP90 MP2/X2

MP5 / MP5T

C S M

4 Configuration Settings Appendix Global Settings

162

Printer Configuration Implications

Printer This is not a setting, it lets you select the printer you want to configure. The printer

Database is not a physical printer, it refers to the print database. This is a special section of the monitor

database which acts as a buffer for print jobs. Print jobs stored in the print database are automatically

printed when a print device with a paper size matching the template of the report is available. Reports

stored in the print database will not be cleared by a discharge or by a power cycle. To be able to use the

print database, it must be enabled, see "Print Database" on page 173.

Chg Printer Name Lets you change the printer name. If the monitor is connected to an

Information Center, the name of the printer is determined by the Information Center and cannot be

changed at the monitor.

Port This is not a setting. Port lets you view the printer port to which the selected printer is assigned.

Available printer ports are Local 1, Local 2, Remote 1, Remote 2, Remote 3, and

Database. Several printers can be mapped to the same printer port. For example, both Local 1 and

Local 2 could be mapped to the same local printer to allow printing from different paper trays of one

printer.

Port Local 1 has the highest priority, port Database has the lowest priority. If you print a report for

which no specific printer has been assigned (Target Device = Unspecified, see "Configuring

Reports" on page 99), the monitor tries to print on port Local 1 first. If this is not possible, because the

printer is not available or there is a mismatch between the configured report size and the actual printer

paper size, the monitor tries to send the report to the printer connected to port Local 2, followed by

Remote 1, and so on. If the monitor has no connection to a printer, the report will be stored in the print

database, from which it will be printed as soon as a connection to an appropriate printer is available.

Duplex Option x x Simplex

Printer: Database

Chg Printer Name x x Database

Port x x not applicable, this is not a setting, see "Printer Configuration Implications" on

page 162

Config Printer

xManual

Printer Status x x x Enabled

Paper Size x x Letter

1.Local printers will only be shown in the list of printers if a Parallel Printer Interface is installed.

2.Setting can only be changed in service mode.

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP20 - MP90 MP2/X2

MP5 / MP5T

C S M

Global Settings 4 Configuration Settings Appendix

163

Config Printer This setting is available in Service mode only. It lets you define whether the printer

is automatically or manually configured. Automatic printer configuration is only available for remote

printers, i.e. printers that are connected to the Information Center. For local printers and printing to the

database, this setting is automatically set to Manual.

When Config Printer is set to Auto, printer settings for paper size, resolution, color support and

duplex option sent from an Information Center or other source override the settings configured at the

monitor. They will be unavailable (“grayed out”) at the monitor. When Config Printer is set to

Manual, the printer settings from the monitor override printer settings from an Information Center or

other source.

Printer Status This lets you enable or disable the selected printer.

If Port is one of the remote ports, and Config Printer is set to Auto, and printing on this port is

not possible, Printer Status is automatically Disabled and can not be changed.

Paper Size This lets you configure the printer paper size. Possible choices are: A4, Letter, A3 or

Ledger (11x17 inches). This setting is not available if Config Printer is configured to Auto.

Resolution The printer resolution can be set to 300 dpi, 600 dpi or 1200 dpi. The

horizontal and vertical resolutions are assumed to be identical. This setting is not available if Config

Printer is configured to Auto or if Printer Status is Disabled.

Color Support This lets you configure whether the printer supports color. It can be set to

Monochrome or 8 Colors. This setting is not available if Config Printer is configured to

Auto or if Printer Status is Disabled.

Duplex Option This lets you configure Simplex or Duplex printing. If the printer does not

support duplex printing, this setting is ignored. This setting is not available if Config Printer is

configured to Auto or if Printer Status

is Disabled.

Configuration Example: Configuring a Locally Connected Printer

These steps show you how to carry out a typical configuration for a monitor connected to a local printer.

1 In the Setup Printers menu, select the first printer in the list (Port is set to Local 1).

2 Set Printer Status to Enabled. Disabled means that no reports will be printed on the

printer. If this menu entry is grayed out, it means that no printer of this type is connected to the

specified port. Make sure that all other printers in the list are set to Disabled.

3 Select Chg Printer Name and then use the pop-up keyboard to enter a name for the printer you

are currently configuring. Maximum length is 12.

4 Select Paper Size and set the paper size for reports printed on this printer.

5 Select Resolution and set the resolution at which reports should be printed.

6 Select Color Support to toggle to Monochrome for black and white printers or 8 Colors for

color printers. If your printer is not a color printer and you set this to color, reports will not print

correctly.

7 Select Duplex Option to toggle to Duplex if the connected printer can print double-sided

reports, or Simplex for single-sided print-outs.

Only one local printer can be connected to each monitor. You can use the second local port to print

reports from a second paper tray, if required.

4 Configuration Settings Appendix Global Settings

164

1 Select the second printer in the list, and make sure Port is set to Local 2 and Printer

Status is set to Enabled.

2 Assign different names to the two paper trays, for example Bed4_USLettr and Bed4_Ledger.

3 Configure the other printer settings as required for the second paper tray.

Configuration Example: Configuring a Centrally Connected Printer

These steps show you how to carry out a typical configuration for a monitor connected to a central printer.

1 In the Setup Printers menu, select the third printer in the list and make sure that Port is set

to Remote 1.

2 Set Printer Status to Enabled. Disabled means that no reports will be printed on the

printer. If this menu entry is grayed out, it means that no printer of this type is connected to the

specified port. Make sure that all other printers in the list are set to Disabled.

3 If the printer name is not sent from the Information Center, select Chg Printer Name and then

use the pop-up keyboard to enter a name for the printer you are currently configuring. Maximum

length is 12. If the printer name is defined at the Information Center, Chg Printer Name will be

unavailable (“grayed out”).

(The settings described in steps 4 to 7 are only available if the service mode setting Config Printer is

set to Manual).

4 Select Paper Size and set the paper size for reports printed on this printer.

5 Select Resolution and set the resolution at which reports should be printed.

6 Select Color Support to toggle between Monochrome for black and white printers or

8 Colors for color printers.

The IntelliVue Information Center currently does not support color printers. If a black and white printer

is connected to your Information Center and you set Color Support for a remote printer to 8

Colors, reports will not print correctly.

7 Select Duplex Option to toggle to Duplex if the connected printer can print double-sided

reports, or Simplex for single-sided print-outs.

If only one remote printer is connected to the monitor, you can use the second and third remote printer

ports to print from different paper trays on the printer. The service mode setting Config Printer

must be set to Manual for this.

1 To print reports from the second paper tray, select the fourth printer in the list, make sure Port is set

to Remote 2, and Printer Status is set to Enabled.

2 To print reports from the third paper tray, select the fifth printer in the list, make sure Port is set to

Remote 3, and Printer Status is set to Enabled.

3 Configure the other printer settings as required for each paper tray.

Configuration Example: Configuring one Locally and One Centrally

Connected Printer

This is a typical configuration for a monitor connected to one local and one central printer.

1 To configure the local printer, in the Setup Printers menu, select the first printer in the list and

make sure that Port is set to Local 1. Set Printer Status to Enabled. Change the printer

name if required and configure the correct settings for the locally connected printer as described above.

Global Settings 4 Configuration Settings Appendix

165

2 To configure the central printer, in the Setup Printers menu, select the third printer in the list

and make sure that Port is set to Remote 1. Set Printer Status to Enabled. Change the

printer name if required and configure the settings for the centrally connected printer as described

above.

3 Make sure that all other printers in the list are set to Disabled.

Printing a Test Report

To verify your printer configuration it is strongly recommended that you print a test report.

To print a test report,

select Main Setup -> Reports -> Setup Printers -> Print Test Rep.

4 Configuration Settings Appendix Hardware Settings

166

Hardware Settings

This section lists all hardware settings. Just like unique monitor settings and global settings, hardware

settings are set once per monitor and are the same in every Profile. Any changes you make to the hardware

settings configuration are automatically stored, there is no need to save them in an extra step.

Hardware settings must be entered for each monitor individually, they are stored in the monitor, and

cannot be cloned using the IntelliVue Support Tool.

Most hardware settings can be changed in service mode only. For detailed configuration implications on

these settings, please refer to the Service Guide provided on the Documentation DVD shipped with your

monitor.

Hardware Setting: Main Setup -> Hardware

Video Video settings are available in service mode only and allow technical personnel to set the correct

resolution for the connected display(s). For detailed configuration implications, refer to the IntelliVue

Service Guide and "Configuring Video Settings" on page 168.

Standby Image This setting lets you change the presentation of the standby screen. Choices for the

first display are Fixed Image or Moving Image. For the 2nd and 3rd independent display, two

additional choices are available: Blank and Video Off.

• Boot Image: the Standby screen shows the boot image configured under Video settings, see

"Configuring Video Settings" on page 168.

• Moving Image: the Standby screen shows a black screen with an image moving across the screen,

similar to a screensaver.

• Blank: the Standby screen shows a black screen, the display is not shut off.

• Video Off: the video signal and display are turned off.

Interfaces Interface settings can be changed in service mode only. Supported interface board

configurations are listed in the section “Installation Instructions” of the IntelliVue Service Guide.

Keyboard This setting is available in service mode only and allows technical personnel to select the

language of the keyboard that is connected to the P/S2 interface connector. For detailed configuration

implications, refer to the IntelliVue Service Guide.

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP2 - MP90

MP5T

C S M

Multiple Display

1.Settings available for monitors with multiple main displays only

x See “Configuring Multiple Display Settings” on page 167

Video x See “Configuring Video Settings” on page 168

Standby Image x x Boot Image

Interfaces x See “Configuring Interfaces and Input Device Settings” on page 169

Keyboard x US

Data Export x x Fix 115200

Hardware Settings 4 Configuration Settings Appendix

167

Data Export This setting allows you to change the baud rate of the MIB/RS232 data output.

Configuring Multiple Display Settings

MP90

only

Multiple Display settings are available for MP90 monitors with multiple main displays only.

Hardware Setting: Main Setup -> Hardware -> Multiple Display

Multiple Display Configuration Implications

Display Layout This setting can be changed in service mode only. For detailed configuration

implications, refer to the MP80/MP90 IntelliVue Service Guide.

Display 1 / Display 2 / Display 3 These settings can be changed in service mode only.

For detailed configuration implications, refer to the MP80/MP90 IntelliVue Service Guide.

Oper. 1 Windows / Oper. 2 Windows These settings can be changed in service mode only.

For detailed configuration implications, refer to the MP80/MP90 IntelliVue Service Guide.

FMS 1 Keys defines on which display a setup menu or application window appears when any of the

hard keys on a plug-in module in FMS 1 is pressed. If the configured display is not available, the monitor

automatically uses Display 1.

FMS 2 Keys defines on which display a setup menu or application window appears when any of the

hard keys on a plug-in module in FMS 2 is pressed. If the configured display is not available, the monitor

automatically uses Display 1.

GM Keys defines on which display the gas monitor setup menu appears when the Setup Airway Gases

key on the gas monitor front panel is pressed. If the configured display is not available, the monitor

automatically uses Display 1.

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP90

C S M

Display Layout x Horizontal

Display 1 x Operator 1

Display 2 x Operator 1

Display 3 x Operator 1

Oper. 1 Windows x Same Display

Oper. 2 Windows x Same Display

FMS 1 Keys x x Display 1

FMS 2 Keys x x Display 1

GM Keys x x Display 1

Meas Sel.Window x x Display 1

ADT Window x x Display 1

Timer Window x x Display 1

ProtWatch Window x x Display 1

4 Configuration Settings Appendix Hardware Settings

168

Meas. Sel.Window defines on which display the Measurement Selection window pops up if Meas.

Selection (see “Configuring User Interface Settings” on page 108) is configured to Window, and a

label conflict occurs, and no other menu/window is open at the same time. If the configured display is not

available, the monitor automatically uses Display 1.

ADT Window defines on which display the Patient Demographics window pops up, if a patient

identification mismatch occurs and no other menu/window is open at the same time. If the configured

display is not available, the monitor automatically uses Display 1.

Timer Window defines on which display the Timers window pops up when a timer expires and the

Auto Window setting for that timer is set to Yes (see “Configuring Timers” on page 136), and no

other menu/window is open at the same time. If the configured display is not available, the monitor

automatically uses Display 1.

ProtWatch Window defines on which display the ProtocolWatch window pops up when the

protocol currently running requires a user response. If the configured display is not available, the monitor

automatically uses Display 1.

Configuring Video Settings

Video settings can be changed in service mode only and allow technical personnel to set the correct

resolution, type, and size for connected display(s). For detailed configuration implications on these

settings, please refer to the latest IntelliVue Patient Monitor Service Guide.

Hardware Setting: Main Setup -> Hardware -> Video

Video Settings Configuration Implications

Standby/Boot This setting can be changed in service mode only. It lets you change the presentation

of the Standby/Boot Screen from the Classic look (photo of nurse and child in the background) to the

Basic (black background) look.

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP90 MP60/70 MP40/50 MP20/30 MP5 MP2/X2

C S M

Standby/Boot x Classic Classic

1.Setting cannot be changed

Display 1 - Resolution x XGA (1024 x 768) SVGA

SVGA

VGA

QVGA

Display 1 - Display Type x LCD LCD

LCD

Display 1 - Size x 15” (305x230mm) 12.1”

10.4”

8.4”

3.5”

Display 2 - Resolution x XGA (1024 x 768) not applicable, only one main display supported

Display 2 - Display Type x LCD

Display 2 - Size x 15”

Display 3 - Resolution x XGA (1024 x 768)

Display 3 - Display Type x LCD

Display 3 - Size x 15”

Hardware Settings 4 Configuration Settings Appendix

169

Configuring Interfaces and Input Device Settings

MP90

only

Interfaces and Input Device settings can be changed for MP90 monitors with multiple main displays only.

They can be changed in service mode only and allow technical personnel to configure the behavior of

connected input devices. For detailed configuration implications, please refer to the latest IntelliVue

Service Guide.

Hardware Setting: Main Setup -> Hardware -> Interfaces

Configuring Wireless LAN Settings

MP5-90

only

Hardware Setting: Main Setup -> Network -> Setup WLAN

Wireless LAN settings only apply for monitors that have a Wireless LAN interface installed. They must be

set to match the hospital’s wireless infrastructure (access point, wireless switch, etc.). Wireless LAN

Settings are hardware settings and will typically be set by service personnel at installation.

Note: Unlike other hardware settings, Wireless LAN settings need to be manually stored to make them

effective. Use the Store entry in the Setup Wireless LAN menu to do so.

Wireless LAN settings can also be configured using the IntelliVue Support Tool.

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP90

C S M

SpeedPoint x Same Display

Mouse/Keyboard x Same Display

Keyboard/Mouse x Same Display

Touch 1 x Same Display

Touch 2 x Same Display

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP5 - MP90

C S M

Country

1.available in service mode only

x1000

IP Address

x 0.0.0.0

Mode x none

SSID x BMWLANICN

Security Mode x WPA(PSK)

WPA Password

2.available only if Security mode is set to WPA

x BMWLANICNPSK

WEP Key Size

3.available only if Security mode is set to WEP

x104

WEP Key

x BMWLANICNWEP1

WEP Key Index

4 Configuration Settings Appendix Hardware Settings

170

WLAN Configuration Implications

Country This setting is available in service mode only. The recommended value is 1000. If set to this

value, the monitor automatically adjusts the regulatory domain to match the configuration of the

infrastructure.

IP Address This setting is available in service mode only. See the IntelliVue Service Guide for details.

Mode This lets you select the WLAN IEEE 802.11 mode that the hospital is using, such as

802.11Ah, 802.11G or 802.11bg.

SSID (Service Set ID) This is a security setting and will typically be configured by service personnel at

installation.

Security Mode Another security setting that will typically be configured by service personnel at

installation. It is recommended to use WPA-PSK.

WPA Password A security setting that will typically be configured by service personnel at installation.

It is available only if Security Mode is set to WPA. The four stars (****) that you see in the menu are a

placeholder for the actual password. They do not indicate that the password is only four characters in

length.

WEP Key A security setting that will typically be configured by service personnel at installation. It is

available only if Security Mode is set to WEP. The four stars (****) that you see in the menu are a

placeholder for the actual password. They do not indicate that the password is only four characters in

length.

WEP Key Size/WEP Key Index Security settings that will typically be configured by service

personnel at installation. These settings are available only if Security Mode is set to WEP.

Configuring Bed Information Settings

Hardware Setting: Main Setup -> Bed Information

Equipment and hospital labels must be entered for each individual monitor. They are stored with the

monitor, they are not cloned. All other Bed Information shown for information only in the Bed Info

window is automatically acquired and cannot be changed.

If the monitor is connected to an Information Center, the Equipment Label on the bedside monitor is the

equivalent of the Monitor Label on the Information Center. These labels must match exactly.

The maximum length for the equipment label is 16 characters; the hospital label can be up to 30

characters. Note that as an Information Center will display only up to 12 characters, if your monitor will

be connected to an Information Center, you should use labels not longer than 12 characters.

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP2 - MP90

MP5T

C S M

Equipment Label x x <empty>

Hospital Label x x <empty>

Monitor Database Configuration 4 Configuration Settings Appendix

171

Monitor Database Configuration

Main Setup -> Databases -> Database Config

The monitor’s database is divided into sections that store events, trends, calculations, and print

information separately. In config mode, you can configure the size of the trends, events, and print sections

to suit your monitoring needs. The calculations database always stores up to 50 calculations, this

configuration cannot be changed. The overall database size is defined by the purchased database option.

1 Select Main Setup -> Databases -> Database Config to enter the Database

Configurations menu.

2 To configure the database,

a. you can use the pop-up keys to change the overall database configuration,

– Select the Select Smallest pop-up key to select the configuration that takes up least database

space. This setting applies across all database sections.

– Select the Select Default pop-up key to return to the default configuration.

– Select the Select Active pop-up key to return to the configuration that was loaded prior to

your changes. This cancels any changes you have made.

b. you can use the menu items to change individual sections of the database.

Tr e n d s : in the Database Configurations menu, the currently active database configuration

is shown, for example, the entry 32P 4h@12s 24h@1min 48h@5min tells you that the trends

section of the database contains trend information on 32 measurement parameters from the past 4

hours at a resolution of 12 seconds, from the past 24 hours at a resolution of 1 minute, and from the

past 48 hours at a resolution of 5 minutes.

To change the setting, select the database section you wish to change, then select the required

configuration from the list of available settings.

Event Surveillance: In the Database Configurations menu, select Event

Surveillance, then select the event database configuration you require from the list of available

configurations.

Print Database: In the Database Configurations menu, select Print Database, then

select the database configuration you require from the list of available configurations.

3 Select the Store Config pop-up key to store your changes. You will be prompted to confirm this

action. Selecting Confirm stores your changes.

CAUTION Selecting the Store Config pop-up key causes a coldstart, i.e. it discharges the patient, resets all

settings to the default profile, and erases all information in the database. The monitor will automatically be

switched off and then on again.

4 Configuration Settings Appendix Monitor Database Configuration

172

Trend Database

This table illustrates the default trend database configurations for the different H and database options:

Additional Configurations for the Standard Database

Option H20

• 16 Parameters 4h@12s, 24h@1min, 48h@5min

Option H30

• 16 Parameters 4h@12s, 24h@1min, 48h@5min

Additional Configurations for the Extended Database Option (C03)

MP60-90

only

Option H10/H40

• 32 Parameters 2h@12s, 32h@1min, 48h@5min

• 24 Parameters 48h@1min, 72h@5min

Option H20

• 24 Parameters 12h@12s, 12h@1min, 12h@5min

• 12 Parameters 24h@12s, 24h @1min, 24h @5min

Option H30

• 32 Parameters 9h@12s, 9h@1min, 9h@5min

• 24 Parameters 12h@12s, 12h@1min, 12h@5min

Aperiodic Trend Database

The IntelliVue patient monitor provides a second trend database exclusively reserved for aperiodic

parameters. Aperiodic parameters are parameters that are measured intermittently, such as NBP, C.O.,

C.I., PAWP (Wedge), manually entered measurements, or lab results from external devices obtained form

the VueLink interface.

Default Trend Database Configurations

Database

Option

MP2 - MP90, MP5T, X2

H10 / H40 H20 H30

No. of

Parameters

Period Resolution No. of

Parameters

Period Resolution No. of

Parameters

Period Resolution

Standard

Database

16 4 h 12 sec 12 9 h 12 sec 16 5 h 12 sec

16 24 h 1 min 12 24 h 1 min 16 24 h 1 min

16 48 h 5 min 12 24 h 5 min 16 24 h 5 min

Extended

Database

(Option

C03)

32 4 h 12 sec 24 9 h 12 sec 32 5 h 12 sec

32 24 h 1 min 24 24 h 1 min 32 24 h 1 min

32 48 h 5 min 24 24 h 5 min 32 24 h 5 min

Monitor Database Configuration 4 Configuration Settings Appendix

173

The aperiodic database can store a maximum of 200 individual measurements, with NBP measurements

not counting towards that total number.

Note that the information stored in the aperiodic database does not contribute to the maximum number

of parameters as defined by the monitor’s database option (Standard or #C03). This means that aperiodic

parameters do not count towards the max. number of trended parameters allowed and therefore do not

have to be considered when configuring the Trend Priorities, see "Configuring Trend Priorities" on page

120.

Event Surveillance Database

This table illustrates the default event database configurations available with different event options:

Print Database

Report types differ considerably in their storage space requirements. ECG Reports, for example are large

reports and require much space, whereas VitalsReports are much smaller. Therefore, it cannot be clearly

specified how many reports can be stored in the print database.

With Print Database set to Small, it can, for example store about five 3x4 ECG Reports, but only

one 12x1 ECG Report.

The Large database is only recommended for monitors used in transport. It is about four times larger

than the Small database and can store more reports accordingly. Note that the Large database might

not be available for selection if the Event Surveillance database and the Trend database are configured to

large sizes.

To disable the Print Database, set it to None.

Option C06, Basic

Event Surveillance

Option C07, Advanced Event

Surveillance

Option C04, Neonatal Event

Review (NER)

Database capability

None None None

25 events for 24 hours 25 events for 24 hours 25 events for 24 hours

25 events for 8 hours 25 events for 8 hours

50 events for 8 hours 50 events for 8 hours

50 events for 24 hours 50 events for 24 hours

Default Print Database Configurations

Options MP20 - MP90 MP2/X2

MP5

Database capability Small Large

4 Configuration Settings Appendix H Option-Specific Settings

174

H Option-Specific Settings

Depending on the H option installed on the monitor, the following settings may be affected regardless of

the configuration file loaded onto the monitor:

• Default trend database option and available trend database options, see "Trend Database" on page 172.

• Supported HighResolution Waves, see "Changing the Content of a High Resolution Trend Element"

on page 19.

• Support for gas analyzer: only H30 supports the use of a gas analyzer with the IntelliVue monitor.

• Activated Event Groups, see "Configuring Event Surveillance" on page 124.

• Monitor name on Boot/Standby Screen:

– H10: The Philips Critical Care Patient Monitor ...

– H20: The Philips Neonatal Patient Monitor ...

– H30: The Philips Anesthesia Patient Monitor ...

– H40: The Philips Critical/Cardiac Care Patient Monitor ...

Release-Specific Information 4 Configuration Settings Appendix

175

Release-Specific Information

F.0 Configuration Changes

For IntelliVue patient monitor Release F.0, the initial configuration settings were modified compared to

Release E.0. These changes are documented below. This table lists new settings and settings for which the

defaults have been changed based on the H option and M option. No X indicates that the settings has not

been changed for the related option between E.0 and F.0.

Settings new or with changed defaults in F.0 (E.0 setting)

If there is no value, the setting is new

MP20 - 90 MP20 MP5 MP2

H10 H20 H30 H40 #M20

#M21

All H

Options

ECG/Pulse Alarms

PulseAlarms Tele X X X X X X X

QT Analysis

QT Lead XXXX X X X

QTc High Limit XXXX X X X

ΔQTc High Limit XXXX X X X

QTc High Alarm XXXX X X X

ΔQTc High Alarm XXXX X X X

QT Analysis XXXX X X X

QTc Formula XXXX X X X

NBP

Sequence A XXXX X X X

every X X X X X X X

Sequence B XXXX X X X

every X X X X X X X

Sequence C XXXX X X X

every X X X X X X X

Sequence D XXXX X X X

every X X X X X X X

P, A B P, A R T, A o , UA P,

FAP, BAP, P1, P2, P3,

Mean Low in Profile Neo: 36 (35) X X X X X X X

PAP

Sys. High in Profile Adult: 34 (35) X X X X X X X

C.O.

Measuring Mode XXXX X

Alarms

LED Brightness XXXX X X X

Alarm Recordings

QT XXXX X X

Screen Trends

HorizonArrowTime X X X X X X X

Horizon Trends

Label XXXX X X X

Unit XXXX X X X

4 Configuration Settings Appendix Release-Specific Information

176

Horizon High X X X X X X X

Horizon Low X X X X X X X

Scale Delta XXXX X X X

User Interface

Companion - Operating X X X X X

Companion - Display X X X X X

Trend Groups: Cardiac

HR, PVC; STindx, ST, Any QT (HR, PVC;

STindx, ST)

XXXX X X X

Trend Scales

QTc XXXX X X X

ΔQTc XXXX X X X

QT XXXX X X X

QT-HR XXXX X X X

Trend Prior ity

HR, PVC, SpO

, SpO

l, SpO

r, Any Press,

CPP, CCO, CCI, CO

, awRR, RR, Any

Agent, BIS, EMG, SQI

(HR, PVC, SpO

, SpO

l, SpO

r, Any

Press, CPP, CCO, CCI, CO

, awRR, RR)

Global Settings

MMS PW Sync XXXX X

AskUser Reminder XXXX X X

Tele Discharge X

Tr a n s p o r t P r o f i l e X X

Power Loss Sound X

LAN Data Export X X X X X X X

Manual Data Entry

Label XXXX X X X

Unit XXXX X X X

Color XXXX X X X

Interval XXXX X X X

Msmnt XXXX X X X

Format XXXX X X X

Printer: Database

Chg Printer Name XXXX X X X

Config Printer X X X X X X X

Printer Status XXXX X X X

Paper Size X X X X X X X

Print Database

Configuration X X X X X X X

Hardware Settings

Standby Image XXXX X X X

Settings new or with changed defaults in F.0 (E.0 setting)

If there is no value, the setting is new

MP20 - 90 MP20 MP5 MP2

H10 H20 H30 H40 #M20

#M21

All H

Options

177

5Screen & Profile Overview

This appendix documents the Screens and Profiles configured for each monitor model in the factory. If

you make changes to Screens or Profiles, this document will no longer reflect the factory default

configuration. You then must create you own reference by storing printouts and/or electronic images

of the Screens you design.

In the Configuration Overview section starting on page 180, the factory default Profiles supplied with

each possible combination of options are listed.

The Screen Overview section starting on page 198 gives an overview of all initial and demo

configuration Screen names for monitor release F.0. To view or print bitmaps of all Screens supplied

with a specific initial or demo configuration, on the Documentation DVD supplied with your

IntelliVue monitor, navigate to the folder Documentation\F.0\Configuration

Guide\Screen Configurations and open/print the pdf document that has the same name as

the required configuration file.

The initial configuration of your monitor may vary slightly depending on your geography and on the

options purchased. The Screens documented here may be subject to slight changes.

About the Screen Configurations

When a Screen is created using the Support Tool, the information in the Screen is saved in two

formats:

• .rds: this format contains Screen information and can only be read by the Support Tool

• .png: a bitmap image is created for each Screen. Each Screen field is labelled to tell you which waves,

numerics, SmartKeys, and special elements such as screen trends or ST snippets have been

configured onto the Screens, and a date stamp tells you when the Screen was last modified.

Application Areas

The H Option purchased with the monitor defines the clinical application area for which the Screens

are designed.

– Option H10 Screens are designed for general purposes

–Option H20 Screens are designed for neonatal application areas

–Option H30 Screens are designed for anesthesia application areas

–Option H40 Screens are designed for cardiac care application areas.

5 Screen & Profile Overview About the Screen Configurations

178

Wave Options

The A Option purchased with the monitor defines the number of waves that can be shown on any Screen.

With A12, up to twelve waves can be shown on a Screen, with A06, up to six waves can be shown, and so

on.

Using the Screen Library

This Appendix lists the Screens that are supplied with the initial monitor configurations and the Screens

available in the demo configuration file. The demo configuration includes Screens that feature, for

example:

• Screen Trends, allowing you to display trend segments embedded in the Screen. These could be entitled

e.g.: G-08W-3Press-Split-ScreenTrend-xga-Rev004.rds.

• ST Snippets, allowing you to display the current ST snippets superimposed over the baseline snippet

permanently on the Screen. These could be entitled e.g.: C-05W-2Press-03ST-snippets-xga-Rev003.rds.

• Visitors Screen, allowing you to hide all waves and numerics for the duration of visiting time. This

could be entitled e.g.: G-visitor-screen01-xga-Rev005.rds

• Example of SXGA Screen. This could be entitled: G-12W-1x3ovl-2x2ovl-1split-sxga-Rev004.rds

Other Screens that are not included in the config files provided by the factory can be found in the screen

library of the Support Tool.

Sample Screen Image (.bmp) 5 Screen & Profile Overview

179

Sample Screen Image (.bmp)

123

Element, abbreviation Contains.

1 Fixed Area alarm message fields, patient information, etc. Cannot be modified with the Support Tool.

2 Wave field, W wave label, e.g. “Primary Lead”.

3 Numeric fields, N numeric label e.g. “aligned” for numerics automatically assigned with the adjacent wave.

4 ST snippet, ST ST label, e.g. “ST II”.

5 SmartKey list list of SmartKeys in the order they will appear on Screen from left to right.

6 High Res Trends, HW high resolution trends label, e.g. “btbHR”.

7 Screen trends, T Screen trend label, e.g. Temp.

8 Alignment Groups numbers in gray shaded boxes indicate different alignment groups

9 Fixed Area Permanent Keys, current operating mode, monitor status prompts. Cannot be modified

with Support Tool.

10 Smart Key area, SKA SmartKeys in the order listed at 5.

11 Filename and path the Screen filename and the path on the harddrive where the Screen was stored. The .rds

format contains the Screen itself, the .bmp format contains the reference image.

12 Checksum Unique identifier for the Screen

5 Screen & Profile Overview MP60/MP70/MP80/MP90 Configuration Overview

180

MP60/MP70/MP80/MP90 Configuration Overview

Option H10

The H10 initial configuration filename is H10 Axx, XGA, MP60-90, initial, F.0x.xx, Rev xxx.cfg.

Profiles

Profile

Name

Default Locked

Patient

Cat.

Paced Mode Display 1

Display 2

(MP90 only)

Monitor

Settings Block

Meas.

Settings Block

Adult yes yes Adult Paced Screen A Screen A Monitor A Measmt. Adult

Pedi no yes Pedi Non-Paced Screen A Screen A Monitor A Measmt. Pedi

Neo no yes Neo Non-Paced Screen A Screen A Monitor A Measmt. Neo

Monitor Settings Blocks Measurement Settings Blocks

Name Locked Name Locked

Monitor A yes Measmt. Adult yes

Measmt. Pedi yes

Measmt. Neo yes

Screens

A12 Locked A08 Locked A06 Locked A04 Locked

Service A no Service A no Service A no Service A no

Screen A no Screen A no Screen A no Screen A no

Screen B no Screen B no Screen B no Screen B no

Screen C no Screen C no Screen C no ProtocolWatch no

Screen D no Screen D no Screen D no Horizon no

Screen E no Screen E no Screen E no Big Numerics no

Screen F no Screen F no ProtocolWatch no EEG CSA no

ProtocolWatch no ProtocolWatch no Horizon no 12 Lead ECG no

Horizon no Horizon no Big Numerics no Visitors no

Big Numerics no Big Numerics no EEG CSA no

12 Lead ECG no 12 Lead ECG no 12 Lead ECG no

Visitors no Visitors no Visitors no

MP60/MP70/MP80/MP90 Configuration Overview 5 Screen & Profile Overview

181

Option H20

The H20 initial configuration filename is H20 Axx, XGA, MP60-90, initial, F.0x.xx, Rev xxx.cfg.

Profiles

Profile

Name

Default Locked

Patient

Cat.

Paced Mode Display 1

Display 2

(MP90 only)

Monitor

Settings Block

Meas.

Settings Block

Neo yes yes Neo Non-Paced A12: OxyCRG A

A08: OxyCRG A

A06: OxyCRG A

A04: OxyCRG

A12: OxyCRG A

A08: OxyCRG A

A06: OxyCRG A

A04: OxyCRG

Monitor A Measmt. Neo

Pedi no yes Pedi Non-Paced Monitor A Measmt. Pedi

Monitor Settings Blocks Measurement Settings Blocks

Name Locked Name Locked

Monitor A yes Measmt. Neo yes

Measmt. Pedi yes

Screens

A12 Locked A08 Locked A06 Locked A04 Locked

Service A no Service A no Service A no Service A no

OxyCRG A no OxyCRG A no OxyCRG A no OxyCRG no

OxyCRG B no OxyCRG B no OxyCRG B no Screen A no

OxyCRG C no Screen A no Screen A no Screen B no

Screen A no Screen B no Screen B no ProtocolWatch no

Screen B no Screen C no Screen C no Horizon no

Screen C no Screen D no Screen D no Big Numerics no

ProtocolWatch no ProtocolWatch no ProtocolWatch no EEG CSA no

Horizon no Horizon no Horizon no 12 Lead ECG no

Big Numerics no Big Numerics no Big Numerics no Visitors no

12 Lead ECG no 12 Lead ECG no 12 Lead ECG no

Visitors no Visitors no Visitors no

5 Screen & Profile Overview MP60/MP70/MP80/MP90 Configuration Overview

182

Option H30

The H30 initial configuration filename is H30 Axx, XGA, MP60-90, initial, F.0x.xx, Rev xxx.cfg.

Profiles

Profile

Name

Default Locked

Patient

Cat.

Paced Mode Display 1

Display 2

(MP90 only)

Monitor

Settings Block

Meas.

Settings Block

Adult yes yes Adult Paced Screen A A12: Screen E

A08: Screen D

A06: Screen B

A04: Screen B

Monitor A Measmt. Adult

Pedi no yes Pedi Non-Paced Screen A Monitor A Measmt. Pedi

Neo no yes Neo Non-Paced Screen A Monitor A Measmt. Neo

Monitor Settings Blocks Measurement Settings Blocks

Name Locked Name Locked

Monitor A yes Measmt. Adult yes

Measmt. Pedi yes

Measmt. Neo yes

Screens

A12 Locked A08 Locked A06 Locked A04 Locked

Service A no Service A no Service A no Service A no

Screen A no Screen A no Screen A no Screen A no

Screen B no Screen B no Screen B no Screen B no

Screen C no Screen C no Screen C no Screen C no

Screen D no Screen D no Screen D no ProtocolWatch no

Screen E no Screen E no Screen E no Horizon no

Screen F no Screen F no Screen F no Big Numerics no

ProtocolWatch no ProtocolWatch no ProtocolWatch no EEG CSA no

Horizon no Horizon no Horizon no 12 Lead ECG no

Big Numerics no Big Numerics no Big Numerics no Visitors no

12 Lead ECG no 12 Lead ECG no 12 Lead ECG no

Visitors no Visitors no Visitors no

MP60/MP70/MP80/MP90 Configuration Overview 5 Screen & Profile Overview

183

Option H40

The H40 initial configuration filename is H40 Axx, XGA, MP60-90, initial, F.0x.xx, Rev xxx.cfg.

Profiles

Profile

Name

Default Locked

Patient

Cat.

Paced Mode Display 1

Display 2

(MP90 only)

Monitor

Settings Block

Meas.

Settings Block

Adult yes yes Adult Paced Screen A 12 Lead ECG Monitor A Measmt. Adult

Pedi no yes Pedi Non-Paced Screen A 12 Lead ECG Monitor A Measmt. Pedi

Neo no yes Neo Non-Paced Screen A 12 Lead ECG Monitor A Measmt. Neo

Monitor Settings Blocks Measurement Settings Blocks

Name Locked Name Locked

Monitor A yes Measmt. Adult yes

Measmt. Pedi yes

Measmt. Neo yes

Screens

A12 Locked A08 Locked A06 Locked A04 Locked

Service A no Service A no Service A no Service A no

Screen A no Screen A no Screen A no Screen A no

Screen B no Screen B no Screen B no Screen B no

Screen C no Screen C no Screen C no ProtocolWatch no

Screen D no Screen D no Screen D no Horizon no

Screen E no Screen E no Screen E no Big Numerics no

Screen F no Screen F no ProtocolWatch no EEG CSA no

ProtocolWatch no ProtocolWatch no Horizon no 12 Lead ECG no

Horizon no Horizon no Big Numerics no Visitors no

Big Numerics no Big Numerics no EEG CSA no

12 Lead ECG no 12 Lead ECG no 12 Lead ECG no

Visitors no Visitors no Visitors no

5 Screen & Profile Overview MP40/MP50 Configuration Overview

184

MP40/MP50 Configuration Overview

Option H10

The H10 initial configuration filename is H10 Axx, SVGA, MP40-50, initial, F.0x.xx, Rev xxx.cfg.

Profiles

Profile

Name

Default Locked

Patient

Cat.

Paced Mode Display

Monitor

Settings Block

Meas.

Settings Block

Adult yes yes Adult Paced Screen A Monitor A Measmt. Adult

Pedi no yes Pedi Non-Paced Screen A Monitor A Measmt. Pedi

Neo no yes Neo Non-Paced Screen A Monitor A Measmt. Neo

Monitor Settings Blocks Measurement Settings Blocks

Name Locked Name Locked

Monitor A yes Measmt. Adult yes

Measmt. Pedi yes

Measmt. Neo yes

Screens

A08 Locked A06 Locked A04 Locked

Service A no Service A no Service A no

Screen AnoScreen AnoScreen Ano

Screen B no Screen B no Screen B no

Screen C no Screen C no Screen C no

Screen D no Screen D no Screen D no

Screen E no Screen E no Screen E no

Screen F no Screen F no Screen F no

Screen G no Screen G no Screen G no

ProtocolWatch no ProtocolWatch no ProtocolWatch no

Horizon no Horizon no Horizon no

Big Numerics no Big Numerics no Big Numerics no

12 Lead ECG no 12 Lead ECG no 12 Lead ECG no

Visitors no Visitors no Visitors no

MP40/MP50 Configuration Overview 5 Screen & Profile Overview

185

Option H20

The H20 initial configuration filename is H20 Axx, SVGA, MP40-50, initial, F.0x.xx, Rev xxx.cfg.

Profiles

Profile

Name

Default Locked

Patient

Cat.

Paced Mode Display

Monitor

Settings Block

Meas.

Settings Block

Neo yes yes Neo Non-Paced A08: OxyCRG A

A06: OxyCRG A

A04: OxyCRG

Monitor A Measmt. Neo

Pedi no yes Pedi Non-Paced Monitor A Measmt. Pedi

Monitor Settings Blocks Measurement Settings Blocks

Name Locked Name Locked

Monitor A yes Measmt. Neo yes

Measmt. Pedi yes

Screens

A08 Locked A06 Locked A04 Locked

Service A no Service A no Service A no

OxyCRG Ano OxyCRG Ano OxyCRG no

OxyCRG B no OxyCRG B no Screen A no

Screen A no Screen A no Screen B no

Screen B no Screen B no Screen C no

Screen C no Screen C no Screen D no

Screen D no Screen D no Screen E no

Screen E no Screen E no Screen F no

ProtocolWatch no ProtocolWatch no ProtocolWatch no

Horizon no Horizon no Horizon no

Big Numerics no Big Numerics no Big Numerics no

12 Lead ECG no 12 Lead ECG no 12 Lead ECG no

Visitors no Visitors no Visitors no

5 Screen & Profile Overview MP40/MP50 Configuration Overview

186

Option H30

The H30 initial configuration filename is H30 Axx, SVGA, MP40-50, initial, F.0x.xx, Rev xxx.cfg.

Profiles

Profile

Name

Default Locked

Patient

Cat.

Paced Mode Display

Monitor

Settings Block

Meas.

Settings Block

Adult yes yes Adult Paced Screen A Monitor A Measmt. Adult

Pedi no yes Pedi Non-Paced Screen A Monitor A Measmt. Pedi

Neo no yes Neo Non-Paced Screen A Monitor A Measmt. Neo

Monitor Settings Blocks Measurement Settings Blocks

Name Locked Name Locked

Monitor A yes Measmt. Adult yes

Measmt. Pedi yes

Measmt. Neo yes

Screens

A08 Locked A06 Locked A04 Locked

Service A no Service A no Service A no

Screen A no Screen A no Screen A no

Screen B no Screen B no Screen B no

Screen C no Screen C no Screen C no

Screen D no Screen D no Screen D no

Screen E no Screen E no Screen E no

Screen F no Screen F no Screen F no

Screen G no Screen G no Screen G no

ProtocolWatch no ProtocolWatch no ProtocolWatch no

Horizon no Horizon no Horizon no

Big Numerics no Big Numerics no Big Numerics no

12 Lead ECG no 12 Lead ECG no 12 Lead ECG no

Visitors no Visitors no Visitors no

MP40/MP50 Configuration Overview 5 Screen & Profile Overview

187

Option H40

The H40 initial configuration filename is H40 Axx, SVGA, MP40-50, initial, F.0x.xx, Rev xxx.cfg.

Profiles

Profile

Name

Default Locked

Patient

Cat.

Paced Mode Display

Monitor

Settings Block

Meas.

Settings Block

Adult yes yes Adult Paced Screen A Monitor A Measmt. Adult

Pedi no yes Pedi Non-Paced Screen A Monitor A Measmt. Pedi

Neo no yes Neo Non-Paced Screen A Monitor A Measmt. Neo

Monitor Settings Blocks Measurement Settings Blocks

Name Locked Name Locked

Monitor A yes Measmt. Adult yes

Measmt. Pedi yes

Measmt. Neo yes

Screens

A08 Locked A06 Locked A04 Locked

Service A no Service A no Service A no

Screen AnoScreen AnoScreen Ano

Screen Bno Screen Bno Screen Bno

Screen Cno Screen Cno Screen Cno

Screen Dno Screen Dno Screen Dno

Screen Eno Screen Eno Screen Eno

Screen Fno Screen Fno Screen Fno

Screen Gno Screen Gno Screen Gno

ProtocolWatch no ProtocolWatch no ProtocolWatch no

Horizon no Horizon no Horizon no

Big Numerics no Big Numerics no Big Numerics no

12 Lead ECG no 12 Lead ECG no 12 Lead ECG no

Visitors no Visitors no Visitors no

5 Screen & Profile Overview MP20/MP30 Configuration Overview

188

MP20/MP30 Configuration Overview

For an overview of the configurations supplied with the models MP20 Junior and MP20L, see “MP20

Junior & MP20L Configuration Overview” on page 192.

Option H10

The H10 initial configuration filename is H10 Axx, SVGA, MP20-30, initial, F.0x.xx, Rev xxx.cfg.

Profiles

Profile

Name

Default Locked

Patient

Cat.

Paced Mode Display

Monitor

Settings Block

Meas.

Settings Block

Adult yes yes Adult Paced Screen A Monitor A Measmt. Adult

Pedi no yes Pedi Non-Paced Screen A Monitor A Measmt. Pedi

Neo no yes Neo Non-Paced Screen A Monitor A Measmt. Neo

Monitor Settings Blocks Measurement Settings Blocks

Name Locked Name Locked

Monitor A yes Measmt. Adult yes

Measmt. Pedi yes

Measmt. Neo yes

Screens

A06 Locked A04 Locked A03 Locked

Service A no Service A no Service A no

Screen A no Screen A no Screen A no

Screen B no Screen B no Screen B no

Screen C no Screen C no Screen C no

Screen D no Screen D no Screen D no

Screen E no Screen E no Screen E no

Screen F no Screen F no Screen F no

Screen G no Screen G no Screen G no

Horizon no Horizon no Horizon no

Big Numerics no Big Numerics no Big Numerics no

12 Lead ECG no 12 Lead ECG no 12 Lead ECG no

Visitors no Visitors no Visitors no

MP20/MP30 Configuration Overview 5 Screen & Profile Overview

189

Option H20

The H20 initial configuration filename is H20 Axx, SVGA, MP20-30, initial, F.0x.xx, Rev xxx.cfg.

Profiles

Profile

Name

Default Locked

Patient

Cat.

Paced Mode Display

Monitor

Settings Block

Meas.

Settings Block

Pedi no yes Pedi Non-Paced A06: OxyCRG A

A04: OxyCRG

A03: CRG

Monitor A Measmt. Pedi

Neo no yes Neo Non-Paced Monitor A Measmt. Neo

Monitor Settings Blocks Measurement Settings Blocks

Name Locked Name Locked

Monitor A yes Measmt. Pedi yes

Measmt. Neo yes

Screens

A06 Locked A04 Locked A03 Locked

Service A no Service A no Service A no

OxyCRG A no OxyCRG no CRG no

OxyCRG B no Screen A no Screen A no

Screen A no Screen B no Screen B no

Screen B no Screen C no Screen C no

Screen C no Screen D no Screen D no

Screen D no Screen E no Screen E no

Screen E no Screen F no Screen F no

Horizon no Horizon no Horizon no

Big Numerics no Big Numerics no Big Numerics no

12 Lead ECG no 12 Lead ECG no 12 Lead ECG no

Visitors no Visitors no Visitors no

5 Screen & Profile Overview MP20/MP30 Configuration Overview

190

Option H30

The H30 initial configuration filename is H30 Axx, SVGA, MP20-30, initial, F.0x.xx, Rev xxx.cfg.

Profiles

Profile

Name

Default Locked

Patient

Cat.

Paced Mode Display

Monitor

Settings Block

Meas.

Settings Block

Adult yes yes Adult Paced Screen A Monitor A Measmt. Adult

Pedi no yes Pedi Non-Paced Screen A Monitor A Measmt. Pedi

Neo no yes Neo Non-Paced Screen A Monitor A Measmt. Neo

Monitor Settings Blocks Measurement Settings Blocks

Name Locked Name Locked

Monitor A yes Measmt. Adult yes

Measmt. Pedi yes

Measmt. Neo yes

Screens

A06 Locked A04 Locked A03 Locked

Service A no Service A no Service A no

Screen A no Screen A no Screen A no

Screen B no Screen B no Screen B no

Screen C no Screen C no Screen C no

Screen D no Screen D no Screen D no

Screen E no Screen E no Screen E no

Screen F no Screen F no Screen F no

Screen G no Screen G no Screen G no

Horizon no Horizon no Horizon no

Big Numerics no Big Numerics no Big Numerics no

12 Lead ECG no 12 Lead ECG no 12 Lead ECG no

Visitors no Visitors no Visitors no

MP20/MP30 Configuration Overview 5 Screen & Profile Overview

191

Option H40

The H40 initial configuration filename is H40 Axx, SVGA, MP20-30, initial, F.0x.xx, Rev xxx.cfg.

Profiles

Profile

Name

Default Locked

Patient

Cat.

Paced Mode Display

Monitor

Settings Block

Meas.

Settings Block

Adult yes yes Adult Paced Screen A Monitor A Measmt. Adult

Pedi no yes Pedi Non-Paced Screen A Monitor A Measmt. Pedi

Neo no yes Neo Non-Paced Screen A Monitor A Measmt. Neo

Monitor Settings Blocks Measurement Settings Blocks

Name Locked Name Locked

Monitor A yes Measmt. Adult yes

Measmt. Pedi yes

Measmt. Neo yes

Screens

A06 Locked A04 Locked A03 Locked

Service A no Service A no Service A no

Screen A no Screen A no Screen A no

Screen B no Screen B no Screen B no

Screen C no Screen C no Screen C no

Screen D no Screen D no Screen D no

Screen E no Screen E no Screen E no

Screen F no Screen F no Screen F no

Screen G no Screen G no Screen G no

Horizon no Horizon no Horizon no

Big Numerics no Big Numerics no Big Numerics no

12 Lead ECG no 12 Lead ECG no 12 Lead ECG no

Visitors no Visitors no Visitors no

5 Screen & Profile Overview MP20 Junior & MP20L Configuration Overview

192

MP20 Junior & MP20L Configuration Overview

MP20L is available in the US only.

Option H10

The H10 initial configuration filename is:

• for the MP20 Junior: H10 A03 M20, SVGA, MP20, initial, F.0x.xx, Rev xxx.cfg.

• for the MP20L: H10 A03 M21, SVGA, MP20, initial, F.0x.xx, Rev xxx.cfg.

Profiles

Profile

Name

Default Locked

Patient

Cat.

Paced Mode Display

Monitor

Settings Block

Meas.

Settings Block

Adult yes yes Adult Paced Screen A Monitor A Measmt. Adult

Pedi no yes Pedi Non-Paced Screen A Monitor A Measmt. Pedi

Neo no yes Neo Non-Paced Screen A Monitor A Measmt. Neo

Monitor Settings Blocks Measurement Settings Blocks

Name Locked Name Locked

Monitor A yes Measmt. Adult yes

Measmt. Pedi yes

Measmt. Neo yes

Screens: MP20 Junior (#M20) MP20L (#M21)

A03 Locked A03 Locked

Service A no Service A no

Screen A no Screen A no

Screen B no Screen B no

Big Numerics no Big Numerics no

Screen C no

Screen D no

Screen E no

Screen F no

Screen G no

12 Lead ECG no

MP20 Junior & MP20L Configuration Overview 5 Screen & Profile Overview

193

Option H20 (MP20 Junior only)

The H20 initial configuration filename for the MP20 Junior is:

H20 A03 M20, SVGA, MP20, initial, F.0x.xx, Rev xxx.cfg.

Profiles

Profile

Name

Default Locked

Patient

Cat.

Paced Mode Display

Monitor

Settings Block

Meas.

Settings Block

Pedi no yes Pedi Non-Paced A03: Screen A Monitor A Measmt. Pedi

Neo no yes Neo Non-Paced Monitor A Measmt. Neo

Monitor Settings Blocks Measurement Settings Blocks

Name Locked Name Locked

Monitor A yes Measmt. Pedi yes

Measmt. Neo yes

Screens

A03 Locked

Service A no

Screen A no

Screen B no

Big Numerics no

Screen C no

Screen D no

Screen E no

Screen F no

Screen G no

12 Lead ECG no

5 Screen & Profile Overview MP5 Configuration Overview

194

MP5 Configuration Overview

Option H10

The H10 initial configuration filename is H10 Axx, SVGA, MP5, initial, F.0x.xx, Rev xxx.cfg.

Profiles

Profile

Name

Default Locked

Patient

Cat.

Paced Mode Display

Monitor

Settings Block

Meas.

Settings Block

Adult yes yes Adult Paced 3 Waves Monitor A Measmt. Adult

Pedi no yes Pedi Non-Paced 3 Waves Monitor A Measmt. Pedi

Neo no yes Neo Non-Paced 3 Waves Monitor A Measmt. Neo

Monitor Settings Blocks Measurement Settings Blocks

Name Locked Name Locked

Monitor A yes Measmt. Adult yes

Measmt. Pedi yes

Measmt. Neo yes

Screens

A04 Locked A03 Locked

Service A no Service A no

1 Wave no 1 Wave no

2 Waves no 2 Waves no

3 Waves no 3 Waves no

4 Waves no Vital Signs no

Vital Signs no Split Screen no

Split Screen A no Other Bed no

Split Screen B no 12 Lead ECG no

Other Bed no

12 Lead ECG no

MP5 Configuration Overview 5 Screen & Profile Overview

195

Option H20

The H20 initial configuration filename is H20 Axx, SVGA, MP5, initial, F.0x.xx, Rev xxx.cfg.

Profiles

Profile

Name

Default Locked

Patient

Cat.

Paced Mode Display

Monitor

Settings Block

Meas.

Settings Block

Pedi no yes Pedi Non-Paced 3 Waves Monitor A Measmt. Pedi

Neo no yes Neo Non-Paced 3 Waves Monitor A Measmt. Neo

Monitor Settings Blocks Measurement Settings Blocks

Name Locked Name Locked

Monitor A yes Measmt. Adult yes

Measmt. Pedi yes

Measmt. Neo yes

Screens

A04 Locked A03 Locked

Service A no Service A no

1 Wave no 1 Wave no

2 Waves no 2 Waves no

3 Waves no 3 Waves no

4 Waves no CRG no

OxyCRG no Vital Signs no

Vital Signs no Split Screen no

Split Screen A no Other Bed no

Split Screen B no

Other Bed no

5 Screen & Profile Overview MP5T Configuration Overview

196

MP5T Configuration Overview

Option H10

The initial configuration filename is H10 A03, SVGA, MP5T, initial, F.0x.xx, Rev xxx.cfg.

Profiles

Profile

Name

Default Locked

Patient

Cat.

Paced Mode Display

Monitor

Settings Block

Meas.

Settings Block

Adult yes yes Adult Paced 3 Waves Monitor A Measmt. Adult

Pedi no yes Pedi Non-Paced 3 Waves Monitor A Measmt. Pedi

Neo no yes Neo Non-Paced 3 Waves Monitor A Measmt. Neo

Monitor Settings Blocks Measurement Settings Blocks

Name Locked Name Locked

Monitor A yes Measmt. Adult yes

Measmt. Pedi yes

Measmt. Neo yes

Screens Locked

Service A no

1 Wave no

2 Waves no

3 Waves no

Vital Signs no

ST Map no

12 Lead ECG no

MP2/X2 Configuration Overview 5 Screen & Profile Overview

197

MP2/X2 Configuration Overview

The initial configuration filename for the MP2 is MP2, QVGA, initial, F.0x.xx, Rev xxx.cfg

The initial configuration filename for the X2 is X2, QVGA, initial, F.0x.xx, Rev xxx.cfg

Profiles

Profile

Name

Default Locked

Patient

Cat.

Paced Mode Display

Monitor

Settings Block

Meas.

Settings Block

Adult yes yes Adult Paced 1 Wave A Monitor A Measmt. Adult

Pedi no yes Pedi Non-Paced 1 Wave A Monitor A Measmt. Pedi

Neo no yes Neo Non-Paced 1 Wave A Monitor A Measmt. Neo

Outdoor no no Adult Paced 1 Wave A Outdoor Outdoor

Monitor Settings Blocks Measurement Settings Blocks

Name Locked Name Locked

Monitor A yes Measmt. Adult yes

Outdoor no Measmt. Pedi yes

Measmt. Neo yes

Outdoor no

Screens Locked

Service A

Big Numerics no

10 Numerics no

Vital Signs A no

1 Wave A no

1 Wave B no

1 Big Wave no

Vital Signs B no

2 Waves A no

2 Waves B no

3 Waves no

Vital Signs no

Horizon no

ST Map no

12 Lead ECG no

Visitors no

5 Screen & Profile Overview Screen Overview

198

Screen Overview

The tables starting on the next page list the file names of all Screens supplied with the initial and demo

configurations for IntelliVue patient monitor release F.0.

There is a section for each of the monitor models. For some of the models, you will find a list of Demo

Screens available when using the demo configuration file in a monitor. These Screens are also part of the

Support Tool Screen Library.

To view or print bitmaps of all Screens supplied with a specific initial or demo configuration, on the

Documentation DVD supplied with your IntelliVue monitor, navigate to the folder

Documentation\F.0\Configuration Guide\Screen Configurations\MPxx-

MPxx and open/print the pdf document that has the same name as the required configuration file. For

example if you want to print all Screens contained in the initial F.0 configuration for an MP70 with

application area option H10 and wave option A08, you would open the

“H10 A08, XGA, MP60-90, initial, F.0x.xx, Rev xxx.pdf”.

Screen Overview -Table of Contents

Monitor Model Screens sorted by H Option Page

MP60/70/80/90 MP60-90

Option H10 Screens 199

MP60-90

Option H10 Screens (continued) 200

MP60-90

Option H30 Screens 203

MP60-90

Option H40 Screens 205

MP60-90

Demo Configuration Screens 207

MP40/50 MP40/50

Option H10 Screens 208

MP40/5

0 Option H20 Screens 209

MP40/50

Option H30 Screens 210

MP40/5

0 Option H40 Screens 211

MP40/50

Demo Configuration Screens 212

MP20/30 MP20/

30 Option H10 Screens 213

MP20/30

Option H20 Screens 214

MP20/3

0Option H30 Screens 215

MP20/3

0 Option H40 Screens 216

MP20/3

0Demo Configuration Screens 217

MP20 Junior & MP20L MP2

0 M20/M21 Option H10 Screens 218

MP20

M20 Option H20 Screens 218

MP5 MP5

Option H10 Screens 219

MP5

Option H20 Screens 220

5 Option H30 Screens 221

MP5

Option H40 Screens 222

5 Demo Configuration Screens 223

MP5T MP5T Screen Overview

224

MP2/X2 MP2/X2 Screen Overview

225

MP60/MP70/MP80/MP90 Screen Overview 5 Screen & Profile Overview

199

MP60/MP70/MP80/MP90 Screen Overview

MP60-90 Option H10 Screens

Name File

Service A S-01W-01HighRes-service_A-xga

Screen A G-12W-5Press-1x4ovl-1split01-xga

Screen B G-08W-3Press-xga

Screen C G-08W-3Press-1x3ovl-xga

Screen D G-08W-3Press-2x2ovl-xga

Screen E G-06W-2Press-xga

Screen F G-06W-2Press-1x3ovl-xga

Protocol Watch G-04W-PW-SSC-01-xga

Horizon G-06W-Hor06Tr-01-xga

Big Numerics G-03W-bigNumerics-xga

12 Lead ECG C-13W-12Lead-Ovv-Split-ST-snippets-STmap-01-xga

Visitors G-00W-visitor-screen01-xga

Service A S-01W-01HighRes-service_A-xga

Screen A G-08W-3Press-xga

Screen B G-08W-3Press-1x3ovl-xga

Screen C G-08W-3Press-2x2ovl-xga

Screen D G-06W-2Press-xga

Screen E G-06W-2Press-1x3ovl-xga

Screen F G-04W-2Press-xga

Protocol Watch G-04W-PW-SSC-01-xga

Horizon G-06W-Hor06Tr-01-xga

Big Numerics G-03W-bigNumerics-xga

12 Lead ECG C-13W-12Lead-Ovv-Split-ST-snippets-STmap-01-xga

Visitors G-00W-visitor-screen01-xga

Service A S-01W-01HighRes-service_A-xga

Screen A G-06W-2Press-xga

Screen B G-06W-2Press-1x2ovl-xga

Screen C G-06W-2Press-1x3ovl-xga

Screen D G-04W-2Press-xga

Screen E G-04W-2Press-1x2ovl-xga

Protocol Watch G-04W-1Tr-PW-SSC-01-xga

Horizon G-06W-Hor06Tr-01-xga

Big Numerics G-03W-bigNumerics-xga

EEG CSA G-05W-CSA-xga

12 Lead ECG C-13W-12Lead-Ovv-Split-ST-snippets-STmap-01-xga

Visitors G-00W-visitor-screen01-xga

H10 A12, XGA, MP90

H10 A08, XGA, MP60-90

H10 A06, XGA, MP60-90

5 Screen & Profile Overview MP60/MP70/MP80/MP90 Screen Overview

200

MP60-90 Option H10 Screens (continued)

Name File

Service A S-01W-01HighRes-service_A-xga

Screen A G-04W-2Press-xga

Screen B G-04W-2Press-1x2ovl-xga

Protocol Watch G-04W-1Tr-PW-SSC-01-xga

Horizon G-04W-Hor06Tr-01-xga

Big Numerics G-03W-bigNumerics-xga

EEG CSA G-04W-CSA-xga

12 Lead ECG C-13W-12Lead-Ovv-Split-ST-snippets-STmap-01-xga

Visitors G-00W-visitor-screen01-xga

H10 A04, XGA, MP60-90

MP60/MP70/MP80/MP90 Screen Overview 5 Screen & Profile Overview

201

MP60-90 Option H20 Screens

Name File

Service A S-01W-01HighRes-service_A-xga

Oxy CRG A N-07W-04HighRes-3split01-xga

Oxy CRG B N-03W-03HighRes-2Press-xga

Oxy CRG C N-03W-04HighRes-Events-xga

Screen A G-08W-3Press-xga

Screen B G-08W-3Press-1x3ovl-xga

Screen C G-06W-2Press-xga

Protocol Watch G-04W-PW-SSC-01-xga

Horizon G-06W-Hor06Tr-01-xga

Big Numerics G-03W-bigNumerics-xga

12 Lead ECG C-13W-12Lead-Ovv-Split-ST-snippets-STmap-01-xga

Visitors G-00W-visitor-screen01-xga

Service A S-01W-01HighRes-service_A-xga

Oxy CRG A N-03W-03HighRes-2Press-xga

Oxy CRG B N-03W-04HighRes-Events-xga

Screen A G-08W-3Press-xga

Screen B G-08W-3Press-1x3ovl-xga

Screen C G-06W-2Press-xga

Screen D G-04W-2Press-xga

Protocol Watch G-04W-PW-SSC-01-xga

Horizon G-06W-Hor06Tr-01-xga

Big Numerics G-03W-bigNumerics-xga

12 Lead ECG C-13W-12Lead-Ovv-Split-ST-snippets-STmap-01-xga

Visitors G-00W-visitor-screen01-xga

Service A S-01W-01HighRes-service_A-xga

Oxy CRG A N-02W-03HighRes-1Press-xga

Oxy CRG B N-03W-03HighRes-2Press-xga

Screen A G-06W-2Press-xga

Screen B G-06W-2Press-1x3ovl-xga

Screen C G-04W-2Press-xga

Screen D G-04W-2Press-1x2ovl-xga

Protocol Watch G-04W-1Tr-PW-SSC-01-xga

Horizon G-06W-Hor06Tr-01-xga

Big Numerics G-03W-bigNumerics-xga

12 Lead ECG C-13W-12Lead-Ovv-Split-ST-snippets-STmap-01-xga

Visitors G-00W-visitor-screen01-xga

H20 A12, XGA, MP90

H20 A08, XGA, MP60-90

H20 A06, XGA, MP60-90

5 Screen & Profile Overview MP60/MP70/MP80/MP90 Screen Overview

202

MP60-90 Option H20 Screens (continued)

Name File

Service A S-01W-01HighRes-service_A-xga

OxyCRG N-01W-03HighRes-xga

Screen A G-04W-2Press-xga

Screen B G-04W-2Press-1x2ovl-xga

Protocol Watch G-04W-1Tr-PW-SSC-01-xga

Horizon G-04W-Hor06Tr-01-xga

Big Numerics G-03W-bigNumerics-xga

EEG CSA G-04W-CSA-xga

12 Lead ECG C-13W-12Lead-Ovv-Split-ST-snippets-STmap-01-xga

Visitors G-00W-visitor-screen01-xga

H20 A04, XGA, MP60-90

MP60/MP70/MP80/MP90 Screen Overview 5 Screen & Profile Overview

203

MP60-90 Option H30 Screens

Name File

Service A S-01W-01HighRes-service_A-xga

Screen A A-11W-5Press-1x4ovl-2split01-1Tr-BIS-xga

Screen B A-07W-1Tr-BIS-01-xga

Screen C A-08W-3Press-1x3ovl-xga

Screen D A-08W-3Press-2x2ovl-xga

Screen E A-06W-2Press-xga

Screen F A-06W-2Press-1x3ovl-xga

Protocol Watch G-04W-PW-SSC-01-xga

Horizon A-06W-Hor06Tr-01-xga

Big Numerics A-03W-BigN-BIS01-xga

12 Lead ECG A-13W-12Lead-Split-ST-snippets-STmap-01-xga

Visitors G-00W-visitor-screen01-xga

Service A S-01W-01HighRes-service_A-xga

Screen A A-07W-1Tr-BIS-01-xga

Screen B A-08W-3Press-1x3ovl-xga

Screen C A-08W-3Press-2x2ovl-xga

Screen D A-06W-2Press-xga

Screen E A-06W-2Press-1x3ovl-xga

Screen F A-04W-2Press-xga

Protocol Watch G-04W-PW-SSC-01-xga

Horizon A-06W-Hor06Tr-01-xga

Big Numerics A-03W-BigN-BIS01-xga

12 Lead ECG A-13W-12Lead-Split-ST-snippets-STmap-01-xga

Visitors G-00W-visitor-screen01-xga

Service A S-01W-01HighRes-service_A-xga

Screen A A-04W-1Tr-BIS-01-xga

Screen B A-06W-2Press-1-xga

Screen C A-06W-2Press-1x2ovl-xga

Screen D A-06W-2Press-1x3ovl-xga

Screen E A-04W-2Press-xga

Screen F A-04W-2Press-1x2ovl-xga

Protocol Watch G-04W-1Tr-PW-SSC-01-xga

Horizon A-06W-Hor06Tr-01-xga

Big Numerics A-03W-BigN-BIS01-xga

12 Lead ECG A-13W-12Lead-Split-ST-snippets-STmap-01-xga

Visitors G-00W-visitor-screen01-xga

H30 A12, XGA, MP90

H30 A08, XGA, MP60-90

H30 A06, XGA, MP60-90

5 Screen & Profile Overview MP60/MP70/MP80/MP90 Screen Overview

204

MP60-90 Option H30 Screens (continued)

Name File

Service A S-01W-01HighRes-service_A-xga

Screen A A-04W-BIS01-xga

Screen B A-04W-2Press-1-xga

Screen C A-04W-2Press-1x2ovl-1-xga

Protocol Watch G-04W-1Tr-PW-SSC-01-xga

Horizon A-04W-Hor06Tr-01-xga

Big Numerics A-03W-BigN-BIS01-xga

EEG CSA A-04W-CSA-xga

12 Lead ECG A-13W-12Lead-Split-ST-snippets-STmap-01-xga

Visitors G-00W-visitor-screen01-xga

H30 A04, XGA, MP60-90

MP60/MP70/MP80/MP90 Screen Overview 5 Screen & Profile Overview

205

MP60-90 Option H40 Screens

Name File

Service A S-01W-01HighRes-service_A-xga

Screen A C-12W-5Press-1x4ovl-1split01-xga

Screen B C-08W-3Press-xga

Screen C C-08W-3Press-1x3ovl-xga

Screen D C-08W-3Press-2x2ovl-xga

Screen E C-06W-2Press-xga

Screen F C-06W-2Press-1x3ovl-xga

Protocol Watch G-04W-PW-SSC-01-xga

Horizon C-06W-Hor06Tr-01-xga

Big Numerics G-03W-bigNumerics-xga

12 Lead ECG C-13W-12Lead-Ovv-Split-ST-snippets-STmap-01-xga

Visitors G-00W-visitor-screen01-xga

Service A S-01W-01HighRes-service_A-xga

Screen A C-08W-3Press-xga

Screen B C-08W-3Press-1x3ovl-xga

Screen C C-08W-3Press-2x2ovl-xga

Screen D C-06W-2Press-xga

Screen E C-06W-2Press-1x3ovl-xga

Screen F C-04W-2Press-xga

Protocol Watch G-04W-PW-SSC-01-xga

Horizon C-06W-Hor06Tr-01-xga

Big Numerics G-03W-bigNumerics-xga

12 Lead ECG C-13W-12Lead-Ovv-Split-ST-snippets-STmap-01-xga

Visitors G-00W-visitor-screen01-xga

Service A S-01W-01HighRes-service_A-xga

Screen A C-06W-2Press-xga

Screen B C-06W-2Press-1x2ovl-xga

Screen C C-06W-2Press-1x3ovl-xga

Screen D C-04W-2Press-xga

Screen E C-04W-2Press-1x2ovl-xga

Protocol Watch G-04W-1Tr-PW-SSC-01-xga

Horizon C-06W-Hor06Tr-01-xga

Big Numerics G-03W-bigNumerics-xga

EEG CSA C-05W-CSA-xga

12 Lead ECG C-13W-12Lead-Ovv-Split-ST-snippets-STmap-01-xga

Visitors G-00W-visitor-screen01-xga

H40 A08, XGA, MP60-90

H40 A06, XGA, MP60-90

H40 A12, XGA, MP90

5 Screen & Profile Overview MP60/MP70/MP80/MP90 Screen Overview

206

MP60-90 Option H40 Screens (continued)

Name File

Service A S-01W-01HighRes-service_A-xga

Screen A C-04W-2Press-xga

Screen B C-04W-2Press-1x2ovl-xga

Protocol Watch G-04W-1Tr-PW-SSC-01-xga

Horizon C-04W-Hor06Tr-01-xga

Big Numerics G-03W-bigNumerics-xga

EEG CSA C-04W-CSA-xga

12 Lead ECG C-13W-12Lead-Ovv-Split-ST-snippets-STmap-01-xga

Visitors G-00W-visitor-screen01-xga

H40 A04, XGA, MP60-90

MP60/MP70/MP80/MP90 Screen Overview 5 Screen & Profile Overview

207

MP60-90 Demo Configuration Screens

Name File

Service A S-01W-01HighRes-service_A-xga

Big Numerics G-03W-bigNumerics-02-xga

4 Waves A G-04W-2Press-xga

6 Waves A A-06W-1Tr-2Press-xga

Overlapping G-08W-3Press-2x2ovl-xga

Split Screen G-08W-3Press-Split-ScreenTrend-xga

Graph Trends G-00W-8Tr-only-01-xga

HighResTrend N-03W-04HighRes-3Press-EventSum-xga

Vital Signs A G-05W-2Tr-TrA-01-xga

Horizon A-06W-Hor06Tr-01-xga

Protocol Watch G-04W-1Tr-PW-SSC-01-xga

2 Other Beds G-04W-2Ovv02W-01-xga

Telemetry G-01W-Tele02W-02-xga

Loops G-06W-Loops-SpiroData-01-xga

Cardiac Output A-04W-cardiacOut-xga

Wedge A-06W-wedge1-xga

VueLink A-07W-2Press-1x2ovl-VueLink-1Tr-xga

12 Lead ECG C-13W-12Lead-Ovv-Split-ST-snippets-STmap-01-xga

ST Segments C-05W-2Press-03ST-snippets-xga

Remote Applic. G-01W-PT-01-xga

Visitors G-00W-visitor-screen01-xga

DEMO, XGA, MP60-90

Name File

Service A S-01W-01HighRes-service_A-xga

Overlapping G-08W-3Press-2x2ovl-xga

Split Screen G-08W-3Press-Tr-left-split-xga

Graph Trends G-00W-8Tr-only-01-xga

HighResTrend N-03W-04HighRes-3Press-EventSum-xga

Vital Signs G-05W-2Tr-TrA-01-xga

Horizon G-08W-Hor06Tr-01-sxga

Protocol Watch G-04W-PW-SSC-01-xga

Other Bed G-06W-1Ovv02W-1Tr-01-xga

4 Other Beds G-03W-4Ovv02W-Tr-left-split-sxga

Telemetry G-01W-Tele02W-02-xga

Loops G-06W-Loops-SpiroData-01-xga

Cardiac Output A-04W-cardiacOut-xga

Wedge A-06W-wedge1-xga

VueLink A-07W-2Press-1x2ovl-VueLink-1Tr-xga

12 Lead ECG C-13W-12Lead-Ovv-Split-ST-snippets-STmap-01-xga

Remote Applic A G-01W-PT-01-xga

Remote Applic B G-00W-PT-Full-2nd-01-xga

Wide Screen G-08W-TrA-wide-10Tr-01-xga

Tall Screen G-07W-tall-02W-Loops-TrA-sxga

12 Waves G-12W-1x3ovl-2x2ovl-1split-sxga

DEMO, SXGA, MP90

5 Screen & Profile Overview MP40/MP50 Screen Overview

208

MP40/MP50 Screen Overview

MP40/50 Option H10 Screens

Name File

Service A S-02W-nbp-diag-svga

Screen A G-08W-3Press-01-svga

Screen B G-06W-2Press-01-svga

Screen C G-06W-2Press-1x2ovl-01-svga

Screen D G-06W-2Press-split-Tr-01-svga

Screen E G-04W-1Press-01-svga

Screen F G-04W-1Press-1Tr-02-svga

Screen G G-04W-1Press-split-Tr-01-svga

Protocol Watch G-03W-1Tr-PW-SSC-01-svga

Horizon G-04W-Hor06Tr-01-svga

Big Numerics G-03W-bigNumerics-01-svga

12 Lead ECG C-13W-12Lead-STmap-01-svga

Visitors G-00W-visitor-screen-01-svga

Service A S-02W-nbp-diag-svga

Screen A G-06W-2Press-01-svga

Screen B G-06W-2Press-1x2ovl-01-svga

Screen C G-06W-2Press-split-Tr-01-svga

Screen D G-04W-1Press-01-svga

Screen E G-04W-1Press-1Tr-02-svga

Screen F G-04W-1Press-split-Tr-01-svga

Screen G G-03W-1Tr-02-svga

Protocol Watch G-03W-1Tr-PW-SSC-01-svga

Horizon G-04W-Hor06Tr-01-svga

Big Numerics G-03W-bigNumerics-01-svga

12 Lead ECG C-13W-12Lead-STmap-01-svga

Visitors G-00W-visitor-screen-01-svga

Service A S-02W-nbp-diag-svga

Screen A G-04W-1Press-01-svga

Screen B G-04W-1Press-1Tr-02-svga

Screen C G-04W-2Press-1x2ovl-01-svga

Screen D G-04W-1Press-split-Tr-01-svga

Screen E G-03W-01-svga

Screen F G-03W-1Tr-02-svga

Screen G G-03W-split-Tr-01-svga

Protocol Watch G-03W-1Tr-PW-SSC-01-svga

Horizon G-03W-Hor05Tr-01-svga

Big Numerics G-03W-bigNumerics-01-svga

12 Lead ECG C-13W-12Lead-STmap-01-svga

Visitors G-00W-visitor-screen-01-svga

H10 A08, SVGA, MP40-50

H10 A06, SVGA, MP40-50

H10 A04, SVGA, MP40-50

MP40/MP50 Screen Overview 5 Screen & Profile Overview

209

MP40/50 Option H20 Screens

Name File

Service A S-02W-nbp-diag-svga

OxyCRG A N-03W-03HW-event-01-svga

OxyCRG B N-01W-03HW-event-01-svga

Screen A G-08W-3Press-01-svga

Screen B G-06W-2Press-01-svga

Screen C G-06W-2Press-1x2ovl-01-svga

Screen D G-04W-1Press-01-svga

Screen E G-04W-1Press-1Tr-02-svga

Protocol Watch G-03W-1Tr-PW-SSC-01-svga

Horizon G-04W-Hor06Tr-01-svga

Big Numerics G-03W-bigNumerics-01-svga

12 Lead ECG C-13W-12Lead-STmap-01-svga

Visitors G-00W-visitor-screen-01-svga

Service A S-02W-nbp-diag-svga

OxyCRG A N-03W-03HW-event-01-svga

OxyCRG B N-01W-03HW-event-01-svga

Screen A G-06W-2Press-01-svga

Screen B G-06W-2Press-1x2ovl-01-svga

Screen C G-04W-1Press-01-svga

Screen D G-04W-1Press-1Tr-02-svga

Screen E G-03W-1Tr-02-svga

Protocol Watch G-03W-1Tr-PW-SSC-01-svga

Horizon G-04W-Hor06Tr-01-svga

Big Numerics G-03W-bigNumerics-01-svga

12 Lead ECG C-13W-12Lead-STmap-01-svga

Visitors G-00W-visitor-screen-01-svga

Service A S-02W-nbp-diag-svga

OxyCRG N-01W-03HW-event-01-svga

Screen A G-04W-1Press-01-svga

Screen B G-04W-1Press-1Tr-02-svga

Screen C G-04W-2Press-1x2ovl-01-svga

Screen D G-03W-01-svga

Screen E G-03W-1Tr-02-svga

Screen F G-03W-split-Tr-01-svga

Protocol Watch G-03W-1Tr-PW-SSC-01-svga

Horizon G-03W-Hor05Tr-01-svga

Big Numerics G-03W-bigNumerics-01-svga

12 Lead ECG C-13W-12Lead-STmap-01-svga

Visitors G-00W-visitor-screen-01-svga

H20 A08, SVGA, MP40-50

H20 A06, SVGA, MP40-50

H20 A04, SVGA, MP40-50

5 Screen & Profile Overview MP40/MP50 Screen Overview

210

MP40/50 Option H30 Screens

Name File

Service A S-02W-nbp-diag-svga

Screen A A-08W-3Press-01-svga

Screen B A-05W-2Press-1Tr-BIS-01-svga

Screen C A-06W-2Press-01-svga

Screen D A-06W-2Press-1Tr-01-svga

Screen E A-06W-2Press-1x2ovl-01-svga

Screen F A-06W-2Press-split-Tr-01-svga

Screen G A-04W-1Press-1Tr-02-svga

Protocol Watch G-03W-1Tr-PW-SSC-01-svga

Horizon A-04W-Hor06Tr-01-svga

Big Numerics A-03W-bigNumerics-01-svga

12 Lead ECG A-13W-12Lead-STmap-01-svga

Visitors G-00W-visitor-screen-01-svga

Service A S-02W-nbp-diag-svga

Screen A A-05W-2Press-1Tr-BIS-01-svga

Screen B A-06W-2Press-01-svga

Screen C A-06W-2Press-1Tr-01-svga

Screen D A-06W-2Press-1x2ovl-01-svga

Screen E A-06W-2Press-split-Tr-01-svga

Screen F A-04W-1Press-1Tr-02-svga

Screen G A-04W-1Press-02-svga

Protocol Watch G-03W-1Tr-PW-SSC-01-svga

Horizon A-04W-Hor06Tr-01-svga

Big Numerics A-03W-bigNumerics-01-svga

12 Lead ECG A-13W-12Lead-STmap-01-svga

Visitors G-00W-visitor-screen-01-svga

Service A S-02W-nbp-diag-svga

Screen A A-04W-1Press-1TrBIS-01-svga

Screen B A-04W-1Press-1Tr-02-svga

Screen C A-04W-1Press-02-svga

Screen D A-04W-2Press-1x2ovl-02-svga

Screen E A-04W-1Press-split-Tr-02-svga

Screen F A-03W-01-svga

Screen G A-03W-1Tr-01-svga

Protocol Watch G-03W-1Tr-PW-SSC-01-svga

Horizon A-03W-Hor05Tr-01-svga

Big Numerics A-03W-bigNumerics-01-svga

12 Lead ECG A-13W-12Lead-STmap-01-svga

Visitors G-00W-visitor-screen-01-svga

H30 A06, SVGA, MP40-50

H30 A04, SVGA, MP40-50

H30 A08, SVGA, MP40-50

MP40/MP50 Screen Overview 5 Screen & Profile Overview

211

MP40/50 Option H40 Screens

Name File

Service A S-02W-nbp-diag-svga

Screen A C-08W-3Press-01-svga

Screen B C-06W-2Press-01-svga

Screen C C-06W-2Press-1x2ovl-01-svga

Screen D C-06W-2Press-split-Tr-01-svga

Screen E C-05W-03ST-snippets-01-svga

Screen F C-04W-1Press-1Tr-02-svga

Screen G C-04W-1Press-split-Tr-01-svga

Protocol Watch G-03W-1Tr-PW-SSC-01-svga

Horizon C-04W-Hor06Tr-01-svga

Big Numerics G-03W-bigNumerics-01-svga

12 Lead ECG C-13W-12Lead-STmap-01-svga

Visitors G-00W-visitor-screen-01-svga

Service A S-02W-nbp-diag-svga

Screen A C-06W-2Press-01-svga

Screen B C-06W-2Press-1x2ovl-01-svga

Screen C C-06W-2Press-split-Tr-01-svga

Screen D C-05W-03ST-snippets-01-svga

Screen E C-04W-1Press-01-svga

Screen F C-04W-1Press-1Tr-02-svga

Screen G C-04W-1Press-split-Tr-01-svga

Protocol Watch G-03W-1Tr-PW-SSC-01-svga

Horizon C-04W-Hor06Tr-01-svga

Big Numerics G-03W-bigNumerics-01-svga

12 Lead ECG C-13W-12Lead-STmap-01-svga

Visitors G-00W-visitor-screen-01-svga

Service A S-02W-nbp-diag-svga

Screen A C-04W-1Press-01-svga

Screen B C-04W-1Press-1Tr-02-svga

Screen C C-04W-2Press-1x2ovl-01-svga

Screen D C-04W-1Press-split-Tr-01-svga

Screen E C-03W-03ST-snippets-01-svga

Screen F C-03W-1Tr-02-svga

Screen G C-03W-split-Tr-01-svga

Protocol Watch G-03W-1Tr-PW-SSC-01-svga

Horizon C-03W-Hor05Tr-01-svga

Big Numerics G-03W-bigNumerics-01-svga

12 Lead ECG C-13W-12Lead-STmap-01-svga

Visitors G-00W-visitor-screen-01-svga

H40 A06, SVGA, MP40-50

H40 A04, SVGA, MP40-50

H40 A08, SVGA, MP40-50

5 Screen & Profile Overview MP40/MP50 Screen Overview

212

MP40/50 Demo Configuration Screens

Name File

Service A S-02W-nbp-diag-svga

Big Numerics G-03W-bigNumerics-02-svga

4 Waves A G-04W-1Press-1Tr-02-svga

5 Waves A A-05W-2Press-1Tr-BIS-01-svga

6 Waves A G-06W-2Press-01-svga

Split Screen A G-06W-2Press-split-Tr-01-svga

HighResTrend N-01W-03HW-event-01-svga

Vital Signs A G-04W-TrA-01-svga

Protocol Watch G-03W-1Tr-PW-SSC-01-svga

Horizon A-03W-Hor05Tr-01-svga

Other Bed G-03W-1Ovv01W-01-svga

Telemetry G-01W-Tele02W-01-svga

Loops G-04W-2TrBIS-Loops-01-svga

Demo A G-03W-Loops-Spiro-01-svga

Cardiac Output G-04W-2Press-cardiac-out-01-svga

Wedge G-03W-1Press-wedge-01-svga

VueLink G-03W-1Press-vuelink-01-svga

12 Lead ECG C-13W-12Lead-STmap-01-svga

ST Segments C-05W-03ST-snippets-01-svga

Remote Applic. G-02W-PT-01-svga

Visitors G-00W-visitor-screen-01-svga

DEMO, SVGA, MP40-50

MP20/MP30 Screen Overview 5 Screen & Profile Overview

213

MP20/MP30 Screen Overview

MP20/30 Option H10 Screens

Name File

Service A S-02W-nbp-diag-svga

Screen A G-06W-2Press-01-svga

Screen B G-06W-2Press-1x2ovl-01-svga

Screen C G-06W-2Press-split-Tr-01-svga

Screen D G-04W-1Press-01-svga

Screen E G-04W-1Press-1Tr-02-svga

Screen F G-04W-1Press-split-Tr-01-svga

Screen G G-03W-1Tr-02-svga

Horizon G-04W-Hor06Tr-01-svga

Big Numerics G-03W-bigNumerics-01-svga

12 Lead ECG C-13W-12Lead-STmap-01-svga

Visitors G-00W-visitor-screen-01-svga

Service A S-02W-nbp-diag-svga

Screen A G-04W-1Press-01-svga

Screen B G-04W-1Press-1Tr-02-svga

Screen C G-04W-2Press-1x2ovl-01-svga

Screen D G-04W-1Press-split-Tr-01-svga

Screen E G-03W-01-svga

Screen F G-03W-1Tr-02-svga

Screen G G-03W-split-Tr-01-svga

Horizon G-03W-Hor05Tr-01-svga

Big Numerics G-03W-bigNumerics-01-svga

12 Lead ECG C-13W-12Lead-STmap-01-svga

Visitors G-00W-visitor-screen-01-svga

Service A S-02W-nbp-diag-svga

Screen A G-03W-01-svga

Screen B G-03W-02-svga

Screen C G-03W-1Tr-02-svga

Screen D G-03W-1x2ovl-01-svga

Screen E G-03W-split-Tr-01-svga

Screen F G-02W-ovv-1Tr-01-svga

Screen G G-02W-ovv-01-svga

Horizon G-03W-Hor05Tr-01-svga

Big Numerics G-03W-bigNumerics-01-svga

12 Lead ECG C-13W-12Lead-STmap-01-svga

Visitors G-00W-visitor-screen-01-svga

H10 A06, SVGA, MP20-30

H10 A04, SVGA, MP20-30

H10 A03, SVGA, MP20-30

5 Screen & Profile Overview MP20/MP30 Screen Overview

214

MP20/30 Option H20 Screens

Name File

Service A S-02W-nbp-diag-svga

OxyCRG A N-03W-03HW-event-01-svga

OxyCRG B N-01W-03HW-event-01-svga

Screen A G-06W-2Press-01-svga

Screen B G-06W-2Press-1x2ovl-01-svga

Screen C G-04W-1Press-01-svga

Screen D G-04W-1Press-1Tr-02-svga

Screen E G-03W-1Tr-02-svga

Horizon G-04W-Hor06Tr-01-svga-Rev004

Big Numerics G-03W-bigNumerics-01-svga

12 Lead ECG C-13W-12Lead-STmap-01-svga

Visitors G-00W-visitor-screen-01-svga

Service A S-02W-nbp-diag-svga

OxyCRG N-01W-03HW-event-01-svga

Screen A G-04W-1Press-01-svga

Screen B G-04W-1Press-1Tr-02-svga

Screen C G-04W-2Press-1x2ovl-01-svga

Screen D G-04W-1Press-split-Tr-01-svga

Screen E G-03W-01-svga

Screen F G-03W-1Tr-02-svga

Horizon G-03W-Hor05Tr-01-svga

Big Numerics G-03W-bigNumerics-01-svga

12 Lead ECG C-13W-12Lead-STmap-01-svga

Visitors G-00W-visitor-screen-01-svga

Service A S-02W-nbp-diag-svga

CRG N-01W-02HW-event-01-svga

Screen A G-03W-01-svga

Screen B G-03W-02-svga

Screen C G-03W-1Tr-02-svga

Screen D G-03W-1x2ovl-01-svga

Screen E G-03W-split-Tr-01-svga

Screen F G-02W-ovv-1Tr-01-svga

Horizon G-03W-Hor05Tr-01-svga

Big Numerics G-03W-bigNumerics-01-svga

12 Lead ECG C-13W-12Lead-STmap-01-svga

Visitors G-00W-visitor-screen-01-svga

H20 A06, SVGA, MP20-30

H20 A04, SVGA, MP20-30

H20 A03, SVGA, MP20-30

MP20/MP30 Screen Overview 5 Screen & Profile Overview

215

MP20/30Option H30 Screens

Name File

Service A S-02W-nbp-diag-svga

Screen A A-05W-2Press-1Tr-BIS-01-svga

Screen B A-06W-2Press-01-svga

Screen C A-06W-2Press-1Tr-01-svga

Screen D A-06W-2Press-1x2ovl-01-svga

Screen E A-06W-2Press-split-Tr-01-svga

Screen F A-04W-1Press-1Tr-02-svga

Screen G A-04W-1Press-02-svga

Horizon A-04W-Hor06Tr-01-svga

Big Numerics A-03W-bigNumerics-01-svga

12 Lead ECG A-13W-12Lead-STmap-01-svga

Visitors G-00W-visitor-screen-01-svga

Service A S-02W-nbp-diag-svga

Screen A A-04W-1Press-02-svga

Screen B A-04W-1Press-1Tr-02-svga

Screen C A-04W-2Press-1x2ovl-02-svga

Screen D A-04W-1Press-split-Tr-02-svga

Screen E A-03W-01-svga

Screen F A-03W-1Tr-02-svga

Screen G A-03W-split-Tr-01-svga

Horizon A-03W-Hor05Tr-01-svga

Big Numerics A-03W-bigNumerics-02-svga

12 Lead ECG A-13W-12Lead-STmap-01-svga

Visitors G-00W-visitor-screen-01-svga

Service A S-02W-nbp-diag-svga

Screen A A-03W-02-svga

Screen B A-03W-01-svga

Screen C A-03W-1Tr-02-svga

Screen D A-03W-1x2ovl-01-svga

Screen E A-03W-split-Tr-01-svga

Screen F A-02W-01-svga

Screen G A-02W-1Tr-01-svga

Horizon A-03W-Hor05Tr-01-svga

Big Numerics A-03W-bigNumerics-02-svga

12 Lead ECG A-13W-12Lead-STmap-01-svga

Visitors G-00W-visitor-screen-01-svga

H30 A04, SVGA, MP20-30

H30 A03, SVGA, MP20-30

H30 A06, SVGA, MP20-30

5 Screen & Profile Overview MP20/MP30 Screen Overview

216

MP20/30 Option H40 Screens

Name File

Service A S-02W-nbp-diag-svga

Screen A C-06W-2Press-01-svga

Screen B C-06W-2Press-1x2ovl-01-svga

Screen C C-06W-2Press-split-Tr-01-svga

Screen D C-05W-03ST-snippets-01-svga

Screen E C-04W-1Press-01-svga

Screen F C-04W-1Press-1Tr-02-svga

Screen G C-04W-1Press-split-Tr-01-svga

Horizon C-04W-Hor06Tr-01-svga

Big Numerics G-03W-bigNumerics-01-svga

12 Lead ECG C-13W-12Lead-STmap-01-svga

Visitors G-00W-visitor-screen-01-svga

Service A S-02W-nbp-diag-svga

Screen A C-04W-1Press-01-svga

Screen B C-04W-1Press-1Tr-02-svga

Screen C C-04W-2Press-1x2ovl-01-svga

Screen D C-04W-1Press-split-Tr-01-svga

Screen E C-03W-03ST-snippets-01-svga

Screen F C-03W-1Tr-02-svga

Screen G C-03W-split-Tr-01-svga

Horizon C-03W-Hor05Tr-01-svga

Big Numerics G-03W-bigNumerics-01-svga

12 Lead ECG C-13W-12Lead-STmap-01-svga

Visitors G-00W-visitor-screen-01-svga

Service A S-02W-nbp-diag-svga

Screen A C-03W-01-svga

Screen B C-03W-02-svga

Screen C C-03W-1Tr-02-svga

Screen D G-03W-1x2ovl-01-svga

Screen E C-03W-split-Tr-01-svga

Screen F C-02W-ovv-1Tr-01-svga

Screen G C-02W-ovv-01-svga

Horizon C-03W-Hor05Tr-01-svga

Big Numerics G-03W-bigNumerics-01-svga

12 Lead ECG C-13W-12Lead-STmap-01-svga

Visitors G-00W-visitor-screen-01-svga

H40 A03, SVGA, MP20-30

H40 A04, SVGA, MP20-30

H40 A06, SVGA, MP20-30

MP20/MP30 Screen Overview 5 Screen & Profile Overview

217

MP20/30Demo Configuration Screens

Name File

Service A S-02W-nbp-diag-svga

Big Numerics G-03W-bigNumerics-02-svga

2 Waves A G-02W-ovv-01-svga

2 Waves B G-02W-ovv-1Tr-01-svga

3 Waves A G-03W-01-svga

3 Waves B G-03W-1Tr-02-svga

4 Waves A

G-04W-1Press-01-svga

4 Waves B G-04W-1Press-1Tr-02-svga

Split Screen A G-04W-1Press-split-Tr-01-svga

Split Screen B G-06W-2Press-split-Tr-left-01-svga

HighResTrend N-01W-03HW-event-01-svga

Vital Signs A G-04W-TrA-01-svga

Horizon A-03W-Hor05Tr-01-svga

Other Bed G-03W-1Ovv01W-01-svga

Telemetry G-01W-Tele02W-01-svga

Cardiac Output G-03W-1Press-cardiac-out-01-svga

Wedge G-01W-wedge-01-svga

12 Lead ECG C-13W-12Lead-STmap-01-svga

ST Segments C-03W-03ST-snippets-01-svga

Demo A C-04W-1Press-Hor06Tr-svga

Visitors G-00W-visitor-screen-01-svga

DEMO, SVGA, MP20-30

5 Screen & Profile Overview MP20 Junior (M20) & MP20L (M21) Screen Overview

218

MP20 Junior (M20) & MP20L (M21) Screen

Overview

Note that the MP20L is available in the US only.

MP20 M20/M21 Option H10 Screens

MP20 M20 Option H20 Screens

Name File

Service A S-02W-nbp-diag-svga

Screen A G-03W-1Tr-22-svga

Screen B G-02W-ovv-1Tr-21-svga

Big Numerics G-03W-bigNumerics-24-svga

Screen C G-02W-ovv-21-svga

Screen D G-03W-21-svga

Screen E G-03W-22-svga

Screen F G-03W-1x2ovl-21-svga

Screen G G-03W-split-Tr-21-svga

12 Lead ECG C-13W-12Lead-23-svga

Service A S-02W-nbp-diag-svga

Screen A G-03W-1Tr-22-svga

Screen B G-02W-ovv-1Tr-21-svga

Big Numerics G-03W-bigNumerics-24-svga

H10 A03 M20, SVGA, MP20

H10 A03 M21, SVGA, MP20

Name File

Service A S-02W-nbp-diag-svga

Screen A G-03W-1Tr-22-svga

Screen B G-02W-ovv-1Tr-21-svga

Big Numerics G-03W-bigNumerics-24-svga

Screen C G-02W-ovv-21-svga

Screen D G-03W-21-svga

Screen E G-03W-22-svga

Screen F G-03W-1x2ovl-21-svga

Screen G G-03W-split-Tr-21-svga

12 Lead ECG C-13W-12Lead-23-svga

H20 A03 M20, SVGA, MP20

MP5 Screen Overview 5 Screen & Profile Overview

219

MP5 Screen Overview

MP5 Option H10 Screens

Name File

Service A S-02W-nbp-diag-svga

1 Wave G-01W-1Tr-51-svga

2 Waves G-02W-1Tr-51-svga

3 Waves G-03W-1Tr-51-svga

4 Waves G-04W-1Tr-51-svga

Vital Signs G-01W-TrA-51-svga

Split Screen A G-03W-split-Tr-1Tr-51-svga

Split Screen B G-04W-split-Tr-1Tr-51-svga

Other Bed G-03W-1Ovv01W-52-svga

12 Lead ECG C-13W-12Lead-STmap-51-svga

Service A S-02W-nbp-diag-svga

1 Wave G-01W-1Tr-51-svga

2 Waves G-02W-1Tr-51-svga

3 Waves G-03W-1Tr-51-svga

Vital Signs G-01W-TrA-51-svga

Split Screen G-03W-split-Tr-1Tr-51-svga

Other Bed G-02W-1Ovv01W-51-svga

12 Lead ECG C-13W-12Lead-STmap-51-svga

H10 A04, SVGA, MP5

H10 A03, SVGA, MP5

5 Screen & Profile Overview MP5 Screen Overview

220

MP5 Option H20 Screens

Name File

Service A S-02W-nbp-diag-svga

1 Wave G-01W-1Tr-51-svga

2 Waves G-02W-1Tr-51-svga

3 Waves G-03W-1Tr-51-svga

4 Waves G-04W-1Tr-51-svga

OxyCRG N-01W-03HW-51-svga

Vital Signs G-01W-TrA-51-svga

Split Screen A G-03W-split-Tr-1Tr-51-svga

Split Screen B G-04W-split-Tr-1Tr-51-svga

Other Bed G-03W-1Ovv01W-52-svga

Service A S-02W-nbp-diag-svga

1 Wave G-01W-1Tr-51-svga

2 Waves G-02W-1Tr-51-svga

3 Waves G-03W-1Tr-51-svga

CRG N-01W-02HW-51-svga

Vital Signs G-01W-TrA-51-svga

Split Screen G-03W-split-Tr-1Tr-51-svga

Other Bed G-02W-1Ovv01W-51-svga

H20 A04, SVGA, MP5

H20 A03, SVGA, MP5

MP5 Screen Overview 5 Screen & Profile Overview

221

MP5 Option H30 Screens

Name File

Service A S-02W-nbp-diag-svga

1 Wave G-01W-1Tr-51-svga

2 Waves A-02W-GM-1Tr-51-svga

3 Waves G-03W-1Tr-51-svga

4 Waves A G-04W-1Tr-51-svga

4 Waves B A-04W-GM-51-svga

Vital Signs G-01W-TrA-51-svga

Split Screen A G-03W-split-Tr-1Tr-51-svga

Split Screen B G-04W-split-Tr-1Tr-51-svga

Other Bed G-03W-1Ovv01W-52-svga

Service A S-02W-nbp-diag-svga

1 Wave G-01W-1Tr-51-svga

2 Waves A-02W-GM-1Tr-51-svga

3 Waves A G-03W-1Tr-51-svga

3 Waves B A-03W-GM-51-svga

Vital Signs G-01W-TrA-51-svga

Split Screen G-03W-split-Tr-1Tr-51-svga

Other Bed G-02W-1Ovv01W-51-svga

H30 A04, SVGA, MP5

H30 A03, SVGA, MP5

5 Screen & Profile Overview MP5 Screen Overview

222

MP5 Option H40 Screens

Name File

Service A S-02W-nbp-diag-svga

1 Wave G-01W-1Tr-51-svga

2 Waves G-02W-1Tr-51-svga

3 Waves G-03W-1Tr-51-svga

4 Waves G-04W-1Tr-51-svga

ST MAP C-04W-ST-Map-1Tr-51-svga

Vital Signs G-01W-TrA-51-svga

Split Screen A G-03W-split-Tr-1Tr-51-svga

Split Screen B G-04W-split-Tr-1Tr-51-svga

Other Bed C-03W-1Ovv01W-51-svga

Telemetry G-01W-Tele02W-51-svga

12 Lead ECG C-13W-12Lead-STmap-51-svga

Service A S-02W-nbp-diag-svga

1 Wave G-01W-1Tr-51-svga

2 Waves G-02W-1Tr-51-svga

3 Waves G-03W-1Tr-51-svga

ST MAP C-03W-ST-Map-1Tr-51-svga

Vital Signs G-01W-TrA-51-svga

Split Screen G-03W-split-Tr-1Tr-51-svga

Other Bed C-02W-1Ovv01W-51-svga

Telemetry G-01W-Tele02W-51-svga

12 Lead ECG C-13W-12Lead-STmap-51-svga

H40 A03, SVGA, MP5

H40 A04, SVGA, MP5

MP5 Screen Overview 5 Screen & Profile Overview

223

MP5 Demo Configuration Screens

Name File

Service A S-02W-nbp-diag-svga

1 Wave G-01W-1Tr-51-svga

2 Waves G-02W-1Tr-51-svga

3 Waves G-03W-1Tr-51-svga

4 Waves G-04W-1Tr-51-svga

Vital Signs G-01W-TrA-51-svga

Split Screen A G-03W-split-Tr-1Tr-51-svga

Split Screen B G-04W-split-Tr-1Tr-51-svga

Other Bed C-03W-1Ovv01W-51-svga

12 Lead ECG C-13W-12Lead-STmap-51-svga

Visitors G-00W-visitor-screen-01-svga

Big Numerics G-03W-bigNumerics-55-svga

3 Waves A A-03W-GM-51-svga

4 Waves A A-04W-GM-51-svga

Overlapping G-04W-2Press-1x2ovl-51-svga

ST MAP C-04W-ST-Map-1Tr-51-svga

Horizon G-04W-Hor06Tr-51-svga

OxyCRG N-01W-03HW-51-svga

Telemetry G-01W-Tele02W-51-svga

DEMO, SVGA, MP5

5 Screen & Profile Overview MP5T Screen Overview

224

MP5T Screen Overview

Name File

Service A S-02W-nbp-diag-svga

1 Wave G-01W-1Tr-51-svga

2 Waves G-02W-1Tr-51-svga

3 Waves G-03W-1Tr-52-svga

Vital Signs G-01W-TrA-51-svga

ST MAP C-03W-ST-Map-1Tr-51-svga

12 Lead ECG C-13W-12Lead-STmap-51-svga

H10 A03, SVGA, MP5T

MP2/X2 Screen Overview 5 Screen & Profile Overview

225

MP2/X2 Screen Overview

Name File

Service A S-01W-04N-qvga

Big Numerics G-00W-06N-02-qvga

10 Numerics G-00W-10N-01-qvga

Vital Signs A G-00W-03N-1TrT-01-qvga

1 Wave A G-01W-03N-01-qvga

1 Wave B G-01W-07N-01-qvga

1 Big Wave G-01W-big-05N-01-qvga

Vital Signs B G-01W-05N-1TrT-01-qvga

2 Waves A G-02W-04N-01-qvga

2 Waves B G-02W-08N-01-qvga

3 Waves G-03W-05N-01-qvga

Vital Signs G-00W-03N-TrA-01-qvga

Horizon G-00W-03N-1TrH-01-qvga

ST MAP C-01W-03N-ST-Map-01-qvga

12 Lead ECG C-13W-12Lead-01-qvga

Visitors G-00W-Visitors-01-qvga

MP2, QVGA

Name File

Service A S-01W-04N-qvga

Big Numerics G-00W-06N-02-qvga

10 Numerics G-00W-10N-01-qvga

Vital Signs A G-00W-03N-1TrT-01-qvga

1 Wave A G-01W-03N-01-qvga

1 Wave B G-01W-07N-01-qvga

1 Big Wave G-01W-big-05N-01-qvga

Vital Signs B G-01W-05N-1TrT-01-qvga

2 Waves A G-02W-04N-01-qvga

2 Waves B G-02W-08N-01-qvga

3 Waves G-03W-05N-01-qvga

Vital Signs G-00W-03N-TrA-01-qvga

Horizon G-00W-03N-1TrH-01-qvga

ST MAP C-01W-03N-ST-Map-01-qvga

12 Lead ECG C-13W-12Lead-01-qvga

Visitors G-00W-Visitors-01-qvga

X2, QVGA

5 Screen & Profile Overview MP2/X2 Screen Overview

226

A options 178

accessing profiles 9

addressograph (monitor

settings)

103

advanced event surveillance 124

AGM 75

AGT/AGT1/AGT2 settings

(measurement settings)

alarm behavior, french (assistance

publique homologation

standard)

alarm latching 38

alarm recordings (monitor

settings)

alarm settings (monitor settings) 84

aperiodic parameters 120, 172

aperiodic trend database 172

application area option 27

application areas 177

arrhythmia measurement

settings)

ask for new pat (unique monitor

settings) 150

assistance publique alarm

requirements

auto alarm limit settings (monitor

settings)

auto filter 97

auto reports 104

setting up an end case report 104

auto reports (monitor settings) 103

awRR (CO2) (measurement

settings)

awRR (gas analyzer) (measurement

settings)

basic event surveillance 124

bed information settings 170

BIS settings (measurement

settings) 70

breadcrumb trail 25

C.O. (measurement settings) 55

C.O. window settings (monitor

settings)

calculation settings (monitor

setting)

CCO (measurement settings) 56

changing

default profile

profile name 13

screen layout 20

screens 18

settings block name 13

settings blocks 11

clamps for extreme limit alarms 34

clock (screen setting) 20

CO2 (measurement settings) 61

combining settings blocks 10

configuration implications 25

configuration mode

additional settings

description of 2

entering 6

leaving 6

configuration pop-up keys 9

configuration tables 25

configuration with the support

tool

configuring a centrally connected

printer

164

configuring a locally connected

printer 163

configuring screens 17

confirm pop-up key 9

country-specific settings (unique

monitor settings)

154

CPP (Cerebral Perfusion

Pressure) 53

CPP (measurement settings) 53

creating

screens

creating a new profile 12

CSA buffer configuration 142

CSA configuration 96

CSA report (monitor settings) 106

CSA window (monitor settings) 96

database 171

database config 171

database options

event database

173

delete pop-up key 9

deleting a settings block or profile 12

Delta SpO2 45

Delta SpO2(measurement

settings)

Delta Temp 74

Delta Temp (measurement

settings)

Derived measurements

CPP

Delta SpO2 45

Delta Temp 74

PPV 54

Sp-vO2 58

SVR 57

DES settings (measurement

settings) 80

display 5

using a second 14

using a third 14

display, independent 14

drug calculator configuration

(unique monitor setting)

143

E.0 configuration changes 175

ECG (measurement settings) 30

ECG application (monitor

settings)

ECG reports (monitor settings) 105

ECG/Pulse alarms (measurement

settings)

EEG (measurement settings) 66

EEG montages (measurement

settings)

EEG-CSA buffer configuration

(unique monitor setting)

142

EEG-CSA Window configuration

(monitor setting) 96

electrocautery artifact 97

embedded other bed window (screen

setting) 23

embedded trend window (screen

setting)

22, 23

end case report 104

ENF settings (measurement

settings)

enhanced condition 130

Enter MeasValues (global

settings)

151

entering configuration mode 6

event annotations (unique monitor

settings)

131

event database options 173

event episode 129

event settings (unique monitor

settings) 124

event surveill. 124

event surveillance

options

124

example screen 179

exiting configuration mode 6

extreme bradycardia limits 34

extreme tachycardia limits 34

factory defaults 26

french alarm behavior 87

function keys (unique monitor

settings)

141

gas analyzer (measurement

settings)

gas analyzer CO2 settings

(measurement settings) 80

global settings 5, 144

ask for new pat 150

country-specific settings 154

Enter MeasValues 151

printer configuration 160

timer selection and order 149

global smartkeys

changing selection and

sequence

141

global smartkeys (unique monitor

settings) 140

global trend style (monitor

settings)

GM 75

graphical trend report (monitor

settings)

107

H options 27, 177

H option-specific settings 174

HAL settings (measurement

settings)

hardware settings 5, 166

bed information 170

input devices 169

multiple displays 167

video 168

WLAN 169

horizon trends (monitor settings) 90

If 135

implications of configuration

changes

inop severity (monitor settings) 89

input device settings (hardware

settings)

169

intellivue support tool 6

invasive pressure (measurement

settings)

ISO settings (measurement

settings)

item name 26

leaving configuration mode 6

levels of event surveillance 124

license key 7

load pop-up key 9

loading a settings block 11

locking a profile 13

locking a settings block 13

loops window settings (monitor

settings) 96

M options 27

MAC (measurement settings) 82

manual data entry settings 151

Max Hold 62

MDF (mean dominant

frequency)

mean dominant frequency

(MDF)

measurement settings 5

AGT/AGT1/AGT2 75

arrhythmia 36

awRR (CO2) 62

awRR (gas analyzer) 81

BIS 70

C.O. 55

CCO 56

CO2 61

CO2 (gas analyzer) 80

CPP 53

Delta SpO2 45

Delta Temp 74

DES 80

ECG 30

ECG/Pulse alarms 33

EEG 66

EEG montages 68

ENF 79

gas analyzer 75

HAL 77

invasive pressure 47

ISO 78

MAC 82

N2O 76

NBP 45

O2 76

PPV 54

predictive temp 72

Pulse (Pressure) 52

Pulse (SpO2) 44

pulse/system pulse 35

QT analysis 41

respiration 63

RRspir 66

SEV 79

spirometry 64

SpO2 42

Sp-vO2 58

ST analysis 38

SvO2 58

SVR 57

tcGas 59

temperature 71

VueLink 74

measurement settings block 3

modifying a profile 10

monitor database 171

monitor installation 5

monitor installation, hardware

settings 5

monitor settings 5

addressograph 103

alarm recordings 87

alarms 84

auto alarm limits 88

auto reports 103

C.O. window 94

calculations 98

CSA report 106

CSA window 96

ECG application 97

ECG reports 105

EEG-CSA Window 96

french alarm behavior 87

global trend style 91

graphical trend report 107

horizon trends 90

inop severity 89

loops window 96

network 112

reports 99

screen trends 90

ST Map 94

trend reports 106

trend window 92

user interface 108

vital signs recording 93

vital signs report 106

wedge window 95

monitor settings block 3

MP20 model option 27

multiple display settings (hardware

settings)

167

N2O settings (measurement

settings)

network settings (monitor

setting)

112

new pop-up key 9

not applicable settings in tables 27

NPB (measurement settings) 45

Nurse Call Relay

Inop/alarm latency

nurse call relay

relay sensitivity

O2 settings (measurement

settings)

oper. mode 26

options

application area (H option)

MP20 model (M option) 27

paced mode setting 4

parameter scales 121

patient category setting 4

peak power frequency (PPF) 67

pop-up key

confirm

delete 9

load 9

new 9

rename 9

set default 9

store 9

pop-up keys, configuration 9

PPF (peak power frequency) 67

PPV (measurement settings) 54

PPV (Pulse Pressure Variation) 54

predictive temp (measurement

settings)

previewing a profile 11

print database 162, 173

printer configuration (global

setting) 160

printing a test report 165

profile 3

accessing 9

changing 2

changing default 13

changing the combination of

settings blocks

components 3

creating new 11, 12

deleting 12

locking 13

modifying 10

previewing display settings 11

previewing measurement

settings

previewing monitor settings 11

renaming 13

structure 3

unlocking 13

profile settings 28

ProtocolWatch (unique monitor

settings)

132

ProtocolWatch symbol (screen

setting)

Pulse(Pressure) (measurement

settings)

Pulse(SpO2) (measurement

settings)

pulse/system pulse (measurement

settings)

QT analysis (measurement

settings)

recording settings (unique monitor

setting)

133

release-specific information 175

rename pop-up key 9

renaming a settings block or

profile 13

report configuration (monitor

setting)

reports

scheduled

104

respiration (measurement

settings)

RRspir (measurement settings) 66

scheduled reports 104

screen example 179

screen layout 179

screen layout, changing 20

screen settings 17

clock on main screen 20

embedded other bed window 23

embedded trend window 22, 23

ProtocolWatch symbol on main

screen

screen trend settings 22

smartkeys 21

timer on main screen 19

wave channel speed 22

screen trend (screen setting) 22

screen trends 178

screen trends (monitor settings) 90

screens

changing

creating new 18

in profiles 5

second display 14

SEF numeric (BIS) 70

SEF numeric (EEG) 67

set default pop-up key 9

settings block

deleting

loading 11

locking 13

renaming 13

unlocking 13

settings blocks 10

changing 11

SEV settings (measurement

settings)

smartkeys

changing selection and

sequence

deleting 21

sorting 21

smartkeys (screen setting) 21

spectral edge frequency numeric

(BIS)

spectral edge frequency numeric

(EEG)

spirometry (measurement

settings) 64

SpO2 (measurement settings) 42

Sp-vO2 (measurement settings) 58

SR numeric (BIS) 70

ST analysis (measurement

settings)

ST Map settings (monitor

settings)

ST snippets 178

store pop-up key 9

support tool 6

what can be configured 7

support tool license key 7

support tool screen library 178

suppression ratio (BIS) 70

SvO2 (measurement settings) 58

SVR (measurement settings) 57

SVR (Systemic Vascular

Resistance)

tcGas (measurement settings) 59

temperature settings (measurement

settings)

third display 14

timer (screen setting) 19

timer selection and order 139

timer selection and order (global

settings)

149

timer settings (unique monitor

setting) 136

total power numeric (BIS) 71

total power numeric (EEG) 67

trend database for aperiodic parameters 172

trend group settings (unique monitor settings) 117

trend priority (unique monitor settings) 120

trend report settings (monitor settings) 106

trend scale settings (unique monitor settings) 121

trend units settings (unique monitor settings) 121

trend window settings (monitor settings) 92

trigger condition 130

undo changes 12

unique monitor settings 116

drug calculator 143

EEG-CSA buffer 142

event annotations 131

events 124

function keys 141

global smartkeys 140

ProtocolWatch 132

recordings 133

timers 136

trend groups 117

trend priority 120

trend scales 121

trend units 121

unlocking a profile 13

unlocking a settings block 13

user interface settings (monitor setting) 108

video settings (hardware) 168

visitors screen 178

vital signs recording (monitor settings) 93

vital signs report (monitor settings) 106

VueLink settings (measurement settings) 74

wave channel speed (screen setting) 22

wave options 178

wedge window settings (monitor settings) 95

which monitor models is this guide for 1

who is this guide for 1

WLAN settings (hardware settings) 169